P. 1
Atoll 2.8.3 User Manual MW E2

Atoll 2.8.3 User Manual MW E2

|Views: 2,665|Likes:
Published by Heri Kiswanto

More info:

Published by: Heri Kiswanto on May 03, 2011
Copyright:Attribution Non-commercial

Availability:

Read on Scribd mobile: iPhone, iPad and Android.
download as PDF, TXT or read online from Scribd
See more
See less

02/27/2013

pdf

text

original

Sections

  • 1 The Working Environment
  • 1.1 The Atoll Work Area
  • 1.1.1 Working with Document Windows
  • 1.1.2 Docking or Floating an Atoll Window
  • Or
  • 1.2 The Explorer Window
  • 1.2.1 Working with the Explorer Window Tabs
  • 1.2.2 Navigating in the Explorer Window
  • 1.2.3 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer
  • 1.2.4 Working with Layers Using the Explorer
  • 1.3 Working with Objects
  • 1.3.1 Using the Object Context Menu
  • 1.3.1.1 Renaming an Object
  • 1.3.1.2 Deleting an Object
  • 1.3.1.3 Displaying the Properties of an Object
  • 1.3.2 Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map
  • 1.3.2.1 Selecting One of Several Microwave Links
  • 1.3.2.2 Moving a Site Using the Mouse
  • 1.3.2.3 Moving a Site to a Higher Location
  • 1.3.2.4 Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse
  • 1.3.2.5 Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse
  • 1.3.2.6 Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse
  • 1.3.3 Display Properties of Objects
  • 1.3.3.1 Defining the Display Properties of Objects
  • Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types
  • Defining the Visibility Scale
  • 1.3.3.2 Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects
  • Automatic Display Type - Server Coverage Studies
  • 1.4 Working with Maps
  • 1.4.1 Changing the Map Scale
  • 1.4.1.1 Zooming In and Out
  • 1.4.1.2 Zooming In on a Specific Area
  • 1.4.1.3 Choosing a Scale
  • 1.4.1.4 Changing Between Previous Zoom Levels
  • 1.4.2 Moving the Map in the Document Window
  • 1.4.3 Using the Panoramic Window
  • 1.4.4 Centring the Map Window on an Object
  • 1.4.5 Measuring Distances on the Map
  • 1.4.6 Displaying Rulers Around the Map
  • 1.4.7 Displaying the Map Legend
  • 1.4.8 Using Zones in the Map Window
  • 1.4.8.1 Using a Filtering Zone
  • 1.4.8.2 Using a Computation Zone
  • 1.4.8.3 Using a Focus Zone
  • 1.4.8.4 Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools
  • Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar
  • Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu
  • 1.4.8.5 Using a Printing Zone
  • 1.4.8.6 Using a Geographic Export Zone
  • 1.4.9 Editing Polygons, Lines, and Points
  • 1.4.9.1 Adding a Vector Layer
  • 1.4.9.2 Creating Polygons, Lines, and Points
  • 1.4.9.3 Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines
  • 1.4.9.4 Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar
  • 1.4.9.5 Editing a Point
  • 1.4.9.6 Editing Contours, Lines, and Points Using the Context Menu
  • 1.4.10 Exporting Coverage Prediction Results
  • 1.4.10.1 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format
  • 1.4.10.2 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format
  • 1.4.10.3 Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions
  • 1.4.11 Saving a Map as a Graphic Image
  • 1.4.12 Copying a Map to Another Application
  • 1.4.13 Map Window Pointers
  • 1.5 Working with Data Tables
  • 1.5.1 Opening a Data Table
  • 1.5.2 Adding, Deleting, and Editing Data Table Fields
  • 1.5.2.1 Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields
  • 1.5.2.2 Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table
  • 1.5.2.3 Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table
  • 1.5.3 Editing the Contents of a Table
  • 1.5.4 Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table
  • 1.5.5 Defining the Table Format
  • 1.5.6 Copying and Pasting in Tables
  • 1.5.6.1 Copying and Pasting a Table Element
  • 1.5.6.2 Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells
  • 1.5.7 Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents
  • 1.5.8 Exporting Tables to Text Files
  • 1.5.9 Importing Tables from Text Files
  • 1.5.10 Exporting Tables to XML Files
  • 1.5.11 Importing Tables from XML Files
  • 1.6 Printing in Atoll
  • 1.6.1 Printing Data Tables and Reports
  • 1.6.2 Printing a Map
  • 1.6.2.1 Printing Recommendations
  • 1.6.2.2 Defining the Printing Zone
  • 1.6.2.3 Defining the Print Layout
  • 1.6.3 Previewing Your Printing
  • 1.6.4 Printing a Docking Window
  • 1.7 Grouping, Sorting, and Filtering Data
  • 1.7.1 Grouping Data Objects
  • 1.7.1.1 Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property
  • 1.7.1.2 Configuring the Group By Submenu
  • 1.7.1.3 Grouping Microwave Links by Site
  • 1.7.1.4 Advanced Grouping
  • 1.7.1.5 Examples of Grouping
  • 1.7.2 Sorting Data
  • 1.7.2.1 Sorting Data in Tables
  • 1.7.2.2 Advanced Sorting
  • 1.7.3 Filtering Data
  • 1.7.3.1 Filtering in Data Tables by Selection
  • 1.7.3.2 Advanced Data Filtering
  • 1.7.3.3 Restoring All Records
  • 1.7.3.4 Advanced Filtering: Examples
  • 1.7.3.4.1 Advanced Filtering: Example1
  • 1.7.4 User Configurations
  • 1.7.4.1 Exporting a User Configuration
  • 1.7.4.2 Importing a User Configuration
  • 1.7.5 Site Lists
  • 1.7.5.1 Creating a Site List
  • 1.7.5.2 Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window
  • 1.7.5.3 Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window
  • 1.7.5.4 Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone
  • 1.7.5.5 Editing a Site List
  • 1.7.5.6 Filtering on a Site List
  • 1.7.6 Folder Configurations
  • 1.7.6.1 Creating a Folder Configuration
  • 1.7.6.2 Applying a Saved Folder Configuration
  • 1.7.6.3 Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration
  • 1.7.6.4 Exporting a Folder Configuration
  • 1.7.6.5 Importing a Folder Configuration
  • 1.7.6.6 Deleting a Folder Configuration
  • 1.7.7 Creating and Comparing Subfolders
  • 1.7.8 Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone
  • 1.8 Tips and Tricks
  • 1.8.1 Undoing and Redoing
  • 1.8.2 Refreshing Maps and Folders
  • 1.8.3 Searching for Objects on the Map
  • 1.8.3.1 Searching for a Map Object by Its Name
  • 1.8.3.2 Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property
  • 1.8.3.3 Searching for a Point on the Map
  • 1.8.4 Using the Status Bar to Get Information
  • 1.8.5 Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer
  • 1.8.6 Using Icons from the Toolbar
  • 1.8.7 Using Shortcuts in Atoll
  • 2 Starting an Atoll Project
  • 2.1 Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project
  • 2.2 Creating an Atoll Document
  • 2.2.1 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template
  • 2.2.1.1 Templates Available
  • 2.2.1.2 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template
  • 2.2.1.3 Defining a New Atoll Document
  • 2.2.1.3.1 Projection and Display Coordinate Systems
  • 2.2.2 Working in a Multi-User Environment
  • 2.2.2.1 The Atoll Multi-User Environment
  • 2.2.2.2 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database
  • 2.2.2.2.2 Selecting the Data to Load From the Database
  • 2.2.2.3 Working With a Document on a Database
  • 2.2.2.4 Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database
  • 2.2.2.5 Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database
  • 2.2.2.5.1 Archiving All Modifications in the Database
  • 2.2.2.5.2 Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the Database
  • 2.2.2.5.3 Resolving Data Conflicts
  • 2.3 Making a Backup of Your Document
  • 2.3.1 Configuring Automatic Backup
  • 2.3.2 Recovering a Backup
  • 2.4 Making and Sharing Portable Atoll Projects
  • 3 Managing Geographic Data
  • 3.1 Geographic Data Types
  • 3.2 Supported Geographic Data Formats
  • 3.3 Importing Geo Data Files
  • 3.3.1 Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File
  • 3.3.2 Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File
  • 3.3.3 Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data
  • 3.3.3.1 Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type
  • 3.3.3.2 Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database
  • 3.3.4 Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File
  • 3.3.5 Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders
  • 3.3.6 Embedding Geographic Data
  • 3.3.7 Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data File
  • 3.4 Digital Terrain Models
  • 3.5 Clutter Classes
  • 3.5.1 Assigning Names to Clutter Classes
  • 3.5.2 Defining Clutter Class Properties
  • 3.5.3 Adding a Clutter Class
  • 3.5.4 Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes
  • 3.5.5 Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class
  • 3.6 Clutter Heights
  • 3.7 Contours, Lines, and Points
  • 3.7.1 Managing the Display of a Vector Layer
  • 3.7.2 Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer
  • 3.7.3 Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab
  • 3.8 Scanned Images
  • 3.8.1 Importing Several Scanned Images
  • 3.8.2 Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images
  • 3.9 Geoclimatic Maps
  • 3.9.1 Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties
  • 3.9.2 Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics
  • 3.10 Setting the Priority of Geo Data
  • 3.10.1 Setting the Display Priority of Geo Data
  • 3.10.2 Setting the Priority of Geo Data in Calculations
  • 3.10.2.1 Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas
  • 3.10.2.2 Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area
  • 3.10.2.3 Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area
  • 3.11 Displaying Information About Geo Data
  • 3.12 Geographic Data Sets
  • 3.12.1 Exporting a Geo Data Set
  • 3.12.2 Importing a Geo Data Set
  • 3.13 Editing Geographic Data
  • 3.13.1 Editing Clutter Class Maps
  • 3.13.1.1 Creating a Clutter Polygon
  • 3.13.1.2 Editing Clutter Polygons
  • 3.13.1.3 Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons
  • 3.13.1.4 Deleting Clutter Polygons
  • 3.13.2 Editing Geoclimatic Maps
  • 3.14 Saving Geographic Data
  • 3.14.1 Saving Modifications to an External File
  • 3.14.1.1 Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File
  • 3.14.1.2 Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File
  • 3.14.2 Updating the Source File
  • 3.14.3 Combining Several Files into One File
  • 3.14.4 Exporting an Embedded File
  • 3.14.5 Creating a New File from a Larger File
  • 4 Antennas and Equipment
  • 4.1 Defining the List of Manufacturers
  • 4.2 Defining Antennas
  • 4.2.1 Creating an Antenna
  • 4.2.2 Importing Microwave Antennas
  • 4.2.3 Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns
  • Editing a Single Radiation Pattern
  • Copying an Antenna Pattern to One or More Antennas
  • 4.2.4 Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns
  • 4.3 Microwave Equipment
  • 4.3.1 Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll
  • 4.3.2 Importing Microwave Equipment
  • 4.3.3 Advanced Configuration
  • 4.3.3.1 Digital Hierarchies
  • 4.3.3.2 Interference Reduction Factor
  • 4.3.3.3 Theoretical Graphs
  • 4.4 Microwave Waveguides and Cables
  • 4.4.1 Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables
  • 4.4.2 Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable
  • 4.5 Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility
  • 4.5.1 Defining Compatibility Manually
  • 4.5.1.1 Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table
  • 4.5.1.2 Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table
  • 4.5.2 Using Assistants to Define Compatibility
  • 4.5.2.1 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility
  • 4.5.2.2 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility
  • 5 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands
  • 5.1 Microwave Frequency Bands
  • 5.1.1 Long-Haul Frequency Band
  • 5.1.2 Medium-Haul Frequency Band
  • 5.1.3 Short-Haul Frequency Band
  • 5.2 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands
  • 5.3 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands
  • 5.3.1 Example of Creating a Frequency Sub-band
  • 6 Managing Calculations in Atoll
  • 6.1 Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects
  • 6.1.1 Working with the Microwave Propagation Model
  • 6.1.2 Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model
  • 6.2 Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives
  • 6.2.1 Microwave Link Classes
  • 6.2.2 Defining Performance Objectives
  • The Purpose of Microwave Error Performance Objectives
  • 6.2.2.1 Defining Quality Objectives
  • 6.2.2.2 Defining Availability Objectives
  • 6.3 Defining Calculation Parameters
  • 6.3.1 Global Parameters
  • 6.3.2 Link Parameters
  • 6.3.2.1 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link
  • 6.3.2.2 Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links
  • 6.3.2.3 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links
  • 7 Microwave Link Project Management
  • 7.1 Designing a Microwave Link Network
  • 7.2 Planning and Optimising Microwave Sites
  • 7.2.1 Creating Sites
  • 7.2.1.1 Site Description
  • 7.2.1.2 Creating or Modifying a Site
  • 7.2.2 Site Survey Tools
  • 7.2.2.1 Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site
  • 7.2.2.2 Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites
  • 7.2.2.3 Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites
  • 7.2.2.4 Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites
  • 7.2.2.5 Displaying a 360° View Around One Site
  • 7.2.3 Search Tools for New Sites
  • 7.3 Creating Microwave Links
  • 7.3.1 Definition of a Microwave Link
  • 7.3.2 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link
  • 7.3.3 Defining Port Parameters
  • 7.3.4 Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template
  • 7.3.5 Managing Microwave Link Templates
  • 7.3.5.1 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template
  • 7.3.5.2 Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template
  • 7.3.5.3 Deleting a Microwave Link Template
  • 7.3.6 Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map
  • 7.3.7 Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links
  • 7.3.8 Checking Data Consistency
  • 7.3.9 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document
  • 7.4 Analysing the Path Profile
  • 7.4.1 Displaying the Path Profile
  • 7.4.1.1 Viewing a Microwave Link Profile
  • 7.4.1.2 Studying Microwave Link Clearance
  • 7.4.1.3 Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options
  • 7.4.1.4 Zooming In on the Profile
  • 7.4.1.5 Printing a Microwave Link Profile
  • 7.4.1.6 Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile
  • 7.4.1.6.1 Using the Profile Tab to Display Data of Each Point
  • 7.4.1.6.2 Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point
  • 7.4.1.7 Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values
  • 7.4.1.7.2 Displaying Reflection and Vegetation Zones
  • 7.4.2 Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights
  • 7.4.2.1 Adjusting Microwave Antenna Heights Using the Mouse
  • 7.4.2.2 Defining Microwave Antenna Heights
  • 7.4.2.3 Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights
  • 7.4.3 Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater
  • 7.4.3.1 Description of a Passive Repeater
  • 7.4.3.2 Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater
  • 7.4.3.3 Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse
  • 7.5 Analysing Microwave Link Reliability
  • 7.5.1 Analysing a Single Microwave Link
  • 7.5.1.1 Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins
  • 7.5.1.2 Calculating a Microwave Link Budget
  • 7.5.1.3 Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters
  • 7.5.1.4 Configuring the Link Budget Report Display
  • 7.5.1.5 Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report
  • 7.5.2 Analysing Microwave Links
  • 7.5.2.1 Setting a Microwave Link as Active
  • 7.5.2.2 Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report
  • 7.5.2.3 Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets
  • 7.5.2.4 Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity
  • 7.5.3 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis
  • 7.5.3.1 Creating Multi-hops
  • 7.5.3.1.2 Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link Using the Mouse
  • 7.5.3.1.3 Creating a Multi-hop on the Map Using the Mouse
  • 7.5.3.1.4 Mapping Multiple Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links Globally
  • 7.5.3.1.5 Setting all Microwave Links of a Multi-Hop Link as Active
  • 7.5.3.2 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis
  • 7.6 Studying Reflection
  • 7.6.1 Displaying Reflection
  • 7.6.2 Analysing Reflections
  • 7.6.2.1 Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report
  • 7.6.2.2 Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report
  • 7.6.2.3 Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters
  • 7.6.3 Solutions Against Reflections
  • 7.7 Planning Microwave Link Channels
  • 7.7.1 Checking Microwave Link Site Parities
  • 7.7.1.1 Checking Site Parities on the Map
  • 7.7.1.2 Creating a Report on Site Parities
  • 7.7.2 Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse
  • 7.7.3 Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search
  • 7.7.4 Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser
  • 7.7.5 Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products
  • 7.8 Analysing Interference
  • 7.8.1 Interference Reduction Factor
  • 7.8.1.1 Defining IRF Graphs Manually
  • 7.8.1.2 Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant
  • 7.8.2 Using IRF in Interference Calculations
  • 7.8.3 Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link
  • 7.8.4 Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links
  • 7.8.4.1 Defining the Content of the Interference Report
  • 7.8.4.2 Calculating Interference on Multiple Microwave Links
  • 7.8.5 Managing Interference Calculation Validity
  • 7.8.6 Displaying Interference on the Map
  • 7.9 Advanced Configuration
  • 7.9.1 Point-to-Multipoint Links
  • 7.9.1.1 Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link
  • 7.9.1.2 Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties
  • 7.9.1.3 Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active
  • 7.9.1.4 Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally
  • 7.9.1.5 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link
  • 7.9.1.6 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse
  • 7.9.1.7 Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link
  • 7.9.1.8 Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link
  • 7.9.1.9 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub
  • 7.9.1.10 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse
  • Index

User Manual Microwave Links

v e r s i o n 2.8.3

AT283_UMM_E2

Atoll User Manual

2

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Contact Information
Forsk (Head Office) 7 rue des Briquetiers 31700 Blagnac France

    

www.forsk.com sales@forsk.com helpdesk@forsk.com +33 (0) 562 74 72 10 +33 (0) 562 74 72 25 +33 (0) 562 74 72 11 sales_us@forsk.com support_us@forsk.com +1 312 674 4846 +1 888 GoAtoll (+1 888 462 8655) +1 312 674 4847 www.forsk.com.cn enquiries@forsk.com.cn +86 20 8553 8938 +86 20 8553 8285

Web Sales and pricing information Technical support General Technical support Fax Sales and pricing information Technical support General Technical support Fax Web Information and enquiries Telephone Fax

Forsk (USA Office) 200 South Wacker Drive Suite 3100 Chicago, IL 60606 USA

   

Forsk (China Office) Suite 302, 3/F, West Tower, Jiadu Commercial Building, No.66 Jianzhong Road, Tianhe Hi-Tech Industrial Zone, Guangzhou, 510665, People’s Republic of China

   

Atoll 2.8.3 User Manual Release AT283_UMM_E2 © Copyright 1997 - 2010 by Forsk The software described in this document is provided under a license agreement and may only be used or copied under the terms and conditions of the license agreement. No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form without prior authorisation from Forsk. The product or brand names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective registering parties.

About the Atoll User Documentation
The Atoll user documentation is a guide and reference for users working with Atoll. Atoll is easy to use and offers a clear, self-explanatory user interface. The user documentation helps the user make effective and efficient use of all the features that Atoll offers. The user documentation aims to familiarise the user with the working environment of Atoll and enable him to use all of Atoll’s features and functions. The Atoll user documentation is technology-specific. For each Atoll radio technology, the Atoll user manual contains instructions and information specific to that technology as well as chapters describing the Atoll working environment and the tools available.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

3

Atoll User Manual

4

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

.....4......................................2....................................................4..........4....4................. 36 Editing a Point............................ 18 Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map ...................... 16 Working with Layers Using the Explorer ..... 1 1...................2 1.............................3 1..4............................3 1.............4......................................................1................................................3 1... 33 Using a Geographic Export Zone ......................1.......................................................... 16 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer.........3......3 1..3..8..........9....3....................................................9........... 17 Using the Object Context Menu . 27 Centring the Map Window on an Object...................4 1..........4.1 1...............................................4 1....................2 1............. 28 Displaying Rulers Around the Map .....................................................4.....4.......4........ 26 Changing the Map Scale ..........................................................2..............................................................................................................................................1 1.................2 1......................................................................Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents............6 1....................2........................................10........ 14 The Explorer Window ...................................4.................................................... 14 Docking or Floating an Atoll Window.................... 34 Creating Polygons.4..........................3....................................4...................................................................................................................................... 19 Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse ........................................8................12 © Forsk 2010 5 ................................ 40 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 1....10.................................................................2 1...........1 1....................................................................................................................... 17 Deleting an Object .................................. 21 Defining the Display Properties of Objects ....................1........4............1 1.............................1 1......... 27 Choosing a Scale.3 1...........................................3 1..................................................................1 1..............................4.............................2...................................................................................................................1 1...................................... 27 Moving the Map in the Document Window.4 1......................................................................................4 1.1..............................................3.......................4..........................................8..................................8 1............................................9.5 1..1 1.................... 15 Working with the Explorer Window Tabs.....2.............. Lines................... 29 Using a Computation Zone ......................................1......... 35 Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar.....2 1....... 37 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format ......................2.................................... 26 Zooming In on a Specific Area..3 1....... 37 Exporting Coverage Prediction Results.................................................................................................4..........6 1.............4.................5 1.............................. 31 Using a Printing Zone ...........2 1................. 33 Editing Polygons..........9......................................................... 36 Editing Contours....3.........................................8.....................................................................1 1........3 1..............................7 1..................................................3 1............................3............................2 5 The Working Environment ..............4.........4................................... 16 Working with Objects ........................................10...................................4................8................................................2 1....4..... 15 Navigating in the Explorer Window ........... 26 Zooming In and Out ..... 34 Adding a Vector Layer .............3.3.....................8.......... Lines.. 25 Working with Maps.......................................................... Lines....4................................................1............................4.............................. 20 Display Properties of Objects ............6 1......1 1...........................................4...........1 1.3...... 27 Changing Between Previous Zoom Levels...5 1.......... 13 The Atoll Work Area ...................... 38 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format .........1 1.....4.........................................1.............................................................................................................................................5 1.....2 1.3.................. 18 Selecting One of Several Microwave Links .................................................... 30 Using a Focus Zone............... 35 Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines ...................4 1.2 1................. 29 Using a Filtering Zone..............................9 1......................................3..............................2 1........................................3......................................................6 1.................................................................................................10 1.4....3......................................... 21 Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects .....................2.....3 1... 28 Measuring Distances on the Map ....... and Points ........................................... 17 Renaming an Object .......2........................................................................... 31 Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools......................................................................................... 13 Working with Document Windows ................................................................................ and Points.............1........ 29 Using Zones in the Map Window.................................................... 19 Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse .... 27 Using the Panoramic Window ...........................3................................................4...........................4 1... 39 Saving a Map as a Graphic Image ...............................1........................................................................................................ 19 Moving a Site Using the Mouse ...................................9...... 17 Displaying the Properties of an Object .................4.........3..........................................11 1....... 19 Moving a Site to a Higher Location...............2 1..........9.............. 20 Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse .....................................4 1................... 28 Displaying the Map Legend .............................................. and Points Using the Context Menu .............................................................. 38 Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions............. 39 Copying a Map to Another Application ...4................................................................4..........................2........................................................2...

.............13 Map Window Pointers ............................4 1...................4................................................52 Printing Data Tables and Reports ...68 Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone ...................5............6 1.........................7...............5...........................49 Importing Tables from Text Files...................................................6.......................2...2.............6 1........7 1.....................................................................1 1................................................60 Sorting Data in Tables...............................................1 1...6 1...3 1..............................5.....................................................................62 Advanced Data Filtering .......................................................................................................6 1.......................43 Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table ...................8..........................56 Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property ...........2 1....71 Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone..2 1..................56 Configuring the Group By Submenu .................68 Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window ......70 Importing a Folder Configuration................1 1.64 User Configurations ...............72 Undoing and Redoing ..............................................................40 1.....50 Exporting Tables to XML Files ..................7.............................2 1.....72 Refreshing Maps and Folders ..............................................6..........................................................................................................5...............3 1...2..........................55 Printing a Docking Window .........................................5 1..........................................................................5.............3 1.............................2.........................5.......................................................69 Creating a Folder Configuration ..........................................................................5 1...............73 Searching for a Point on the Map .......................7....................................7..........................................................................4 1..........5.......................................................................................................................................5........3.......................5 1.....2 1..41 Opening a Data Table ................................................................................................................................................................................5......................1 1....................................................................6................5.........8 1...............................1 1...........................6............................................................7......................................................................5...............2 1...........2 1.....4...............................58 Examples of Grouping .....7........7................5..............................................................................................................................................11 Working with Data Tables ..............................................6................................................. Sorting....56 Grouping............42 Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields ............1 1...1...............................1.71 Tips and Tricks .........................7.....................64 Advanced Filtering: Examples ....1 1..........................................................4 1...................................................................1 1..7........................................................................7.........................................................................5...................................................49 Exporting Tables to Text Files................1 1......................................2...................................5.........70 Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration ....6........................67 Site Lists..................52 Printing Recommendations ...........................................8................................................7..............8....7 1................................................................................................66 Exporting a User Configuration .3 1.8 1....................................2 1........6..................................................7..4 1........................................................................................................44 Defining the Table Format..........7...........................................3.....72 Searching for Objects on the Map......................2 1.....7..........................................5.................................................5.............53 Defining the Print Layout .....62 Filtering in Data Tables by Selection.............1 1........................................................................................................................................................2 1..........................................7........................7.................8 1....................41 Adding........................................................5.....2 1.....................70 Deleting a Folder Configuration.......................................................7............8......................6.....47 Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells ..7.........3 1................................................................................7............................................3...........42 Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table .............................54 Previewing Your Printing.69 Filtering on a Site List..61 Filtering Data..............1 1..................................3..................................7.................1..................................................................................2 1....7............................................2 1...67 Importing a User Configuration .......................3 1............3 1......7.........................................................1 1........57 Grouping Microwave Links by Site .....5...........................................................................................44 Copying and Pasting in Tables .1 1....................................................................................................7.............................................................................................63 Restoring All Records.................5 1..................................................2...................68 Editing a Site List...........................52 Printing in Atoll .................5............................................................................................................7..............Atoll User Manual 1...........................6..................6..................................72 Searching for a Map Object by Its Name ................................43 Editing the Contents of a Table......5...................72 Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property ........4 1.52 Printing a Map ............................7............. and Editing Data Table Fields........6 1..............5 1.....................60 Advanced Sorting ...................51 Importing Tables from XML Files ..............2..........7....3 1....................................6...................70 Exporting a Folder Configuration.................56 Grouping Data Objects................4 1.......7........................3...............47 Copying and Pasting a Table Element ..............................................................3.......7........................................................................7............................................................7..................47 Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents ...5 1....................................6......................................................................70 Applying a Saved Folder Configuration .......1...................................................7........................................................7...................................1 1...............................................................2..................................................8........3 1.............................4........68 Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window ......5..................................................................3 1.........9 1..4 1...........1........................................................................3 6 .................. Deleting.......................................................5.10 1.73 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 1................................................3...7 1................58 Advanced Grouping............................................67 Creating a Site List .......................................................................2 1.............42 Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table..........2 1.. and Filtering Data..69 Folder Configurations........................................59 Sorting Data .6.6.......................................................................71 Creating and Comparing Subfolders.8..........................................................6...........................................53 Defining the Printing Zone ...7.

............... 105 Clutter Heights ....................................10............................ Lines........................................ 111 Displaying Information About Geo Data ..................................2...............3............................................3...............................10....... 110 Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas ............... 74 Using Shortcuts in Atoll ......................3........................................................... 111 Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area .......5............3 3.................................2 3.................... 102 Embedding Geographic Data ......................................6 1...........5 Clutter Classes..........................................1 3.......... 109 Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics...... 102 Digital Terrain Models .................10.........4 2................. 109 Setting the Display Priority of Geo Data .....................................................................6 3..................................................................2.......................................... 83 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database ............................3 3................3 2.................................................2................................. 111 Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area .........................3..................................................2....................................................................................3 3.......8................................ 106 Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab................................. 99 Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database .1 3.. 79 Creating an Atoll Document .............................................9 3....................................................................... 104 Adding a Clutter Class......1 2.............................................................................................................................1................................................................2 2............ 75 2 2.................................................3.......2......................... 90 Recovering a Backup ...........1 3..................................................... 112 3......... 98 Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data...................1 3............... 97 Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File ......................................1....................3 3............................. 107 Importing Several Scanned Images .....................2.......4 3..........................................................5.................. 109 Setting the Priority of Geo Data in Calculations ...................................................................................11 3.......................................................................6 3............5 Starting an Atoll Project ...........................2...............2.......................8............................................................... 106 Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer.......................4 3 3.............3...2 2..................................................... 108 Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties ...............................2............. 105 Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class ...1 2................................10. 96 Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File ........................................... 106 Managing the Display of a Vector Layer ...............9...................................................................................................3.............................. 79 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template ..........8 3............... 101 Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders.....................8. 103 3.......................12...................................................... 84 Working With a Document on a Database...................................3............3... 85 Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database ........................................................................................12 3.............................8...........................................................7 3............................4 3......................... 86 Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database ......................................................... 96 Importing Geo Data Files .................3......7 Using the Status Bar to Get Information.........Table of Contents 1.... 79 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template ...........2 3..............................3 Contours......................................... 107 Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images .......................................1 3.............................................. 87 Making a Backup of Your Document ...................1 3.......... 83 The Atoll Multi-User Environment ...............1 © Forsk 2010 Geographic Data Sets .................................................................................................................4 1...................2......................................7....... 95 Geographic Data Types ............1 3............................................................................................................................10..........................................1 3.....................2 3......................... 112 Exporting a Geo Data Set ....................................................................................................................................................7.................................................2 3................. 90 Configuring Automatic Backup ..........................................................................2 3........................................... 109 Setting the Priority of Geo Data.....1 2.....3 2................. 106 3...........................2. 112 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 7 ......2 2........................................................... 99 Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type .....................7 Managing Geographic Data ...................................................................................................................... and Points .................... 74 Using Icons from the Toolbar ................... 81 Working in a Multi-User Environment .....3 2...................5 1.......................................5..................... 80 Defining a New Atoll Document ................................ 107 Scanned Images ...... 103 Assigning Names to Clutter Classes ..................................2...................................................................................5..................2....................................................2........ 95 Supported Geographic Data Formats ...2................................7.............2 2............................................................. 91 2.............................. 73 Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer...................................8....... 79 Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project .....2 3.........3..........2..... 100 Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File .............................3............................................1 2.........................................................................................4 3..................................................................................... 79 Templates Available ...............................................................................9....2 2..........5 3..........................................3....................2....... 102 Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data File..........................................1... 108 Geoclimatic Maps ..10 3..........................................................................8..........................................................2...............1 3........2 3..5................................................................. 91 Making and Sharing Portable Atoll Projects .................2 3............................... 105 Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes .......2 3............................................ 104 Defining Clutter Class Properties ..................1 2........................................................................5 3.......................

...3 4...........................2 5 5.........1 6............................................................4 3..............................1...........4 3.......156 6.............1 6...............................................2................................................................................1 4..........3 6..5 4..125 Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns ................................................................145 Medium-Haul Frequency Band ..........................................................................2.............................3 3....................................................13.......................................................................................2 4...2.........................14.............3 4...........................................5.......................................................................................................................123 Defining the List of Manufacturers ............................139 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility .....................126 Microwave Equipment.153 Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives ...............................................................3...............132 Interference Reduction Factor ........................145 Long-Haul Frequency Band ......................................................................14..116 Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File.....................................................................................2...........151 Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects ...2 Importing a Geo Data Set ..............................................................................................151 Working with the Microwave ITU-R P..................................................................116 Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File ......................................................................................................................................13..................................................................5.........................14 3..........................................................2 5................5.....1............................117 Updating the Source File........................4.....................................................................................................123 Importing Microwave Antennas...........................................3 4...........139 Using Assistants to Define Compatibility.............136 Microwave Waveguides and Cables ...13.............3 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands ...............................................................................................2.................................13......115 Deleting Clutter Polygons...138 Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility ....116 Saving Modifications to an External File ....................113 Editing Clutter Class Maps.145 Microwave Frequency Bands ..................2 6........2 3..............................4 4.............................................................128 Importing Microwave Equipment....1 6............................14.3.3 4.........2 Managing Calculations in Atoll ........................................3....................4......1 8 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 ...119 3...................147 Example of Creating a Frequency Sub-band .................................114 Creating a Clutter Polygon ...........125 Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns ......................................................................123 Creating an Antenna ............................................154 Defining Quality Objectives .....................2 4...........138 Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table ...........................................................................1 4.......................3...................................................................................................................1 4...............................3...............................2................................1 6......140 4............................................................................2 3........148 6 6............1.....3....................5.............................................................................14........14................146 5...............................................................................................156 Defining Calculation Parameters ........................................5 4 4..115 Editing Geoclimatic Maps......1 3.............................452 Model........................................................................1.....................14.....1..........132 Advanced Configuration.................................................................................................................................................13..................3.............................................................................................................146 Short-Haul Frequency Band..................................13....................................113 3..............1 4......154 Microwave Link Classes...........................139 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility ...............................2 4................................1 5..............................115 Saving Geographic Data ........133 Theoretical Graphs.............................2...........1............12.........1..................................................1 3.................................................................................................138 Defining Compatibility Manually .2 6.......................2..........1 4................................1 5.....................................................................2 5.....................................................................................................132 Digital Hierarchies .........2......138 Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table .................................1.............................114 Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons ...1 4....1 3........127 Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll.....................................................137 Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables.......2 4.....................................................1 3.....................3 3....................156 Global Parameters ........3..............................................................................................................114 Editing Clutter Polygons .............1....................117 Combining Several Files into One File.........................................3.......154 Defining Performance Objectives..................5......2 4......2 Editing Geographic Data ...........................1.....3 5.........1............................................................................................................4 Antennas and Equipment..................................................2....2 4...........................................2 6......14............1 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands ........13 3...................................................................1....................................................151 Working with the Microwave Propagation Model ...........123 Defining Antennas......146 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands ............2 4................155 Defining Availability Objectives ...................1 4....................................................................1 4............118 Exporting an Embedded File.....Atoll User Manual 3....137 Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable .............3..............................1.118 Creating a New File from a Larger File .......................................................5......................3...........2..................2................................2 3............

.2...........1 7..........................................2................3....3 7..1 7.................. 208 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis ....................5..............2 7........................................................................................3 7................................................................4......................... 185 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link ...........4.............. 203 Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins.......3...........2.....1 7.......5.5.............6..................2..2..1............ 165 7 7...... 190 Managing Microwave Link Templates .........3................1 7.........................................3.......3.........................5 7.................................. 206 Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report .................................................................................................................................................... 194 Printing a Microwave Link Profile..................... 206 Analysing Microwave Links ......................5 7......... 179 Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites .2 7...................1 6.....2.......1 7....................................................................................5................................................................2 7............6................ 185 Definition of a Microwave Link...4...................... 206 Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report...........1.......5........2 7........................................................3.................................4.................................. 192 Analysing the Path Profile .........................2....4..2............4 7.......7 7.............................................................................5........5 7..................................................................................5.............................1 7......................... 195 Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values .. 176 Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites.................. 200 Defining Microwave Antenna Heights...4...............2 7..................... 211 Analysing Reflections ..........4.................... 159 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link ......3.... 192 Checking Data Consistency ........................................................................................................................ 180 Displaying a 360° View Around One Site ..................3 7....................3......3.............................6 7.............................................3 7.............. 208 Creating Multi-hops.............................5...............2 7........................................3..3 Link Parameters .......2 7... 175 Creating or Modifying a Site ................ 203 Analysing a Single Microwave Link ......1 7....................................................................................1 7.................................................................... 191 Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map ............2 © Forsk 2010 9 .......... 201 Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater ....... 193 Viewing a Microwave Link Profile ............... 188 Defining Port Parameters ...............................................4.........................4.......... 205 Configuring the Link Budget Report Display.........3 7..................................................1 7........................................................9 7..................2..................2..5........................................6 7......... 192 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document ................. 159 Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links ............................... 206 Setting a Microwave Link as Active ............ 204 Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters ............Table of Contents 6............2...................................................................................... 194 Zooming In on the Profile..................1 7........................................................................5......... 176 Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites .2.4 7......................................................3..............3 7.3.............................................3.........................................................................................5 7.1...................................... 191 Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template ........................................2...............................2............................................... 173 Designing a Microwave Link Network ............5.................................1 7..............................2.. 191 Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links ................................................3. 210 Displaying Reflection....................................................................1 7........................2 7............................2 6............................................................. 191 Deleting a Microwave Link Template.............................................................................................................. 202 Analysing Microwave Link Reliability ...................2..2.....................5 7............1 7........................5....................................................................................................................1.................................4 7........................... 193 Displaying the Path Profile .................................2 7............4 7.......................... 201 Description of a Passive Repeater ..... 208 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis ........2..........2 7............. 200 Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater.............2 7.................4. 175 Site Survey Tools ...........................1.......................................................... 174 Creating Sites ...........1..............................3.................................1................4............................7 7..............................3...................... 174 Site Description....................................2 7..................................5.......... 181 Search Tools for New Sites ..3............8 7.......................1 7......3 7...............4...................................................................1.....................................................3..........2....................4 7.....4 7........ 176 Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site ................................................... 204 Calculating a Microwave Link Budget.. 173 Planning and Optimising Microwave Sites ............... 207 Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity.................... 210 Studying Reflection .............3 Microwave Link Project Management ...........3 7...........................3 7...................................................................3........................1.. 190 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template.......2............. 193 Studying Microwave Link Clearance.........3 7...............................................................................................2 6................................2.............................1.....................................................................................4...............................2 7...2..5....................4...................................3 7............................................................5...2.............................1.......................4....1................ 163 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links .........5....................... 207 Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets................................................................................................3.......................1.............2................. 212 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 7................................................1 7..........4..... 197 Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights........................................................... 202 Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse ....5........................................................................................ 194 Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options.....................6 7.............1............................ 200 Adjusting Microwave Antenna Heights Using the Mouse ..................................2 7................... 195 Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile... 200 Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights.................. 184 Creating Microwave Links ....... 189 Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template........2...3.

.....................7.............................................................................................................................................1...2 7.......................... 233 10 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .........9...............................................................................................................................................220 Analysing Interference ......230 Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link............4.....3 7........1....................................222 Using IRF in Interference Calculations.....................7..9............2...........2 7....1.................224 Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link ..5 7..231 Index ....................2 7.227 Point-to-Multipoint Links....9 7...229 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse .......4 7.................................................2...........................214 Solutions Against Reflections....215 Planning Microwave Link Channels ...........9....5 7......................6.................................................212 Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report .............8 7.225 Defining the Content of the Interference Report..............9...........................9....8.....1........6 7..........8...........1 7..........................1 7..8.......................................................................................................................217 Creating a Report on Site Parities...............................3 7....................................8......8......................228 Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active.......................1..1.............6................................4 7............................................226 Displaying Interference on the Map ............9...........3 7........9 7.......217 Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse .230 Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link.....7..1 7.............224 Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links .............230 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse..............................9....6...............................................................................................................8.....................8...1...2 7...............................218 Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser ........................................................................230 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub.229 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link ............................1.............8 7........225 Calculating Interference on Multiple Microwave Links ....7..................................................................8.........................................221 Interference Reduction Factor.............................................................................................4 7......2..5 7.........................................214 Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters .1....2 7...............226 Advanced Configuration.........1 7..3 7..............................................1.......................................226 Managing Interference Calculation Validity.........1...................7.....................................................3 7.....................2 7........1 7................................8....217 Checking Site Parities on the Map ..............................................................7..........9..6.........1 7...............................9..Atoll User Manual 7.......................1 7..........9..................................................................................................................................221 Defining IRF Graphs Manually ...................................................................219 Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products................................................................216 Checking Microwave Link Site Parities ..............9.........................................................................221 Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant.................4......227 Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties ..................................................................2 7.....1...................8............1.......................1........................................7...............7 7.........6 7................10 Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report.....................................................................................................................227 Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link .......1 7.........................................229 Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally........................218 Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search.......................7 7..............

Chapter 1 The Working Environment .

.

Using the Explorer window. shown in Figure 1.1 on page 14). The content of the folders in the Explorer window can be displayed in tables. context menus. or change how the data is displayed. for example. with the ability to have several document windows open at the same time. 1. for cutting and pasting. define various studies or configure the parameters or display of data objects. a point on the map. calculations. The Explorer window contains the data and objects of a document. and clutter classes. Atoll offers the standard Windows Print functionality. some of which can be docked into the work area or floated over the work area (see Figure 1. for example. You can change the view by moving or zooming in or out and you can choose which objects are displayed and how they are displayed. as well as geographic data such as the Digital Terrain Model (DTM). parts of it. The Explorer window plays a central role in Atoll. or you can link your project to external files. You can sort and filter the data in a table. You can also export the current display definition. The tools open in separate windows. Atoll also provides other tools.1 The Atoll Work Area The Atoll work area. consists of the main window where the map window and data tables and reports are displayed and the Explorer window. Atoll uses standard Windows interface elements. or only certain objects. support for drag-and-drop. or configuration. Sorting. It is presented in detail in "The Explorer Window" on page 15..1 on page 14. This chapter explains the following topics: • • • • • • • • "The Atoll Work Area" on page 13 "The Explorer Window" on page 15 "Working with Objects" on page 17 "Printing in Atoll" on page 52 "Working with Maps" on page 26 "Working with Data Tables" on page 41 "Grouping. You can save the entire project as a single file. The map is the working area for your document and Atoll provides many features for working with the map. to use it in other documents. or a vector. You can also use the table feature to enter large amounts of information by cutting and pasting the information from any Windows spreadsheet into the table. allowing you to manage large amounts of data. you can manage all objects in the Atoll document: sites. and Filtering Data" on page 56 "Tips and Tricks" on page 72. You can. such as a search tool to locate either a site. Atoll also allows you to undo recent changes to your document.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1 The Working Environment The Atoll working environment provides a comprehensive and integrated set of tools and features that allow you to create and define your microwave-planning project in a single application. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 13 . arranged in folders. and support for standard Windows shortcuts. etc. with added functionality allowing you to print either the entire map window. Atoll offers a variety of tools to help you plan a network. The Explorer window contains most of the objects in a document arranged in folders.

Depending on the position of the docking window. and minimise document windows as you can in any Windows-based application. or cascade them. 14 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . such as the Explorer window.1: Atoll user interface 1. you can tile document windows. when you switch to a different document. Other windows and tools.2 Docking or Floating an Atoll Window Only document windows are part of an individual Atoll document. allowing you to maximise the amount of area for document windows or other windows. maximise. this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner. To minimise a window in its docking area: • Click the Minimise button ( ) near the corner of the window. As well. in order to display all of them at the same time. Depending on the position of the window. 1. display the content of the active document. Depending on the position of the window. You can leave a window in its docking area. this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner. They are not part of the individual Atoll document. select the name of the window.1. they will display the content of the active document. but part of the working environment and. To maximise a window in its docking area: • Click the Maximise button ( ) near the corner of the window. in order to display the title bar of each document window. You can change how these windows and tools are displayed. To tile document windows: • Select Window > Tile.1. To cascade document windows: • Select Window > Cascade. You can also choose to remove them from their position and float them over the Atoll working environment. or you can have it float over the working environment.1 Working with Document Windows When you have one Atoll document open. To close a window: • Click the Hide button ( ) in the corner of the window. this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner. You can change how much room a window takes if it shares a docking area with other windows by maximising or minimising the window. You can resize. To display a window: • On the View menu.Atoll User Manual Toolbar Document window (map) Workspace Explorer window (docked) Panoramic window (floating) Point Analysis window (docked) Figure 1. you can have several document windows open at the same time.

The Explorer window contains the data and objects of a document. 1. It contains: A Propagation Models folder with the following propagation models: Longley-Rice Okumura-Hata Cost-Hata Standard Propagation Model ITU 526-5 ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93) © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 15 . see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41. Note: The window positions for docking windows are not associated with the current document. To prevent the window from docking as you move it. double-click the docking window title bar. GSM/GPRS Parameters. etc. allowing you to easily manage large amounts of information. 1. they remain the same no matter which document you open.2 The Explorer Window The Explorer window plays a central role in Atoll. To dock a window: • To return the window to its previous docked location. with changes affecting all items in the folder. The docking window leaves the docking area and floats over the working environment. CDMA2000) • The Modules tab: The Modules tab allows you to manage the propagation models and additional modules. WiMAX 802. the Data tab has the following folders: • Sites Antennas Transmitters Predictions UMTS Parameters. or LTE Parameters UMTS Simulations.16d Parameters.) you import or create: Clutter classes Clutter heights Digital Terrain Model Population data Any other geo data map Traffic (GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA. Note: You can move the docking window by clicking the title bar and dragging it.2. In this section. or you can access and edit items individually. Depending on the modules installed with Atoll. most folder contents can also be accessed in a table. WiMAX 802. CDMA2000 Simulations . UMTS HSPA. For information on working with tables.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To float a window: • Double-click the docking window title bar. You can modify items at the folder level. WiMAX 802.16e Parameters. As well. press CTRL as you drag the docking window. The number of folders depends on the number and types of geographical data types (vector data.16d Simulations. arranged in folders. WiMAX 802. CDMA2000 Parameters.16e simulations. the following are described: • • • • "Working with the Explorer Window Tabs" on page 15 "Navigating in the Explorer Window" on page 16 "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16 "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16.1 Working with the Explorer Window Tabs The Explorer window has three tabs: • The Data tab: The Data tab allows you to manage radio data and calculations. Or • Click the title bar of the docking window and drag the window to a different docking area. scanned images. Each object and folder has a context-specific menu that you can access by right-clicking. or LTE Simulations Traffic analysis (GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects only) Hexagonal design Microwave links CW Measurements and Drive test data The Geo tab: The Geo tab allows you to manage geographic data.

3 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer You can use the Explorer to display or hide objects on the map.2 Navigating in the Explorer Window The Explorer window has three tabs. 2. Select the tab of the Explorer window that contains that object. ) and the 1. This allows you to hide one type of object so that another type of object is more plainly visible.2. Select the tab of the Explorer window that contains that object.4 Working with Layers Using the Explorer In Atoll. The visibility of the lower layers depends on which layers are above and visible (see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16) and on the transparency of these layers (see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23). it indicates that the folder contains both visible and hidden objects. When the check box of a folder appears greyed ( ). A folder on a tab can be opened to allow you to view its contents. Note: You can hide the contents of an entire folder by clearing the check box to the left of the folder name. For example. so that the results of one prediction are more clearly displayed. Click and drag the object to its new position.Atoll User Manual ITU 1546 WLL Microwave Propagation Model Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) The AFP models available in your Atoll installation. 1. The layers on the top (as arranged on the Data and Geo tabs) are the most visible on the screen and in print. a horizontal black line indicates where the object will remain when you release the mouse button (see Figure 1.2. To move a layer up or down: 1. each tab has objects and folders containing objects. To move from one tab to another: • Click the tab at the top of the Explorer window. the map is made of objects arranged in layers. To hide an object on the map: 1. Each folder containing at least one object has an Expand ( ) or Contract button ( ) to the left of its name. it will still be taken into consideration during calculations. Any additional module created using the API. 2. The check box appears cleared ( object is no longer visible on the map. you could hide all predictions but one. As you drag the object.2). Clear the check box ( ) immediately to the left of the object name.2. To expand a folder to display its contents: • Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of its name. 16 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Note: Hiding an object affects only its visibility in the map window. 1.

1. you should pay attention to the arrangement of the layers. the items found in the Explorer window and displayed on the map are referred to as objects. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. Note: In Atoll. objects such as sites are named with default prefixes. Most objects in Atoll belong to an object type. Enter the new name and press ENTER to change the name. see the Administrator Manual.2: Moving a layer Note: Before you print a map. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map.1 Using the Object Context Menu In Atoll.1 Renaming an Object You can change the name of an object in Atoll. To delete an object: 1. the following are explained: • • • "Using the Object Context Menu" on page 17 "Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map" on page 18 "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. The context menu appears.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Figure 1.3. For example. Atoll enables you to carry out many operations on objects by clicking the object directly or by right-clicking the object and selecting the operation from the context menu. see "Printing Recommendations" on page 53. a transmitter is an object of the type transmitter. Select Rename from the context menu. To rename an object: 1. 1.3. 2. Individual objects are distinguished from each other by the number added automatically to the default prefix. 1.2 Deleting an Object You can delete objects from either the Explorer window or from the map. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 17 .1. For more information. Delete: "Deleting an Object" on page 17.ini file.3. an object’s context menu gives you access to commands specific to that object as well as to commands that are common to most objects. Properties: "Displaying the Properties of an Object" on page 18.1. 3. For more information. the following context menu commands common to all objects types are explained: • • • Rename: "Renaming an Object" on page 17. In this section.3 Working with Objects In Atoll. Select Delete from the context menu. You can change the default prefix for sites by editing the atoll. The context menu appears. 1. The selected object is deleted. In this section. 2.

the site (and its name) is surrounded by a black frame ( ). it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab.1.) in the same folder or subfolder in the Explorer window by using the browse buttons ( • • • • : jump to the first item in the list : jump to the previous item in the list : jump to the next item in the list : jump to the last item in the list ) in the lower-left corner of each Properties dialogue: If you have made any changes to the properties of an item. 1. When a transmitter is selected. In this section. You can also change the position of a site by dragging it. for example.3 Displaying the Properties of an Object You can modify the properties of an object in the Properties dialogue. to access the properties of co-site transmitters without closing and reopening the Properties dialogue. 2. The context menu appears. you can switch only within this group. You can use this feature. although it might be visible in the map window. you can switch only within transmitters having the same activity and the same flag. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and microwave links directly from the map. etc. When a site is selected. sites. The Properties dialogue appears. Switching is performed within the lowest subfolder in the hierarchy. If transmitters are grouped by activity and by a flag. 18 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . clicking the transmitters in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmitter you want (see "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19). or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it.Atoll User Manual 1. For repeater properties. the following are explained: • • • • • "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 19 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19 "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 19"Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse" on page 20 "Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse" on page 20. Atoll prompts you to confirm these changes before switching to the next Properties dialogue. For example: • • • If transmitters are grouped by site. you can switch only within one site (co-site transmitters). both ends of its icon have a green point ( ). The Display tab of the Properties dialogue is explained in the following section.3. it can be difficult to ensure that the correct object has been selected. Select Properties from the context menu. For propagation model properties. To open the Properties dialogue of a data object: 1.2 Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map In a complex microwave or -planning project.3. When there is more than one microwave link with with the same azimuth. When opening the an item’s Properties dialogue by double-clicking its record in a table. Switching Between Property Dialogues You can switch between the Properties dialogues of items (antennas. The browse buttons are not available: • • • • When creating a new item. Tip: When you are selecting data objects on the map. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. If transmitters are grouped by a flag.

Atoll enables you to select a specificmicrowave link.2 Moving a Site Using the Mouse You can move a site by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialogue. Atoll locks the position of a site. Tip: While this method allows you to place a site quickly. 3. enter the radius of the area in which Atoll should search and click OK. As you drag the site. Atoll asks you to confirm that you want to move the site.4 Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse In Atoll. or you can modify it on the map. The context menu appears. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. On the map. click thelinks. An arc with an arrow appears under the pointer. The current azimuth of the antenna is displayed in the far left of the status bar. By default.1 Selecting One of Several Microwave Links If there is more than one microwave link with the same azimuth. Click Yes to confirm. 3.3. 1.2.2.3. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 19 . move the Microwave Radio Links folder on top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16.3 Moving a Site to a Higher Location If you want to improve the location of a site. Click the green circle and drag it to change the antenna’s azimuth. Release the site where you would like to place it. Right-click the site in the map window. 2. you can set the azimuth of a link’s antenna by modifying it on the Radio tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue. In the map window. Atoll moves the site to the highest point within the specified radius. using the mouse. in terms of reception and transmission. 1. 3. both ends appear white and the link itself appears outlined ( ).3). 4. Select thelink from the context menu. 1. A context menu appears with a list of thelinks with the same azimuth (seeFigure 1. or by using the mouse. Atoll can find a higher location within a specified radius from the current location of the site.2. It is defined in degrees. Figure 1. click the link extremity whose azimuth you want to modify.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1. To move a site using the mouse: 1. Select Move to a Higher Location. In the Move to a Higher Location dialogue. 2. To modify the azimuth of the antenna using the mouse: 1. - When you select a microwave link. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green circle ( ). with 0° indicating north. Click and drag the site to the desired position. To have Atoll move a site to a higher location: 1.3. you can adjust the location more precisely by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialogue. To select one of several microwave link with the same azimuth: 1.3. When the position of a site is locked. the exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar.3: Selecting one microwave link 2. 2.2.

or by clicking to undo the changes made. The position of the selected link extremity is modified on the General tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue. click the link extremity you want to move. Click the green rectangle and drag it to the other site on the map. The site for the selected link extremity is modified on the General tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue and the link is renamed.3. indicating it is selected. To move a microwave link extremity using the mouse: 1. you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo. Note: If you make a mistake when changing the position of the link extremity. you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo. In Atoll. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ). move the Microwave Radio Links folder on the top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16. 1.2. antennas are placed on the site. Click the green rectangle and drag it to change the antenna’s position relative to the site. you can change the position of the antenna relative to the site either by adjusting the Dx and Dy parameters or by entering the coordinates of the antenna position on the General Tab of the Microwave link Property dialogue. you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo. 2. The current coordinates (x and y) of the antenna are displayed in the far right of the status bar. antennas are occasionally not located directly on the site.Atoll User Manual 5.2. using the mouse. 3. 4. Dx and Dy are the distance in metres of the antenna from the site position. However. A cross appears under the pointer. Release the mouse when you have moved the selected link extremity to the desired position. or by clicking in the toolbar) to undo the changes made. in the toolbar) 1. 5. Release the mouse when the frame appears around the site. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. but a short distance away. Note: If you make a mistake when changing the azimuth. The antenna’s azimuth relative to the link direction is modified on the Radio tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue. On the map.5 Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse By default. 3.6 Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse In Atoll. by pressing CTRL+Z. A cross appears under the pointer. To select another site for the link extremity on the map: 1. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. On the map. Release the mouse when you have set the azimuth to the desired angle. by pressing CTRL+Z. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ). 2. 5. by pressing CTRL+Z. or by clicking in the toolbar) to undo the changes made. You can also modify the position of the antenna on the map. 4. 20 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can change the link extremity and place it on another site using the mouse. click the link extremity you want to move. move the Microwave Radio Links folder on the top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16. Note: If you make a mistake when changing the position of the link extremity.3.

the Display tab will only show the options applicable to an individual object (see Figure 1. 3.5: The Display tab for an individual site To define the display properties of an object type: 1.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1. The context menu appears. 1. 2. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 21 . Right-click the object type folder in the Explorer window. the following options are available: "Defining the Display Type" on page 22 "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23 "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 23 "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23 "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24 "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24 4.4: The Display tab for Sites When you access the Properties dialogue of an individual object. such as sites. the display options are explained.1 Defining the Display Properties of Objects Figure 1.3. Select Properties from the context menu.3. Set the display parameters. The Properties dialogue appears. Depending on the object type. most objects.5).3 Display Properties of Objects In Atoll. Options that are inapplicable for a particular object type are unavailable on the Display tab of its Properties dialogue (see Figure 1. How an individual object appears on the map depends on the settings on the Display tab of the object type’s Properties dialogue. Select the Display tab.3. followed by a few examples of how you can use them while working on your Atoll document (see "Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects" on page 25). The Display tab is similar for all object types whose appearance can be configured. In this section.4). belong to an object type. Figure 1.

Delete: Atoll removes selected value from the table. Modify the symbol as desired. to distinguish population density. iii. For information on the commands available. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. Click the Actions button. i. ii. 22 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll inserts a new threshold in the table after the threshold selected in the table. Shading: Atoll opens the Shading dialogue. signal strength. see "Using the Actions Button" on page 22. Using the Actions Button The Actions button on the Display tab of the Properties dialogue allows you to modify the display type as defined in "Defining the Display Type" on page 22. you select Shading to define the number of value intervals and configure their colour. You can click the Actions button to access the Actions menu. iii. and enter a value in the Interval box. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21.ini file. To modify the appearance of the symbol. For an example. discrete values. for example. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. iv. or the altitude of sites. i. Modify the symbol as desired. Insert after: When the selected display type is value intervals. see Figure 1. 2. see the Administrator Manual. When "Value Intervals" is the selected display type. or to distinguish inactive from active sites. Modify the symbol as desired. you could use this display type to distinguish transmitter by antenna type. For information on the commands available. To access the Actions menu: 1. For example. The Actions menu gives you access to the following commands: Select all: Atoll selects all the values in the table. you can choose from the following display types: unique. are immediately identifiable. Defining the Display Type Depending on the object selected. ii. For more information. By defining a unique symbol for an object type. You can define the default symbol used for sites and how it is displayed by editing an option in the atoll. To modify the appearance of a symbol. Properties: Atoll opens the Display dialogue where you may change the colour and style.Atoll User Manual 5. for example. click the symbol in the table below. Discrete values: defines the display of each object according to the value of a selected field. To change the display type: 1. Enter the upper and lower limits of the value in the First Break and Last Break boxes respectively. iv. Define the colour shading by choosing a Start Colour and an End Colour. The value intervals will be determined by the set values and coloured by a shade going from the set start colour to the set end colour. Define the ranges directly in the table below. Select the name of the Field by which you want to display the objects. for example. Notes: • • When you create a new map object. Select the name of the Field by which you want to display the objects. Insert before: When the selected display type is value intervals. You can click the Actions button to access the Actions menu. Click OK. click the symbol in the table. 2. a new site. sites. Select the display type from the Display Type list: Unique: defines the same symbol for all objects of this type. This display type can be used. see "Using the Actions Button" on page 22. objects of different types. iii. v. v. click the symbol in the table below. To modify the appearance of a symbol.7 on page 24. you must click the Refresh button ( ) for Atoll to assign a colour to newly created object according to the set display type. value intervals. ii. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. Atoll inserts a new threshold in the table before the threshold selected in the table. or automatic. This display type can be used to distinguish objects of the same type by one characteristic. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. Value intervals: defines the display of each object according to set ranges of the value of a selected field. vi. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. i.

Click the Browse button ( ) beside the Label box. Defining the Visibility Scale You can define a visibility range for object types. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order. you select Shading to choose a Start Colour and an End Colour. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21.Chapter 1: The Working Environment When "Discrete Values" is the selected display type. you can display information about each object in the form of a label that is displayed with the object.6: Defining a label 3. This can be used to. to allow objects on lower layers to be visible on the map. and for printing and previewing printing. Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types You can change the transparency of some objects. Visibility ranges are taken into account for screen display. Configuration: Select Import if you want to import an existing display configuration. Select the fields which you want to display in the label: a. To select a field to be displayed in the label for the object type. Defining the Object Type Label For most object types. Figure 1. They do not affect which objects are considered during calculations. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 23 . prevent the map from being cluttered with symbols when you are at a certain scale. 2. 3. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. To change the transparency: 1. and some object types. for example. b. c. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. from top to bottom. such as sites. is within this range. as displayed on the Map toolbar. To define a label for an object type: 1. An object is visible only if the scale. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. 4. 2. Move the Transparency slider to the right to make the object or object type more transparent or to the left to make it less transparent. Click OK to close the Field Selection dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue.6). 2. Enter a Visibility Scale maximum in the and 1: text box. such as clutter classes. such as predictions. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. Enter a Visibility Scale minimum in the between 1: text box. The Field Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 1. To change the order of the fields. To define an object visibility range: 1. Select Export if you want to export the display settings of the current object to a configuration file. including from fields that you add. so that you can share them with other users or use them in other documents.

The Field Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 24 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can also display object information in the form of a tool tip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. the tool tip displays the total numbers of elements present in the Sites.Atoll User Manual Note: For most object types. If there is no information entered in this column. Once you have defined the tool tips. This option has the advantage of keep object-related information permanently visible. For information on displaying or hiding objects. you can enter information in the Legend column to be displayed on the legend. For most object types. the intervals defined are: • • • Signal level >= -65 red -65 > Signal level >= -105 shading from red to blue (9 intervals) Signal level < -105 not shown in the coverage. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. 2. you can also display object information in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. Tool tips will now appear when the pointer is over the object. and their subfolders. Select the fields which you want to display in the tool tip: a. The defined display will appear on the legend. Adding an Object Type to the Legend You can display the information defined by the display type (see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22) in your Atoll document’s legend. and Point to Multipoint folders. The Legend window appears. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. 2. In Figure 1. 3. see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24. Only visible objects appear in the Legend window.7. Multi-Hops. In the Explorer window. such as sites and microwave links. This option has the advantage of not filling the map window with text. b. For more information on tool tips. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order. To activate the tool tip function: • Click the Display Tips button ( ) on the toolbar. Figure 1. on the Display tab of a signal level prediction. Click the Browse button ( ) beside the Tip Text box.7: Defined thresholds as they will appear in the Legend With value intervals. the maximum and minimum values are displayed instead.6). Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Links. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click Note: to remove it. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. To display the Legend window: • Select View > Legend. see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23. Defining the Object Type Tip Text For most object types. The entries in the Legend column will appear in the Legend window. you must activate the tool tip function before they appear. To select a field to be displayed in the tool tip for the object type. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. you can display information about each object in the form of a tool tip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. 1. To define tip text for an object type: 1. For more information on tool tips. including from fields that you add. Check the Add to legend box.

see the Administrator Manual. 3.11. the transmitter display type is "Automatic. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 25 . Shading .Server Coverage Studies" on page 25 "Shading . The result is visible in Figure 1. you can change the range of data displayed. In Figure 1. The Properties dialogue appears.ini file. For more information about setting options in the atoll. you can identify immediately which transmitter is best received on each pixel. However." Atoll colours each pixel on the map according to the colour of the transmitter that is best received on that pixel. the transmitter display type is "Discrete Values. Atoll calculates. Figure 1. If the selected display type for transmitters is "Automatic. In Figure 1.Signal Level Study" on page 25. 6. Click OK. The difference in colour is insufficient to make clear which transmitter is best received on each pixel. these value intervals appear as differences of shading. 5. the interval between each break. which server is best received.8." with the site name as the chosen value.3. Select the Display tab. In this example.ini file. if you are more interested in reception from -80 dBm to -105 dBm.Chapter 1: The Working Environment You can also display the comments defined in the properties of a coverage prediction in the Legend window by setting an option in the atoll.Server Coverage Studies When doing a best server prediction.9: Automatic display type To display the results of a server coverage study with the transmitters set to the Automatic display type: 1. On the map." Because Atoll ensures that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surrounding it. 1. or you can change the colours to make the intervals more visible.Signal Level Study Atoll displays the results of a signal level study as value intervals. Automatic Display Type .9. 4. For example.8: Value interval display type Figure 1. you can change the shading to display only those values. for each pixel on the map. the study results are also immediately visible. Figure 1. This way. Click the Refresh button ( ) to update the display of the study results. The context menu appears. Select "Automatic" as the Display Type. You can use the Shading command to define the appearance of these value intervals to make the results easier to read or more relevant to your needs. The following two figures show the results of the same best server area and handover margin study. 2.3.2 Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects In this section are the following examples of how display properties of objects can be used: • • "Automatic Display Type .10 shows the results of the best signal level plot from -60 dBm to -105 dBm. Select Properties from the context menu. Right-click the Transmitters folder in the Explorer window.

7. or by choosing a scale. The Shading dialogue appears. 26 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Leave the value of the Last Break at "-105. The Properties dialogue appears. Click Actions to display the menu and select Shading.1 Zooming In and Out Atoll offers several tools for zooming in and out on the map. 3. Click the Zoom icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+Q).4 Working with Maps Atoll has the following functions to help you work with maps: • • • • • • • • • • • • "Changing the Map Scale" on page 26 "Moving the Map in the Document Window" on page 27 "Using the Panoramic Window" on page 27 "Centring the Map Window on an Object" on page 28 "Measuring Distances on the Map" on page 28 "Displaying Rulers Around the Map" on page 28 "Displaying the Map Legend" on page 29 "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29 "Editing Polygons. The context menu appears. 5. Click OK to close the Shading dialogue. To zoom in on the map: 1. Lines. When you zoom in or out on the map.1 Changing the Map Scale You can change the scale of the map by zooming in or out. Expand the Predictions folder in the Explorer window and right-click the signal level study. Note: You can also zoom in by pressing CTRL++. or by holding down the CTRL key and rotating the mouse wheel button forward. Select Properties from the context menu. you do so based on the position of the cursor on the map.11: Shading from -80 dBm to -105 dBm 1.4. Atoll also allows you to define a zoom range outside of which certain objects are not displayed (see "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 23).Atoll User Manual Figure 1.10: Shading from -60 dBm to -105 dBm To change how the results of a signal level study are displayed: Figure 1. Select the Display tab. 1. 2. 1. by zooming in on a specific area of the map. "Map Window Pointers" on page 40. Change the value of the First Break to "-80". and Points" on page 34 "Saving a Map as a Graphic Image" on page 39 "Copying a Map to Another Application" on page 40. 1. 4. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue and apply your changes." 6.1. Click the map where you want to zoom in.4. 2. by selecting Zoom In from the View menu.

Select the scale from the list.1. 3. Click in the Panoramic window on a corner or border of the zoom area (i. Drag to the opposite corner. Atoll zooms the map to the entered scale. 1. Click in the Panoramic window on one of the four corners of the area you want to zoom in on. Note: You can also zoom out by pressing CTRL+–. To move between zoom levels: • • Click the Previous Zoom button ( ) to return to a zoom level you have already used (or press ALT + ←).4. ) on the Map toolbar. 2. Enter the desired scale. 3. allowing you to move quickly between previous zoom levels and zoomed areas. click the Next Zoom button ( level (or press ALT + →). Press ENTER.4. by selecting Zoom Out from the View menu. Click the arrow next to the scale box ( 2. Atoll zooms in on the selected area. Click the Zoom Area icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+W). When you release the mouse button.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To zoom out on the map: 1.3 Choosing a Scale To choose a scale: 1. 2. Right-click the map where you want to zoom out. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select.4 Changing Between Previous Zoom Levels Atoll saves the last five zoom levels. 2. 2. Click the Move Map Window button ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL + D). helping you situate the displayed area in relation to the entire map. Click the Zoom icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+Q). Drag to the opposite corner.4. If the scale value you want is not in the list: 1. A dark rectangle indicates what part of the geographic data is presently displayed in a document window. or holding down the CTRL key and rotating the mouse wheel button backward.1. 1.2 Zooming In on a Specific Area To zoom in on a specific area of the map: 1.2 Moving the Map in the Document Window You can move the map in the document window using the mouse. ) on the Map toolbar.3 Using the Panoramic Window The Panoramic window displays the entire map with all of the imported geographic data. 1. Atoll zooms in on the selected area.e.4.4. To move the map in the document window: 1.1. To resize the displayed map area: 1. Click in the scale box ( 2.. Drag the border to its new position. When you release the mouse button. You can use the Panoramic window to: • • • Zoom in on a specific area of the map Resize the displayed map area Move around the map. 1. 2. the dark rectangle). Move the pointer over the map and drag the map in the desired direction. Once you have returned to a previous zoom level. ) to return to the latest zoom 1. To zoom in on a specific area of the map: 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 27 .

Atoll will then give you the distance between each point (as you measure). Tip: If you want to quickly find an object. Right-click the object in the map window or in the Explorer window.4. 2.4.12: Measurement data in the status bar 1. Click the first point on the map once.6 Displaying Rulers Around the Map You can display rulers around the map in the document window. a site. To the map window on a selected object: 1.4 Centring the Map Window on an Object You can centre the map on any selected object. Atoll marks the initial position and connects it to the pointer with a line. such as a site. 2.4. Click the Distance Measurement button ( ) on the toolbar. 3. a transmitter. where you will have to change direction on the line. Total distance between Azimuth between secondfirst and last point last and last point Distance between secondlast and last point Figure 1. To measure a distance on the map between two points: 1.12): The total distance between the first point and the last point The distance between the second-last point and the last point The azimuth between the last two points. click the Coordinates tab. As you move the pointer away from the first point. 28 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can select it in the Explorer window and then select the Centre in the Map Window command. on the map. the dark rectangle).Atoll User Manual To move around the map: 1.e. You can select the object in the map window or in the Explorer window. Click in the Panoramic window in the zoom area (i. 4. and the total distance. 1. You can also use the Distance Measurement tool to measure distance along a line with several points. When centring the map window on an object the current scale is kept. the azimuth of each segment between two points. Drag the rectangle to its new position. To display rulers: 1. Select Tools > Options.12): The distance between the two points The azimuth between the two points. 1. 3. To measure the total distance on the map on a line over a series of points: 1.5 Measuring Distances on the Map You can measure distances on the map by using the Distance Measurement tool. The status bar displays the following (see Figure 1. Select Centre in the Map Window from the context menu. Click the Distance Measurement button ( ) on the toolbar. 2. The Distance Measurement tool also gives you the azimuth of a straight line between two points. In the Options dialogue. for example. Click the first point on the map once. 2. or on any zone in the Zones folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. When you reach the last point on the line. Atoll marks the initial position and connects it to the pointer with a line. 2. Place the pointer over the second point on the map.. the status bar displays the following (see Figure 1. As you move the pointer away from the first point. Click once on the map at each point on the line between the first point and the final point.

4. In other words. 1. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction.4. For example. see "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24. • • • • 1. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 5.4. which can be created and modified in the same way as contours. etc. 1.7 Displaying the Map Legend You can display a map legend. Click OK. Select Draw from the context menu. By limiting the number of sites. The filtering zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. lines. or points. Printing Zone: The printing zone allows you to define the area to be printed. 3. 2. interference analysis. select where you want the rulers to be displayed in the map window. Right-click the Filtering Zone folder.4. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. the sites outside the filtering zone will not be taken into consideration in coverage predictions. Focus Zone: With the focus zone. etc. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to select sites using a filtering zone. Under Display rulers.). if you have filtered the sites using a filtering zone. Computation Zone: The computation zone is used to define which microwave links are to be taken into consideration in calculations (i. It also restricts which objects are used in calculations such as coverage predictions.1.8 Using Zones in the Map Window On the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 29 . etc. b. Important: Zones are taken into account whether or not they are visible. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. Draw the filtering zone: a.. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Using a Filtering Zone" on page 29 "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30 "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31 "Using a Printing Zone" on page 33 "Using a Geographic Export Zone" on page 33.8.1 Creating a Filtering Zone To create a filtering zone: 1. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder. you can select the areas of coverage predictions or other calculations on which you want to generate reports and results. link budget.e.1 Using a Filtering Zone The filtering zone is a graphical filter that restricts the objects displayed on the map and on the Data tab of the Explorer window to the objects inside the filtering zone. if you have drawn a zone. In this section. 4.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 3.8. c. Zones can be used to define areas of the map for the following purposes: • Filtering Zone: The filtering zone is a graphical filter that restricts the objects displayed on the map and on the Data tab of the Explorer window to the objects inside the filtering zone. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to select sites using a filtering zone. 1. In other words. To display the legend: • Select View > Legend. The legend will contain the information on the object types that you have added to it. if you have drawn a zone. The zones are a type of polygons. It also restricts which objects are used in calculations such as coverage predictions. Atoll provides you with a set of tools known as zones. Geographic Export Zone: The geographic export zone is used to define part of the map to be exported as a bitmap. you can reduce the time and cost of calculations and make visualisation of data objects on the map clearer. even if you have cleared the filtering zone’s visibility check box.4. For information on adding object types to the legend..

you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it.4. The data objects outside of the selected zone are filtered out. a polygon describing an administrative area. filtered (i. 30 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll makes its calculations on all microwave links that are active and filtered and for the entire extent of the geographical data available. Fit to Map Window: You can create a computation zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu.e. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. you can import it and use it as a computation zone. to indicate that the folder contents have been filtered. see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. The computation zone is delimited by a red line. for example. You can also create a computation zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the computation zone. If there is no computation zone defined. Right-click the Computation Zone folder. On the Data tab of the Explorer window. Draw the computation zone: a. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. Select Draw from the context menu. you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. Note: You can export the filtering zone as a polygon. You can also create a filtering zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the filtering zone. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a computation zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Computation Zone from the context menu. any folder whose content is affected by the filtering zone appears with a special icon ( ). c. You can import it by right-clicking the Filtering Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu.. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. For more information on the polygon editing tools. 5. 1. the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network you are currently working on. a polygon describing an administrative area. By allowing you to reduce the number of microwave links studied. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a filtering zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Filtering Zone from the context menu. and intersects the computation zone. In other words. When you make a link budget or you study interference. You can import it by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. Atoll reduces both the time and computer resources necessary for calculations. for example. Atoll calculates all the microwave links that are active. by right-clicking the Filtering Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu.2.1 Creating a Computation Zone To create a computation zone: 1. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. • Once you have created a filtering zone. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon.2 Using a Computation Zone The computation zone is used to define the area where Atoll carries out calculations. Fit to Map Window: You can create a filtering zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 4.8.4. 3. see"Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. When working with a large network.Atoll User Manual The filtering zone is delimited by a blue line.8. if you have drawn a computation zone. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. The context menu appears. that are selected by the current filter parameters). 1. For more information on the polygon editing tools. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. b. • Once you have created a computation zone. you can import it and use it as a filtering zone. You will have to delete the computation zone if you no longer want to define an area for calculations.

Draw the focus: a. etc. However. in the following ways: Saving the computation zone in the user configuration: For information on exporting the computation zone in the user configuration. by using a focus zone for the report. you can display the statistics for a specific number of sites. 5. • 1.4. focus zone. You can also create a focus zone in one of the following ways: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the focus zone. see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67. or by deleting parts of the polygons that make up these zones. If you clear the zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 1. Exporting the focus zone: You can export the focus zone by right-clicking the Focus Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. Note: A focus zone can consist of more than one polygon. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. b. Atoll will use the computation zone. The computation zone defines the sites and microwave links calculated in link budget. if no focus zone is defined. for example.3 Using a Focus Zone Using the focus zone . you can delete it from the map.8.4 Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools Atoll provides you with several different ways of editing the computation zone. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. When you no longer need the zone. Atoll takes the focus zone taken into account whether or not they are visible. in the following ways: Saving the focus zone in the user configuration: For information on exporting the focus zone in the user configuration.8. Select Draw from the context menu. 2. The polygons of a focus zone must not intersect or overlap each other. A focus zone is delimited by a green line. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to define an area for reports. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon.3. you can define an area on which statistics can be drawn and on which reports are made. you can import it and use it as a focus zone. 3. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67. instead of displaying statistics for every site that has been calculated.4. if you have drawn a focus zone. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Note: You can save the computation zone. Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. by combining several polygons. You can edit these zones by editing the points that define them. Exporting the computation zone: You can export the computation zone by rightclicking the Computation Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. In other words. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 31 . and filtering zones.8. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. Note: You can save the focus zone .1 Drawing a Focus Zone To define a focus zone: 1. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a focus zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Focus Zone from the context menu. Atoll bases the statistics on the area covered by the focus zone. and the potential interferers while the focus zone filters the displayed results. - 1. The context menu appears. a polygon describing an administrative area. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. Right-click the Focus Zone folder.It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus and hot spot zones. 4. You can import it by right-clicking the Focus Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. c.4. interference studies.

Position the pointer over the point you want to move. Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar In Atoll. To put the polygon zone in editing mode: 1. Double-click to close the polygon zone. and focus zone polygons can contain holes. 4. Atoll creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours. Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the polygon zone to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. If polygon zones overlap. A point is added to the polygon zone border at the position of the pointer.1 Editing Polygon Zones You can edit polygon zones in several ways. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. Deleting a point from a polygon zone: i. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon zone. : To combine several polygon zones: In the Vector Edition toolbar. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder.8. The filtering.4. Click the contour to edit. whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counter-clockwise order. You can now edit it by: Moving a point: i. Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. Atoll merges them. 2. you can create complex polygon zones by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar. ii. Adding a point to the polygon zone: i. Put the polygon zone in editing mode as explained in "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order. 3. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. Right-click the folder containing the polygon zone you want to edit. click the Combine button ( ). The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. you must first put it in editing mode. v. iv. : To delete part of the selected polygon zone: 32 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . To edit a polygon zone using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar: 1.Atoll User Manual The computation and focuspolygons can contain holes. Editing the Points of a Polygon Zone To edit a point of a polygon zone: 1. The point is deleted. Select the polygon zone. Draw more polygon zones if desired. The pointer changes ( ). The pointer changes ( ). Before you can edit a polygon zone. iii. You can now edit the polygon zone as explained in the following sections: • • • "Editing the Points of a Polygon Zone" on page 32 "Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar" on page 32 "Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu" on page 33. 1. ii. the following are explained: • • "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32 "Removing a Polygon Zone" on page 33. whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counter-clockwise order. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order. 2. 2. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. ii. computation. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new polygon zone. Put the polygon zone in editing mode as explained in "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32. ii. Drag the point to its new position. The pointer changes ( ).4. In this section. Select Edit from the context menu. The Vector Edition toolbar has the following buttons: i. Position the pointer over the polygon zone border where you want to add a point. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu.

Right-click the folder containing the zone you want to remove. Quit edition: Select Quit Edition to exit editing mode. The Properties dialogue gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the polygon zone. Using a Geographic Export Zone If you want to export part of the map as a bitmap. : To split the selected polygon into several polygons: In the Vector Edition toolbar. : To create a polygon out of the overlapping area of two polygons: In the Vector Edition toolbar. you can define a geographic export zone. ii. In the Vector Edition toolbar. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 33 . Move the contour. Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour. iv. iii. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected polygon zone by clicking once on the map where you want to begin drawing the area to delete. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. Tip: You can also delete it by right-clicking its border on the map and selecting Delete from the context menu. Atoll separates the area covered by the polygon from the selected polygon and creates a new polygon. Double-click to close the area. 1. For information on using the printing zone. 1. line. 2. Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu When you are editing polygon zones. Right-click the polygon zone to display the context menu and select one of the following: Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected polygon zone. you can remove the zone and redisplay all data objects. Click to place the contour. 2. Select Move from the context menu to move the contour. ii.5 1. or point. iv. Move: i. iv.6 Using a Printing Zone The printing zone allows you to define the area to be printed. see "Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53.4. Atoll creates a new polygon of the overlapping area of the two polygons and deletes the parts of the polygons that do not overlap. Double-click to close the polygon. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. click the Split button ( ). iii.2 Removing a Polygon Zone When you no longer need a polygon zone. line. ii. ii. Insert Point: Select Insert Point to add a point to the border of the contour at the position of the pointer. click the Delete button ( ). iii. iii. From the context menu. you can access certain commands using the context menu. select Delete Zone. After you have defined a geographic export zone. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon that will overlap the selected one. 4. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the area. To edit a polygon zone using the context menu: 1.4.8.8. To remove a polygon zone: 1. or point. Double-click to close the polygon. line. Atoll deletes the area from the selected contour. line. or point on the map. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon.Chapter 1: The Working Environment i. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder.4. Atoll offers you the option of exporting only the area covered by the zone if you export the map as a raster image. The polygon zone is removed and all document data are now displayed.4. i. Click the polygon zone you want to edit.8. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon that will split the selected one. click the Intersection button ( ). 3. or point from the map. i.

and points in the map window.4. and points. see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. the geographic export zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. see "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115. For information on modifying certain geographic data maps by adding a vector layer. lines or points to geographical map information in a project by first creating a vector layer. You can edit polygons by editing the points that define them. When you release the mouse. The geographic export zone is delimited by a light purple line . You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example. Note: You can export the geographic export zone as a polygon. and points.9 Editing Polygons. 34 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . For example. line. 3. and Points" on page 35 "Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines" on page 35 "Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar" on page 36 "Editing a Point" on page 36 "Editing Contours.1 Adding a Vector Layer You can add vector objects such as polygons. • Once you have created a geographic export zone. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. and points are explained: • • • • • • "Adding a Vector Layer" on page 34 "Creating Polygons. Another type of polygon. If you clear the geographic export zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. When you no longer need the polygon. including the computation and focuspolygons can contain holes. whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counterclockwise order. You can import it by right-clicking the Geographic Export Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. and Points Atoll uses different types of polygons. lines. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. by combining several polygons. you can delete it from the map. For more information on the polygon editing tools. and Points Using the Context Menu" on page 37. b. by a transmitter attribute. Lines.4. by signal level. 1. Important: The geographic export zone can only export in raster format. 1. In this section. you can import it and use it as a geographic export zone. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a geographic export zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Geographic Export Zone from the context menu. Polygons. lines and points. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. the zones such as the computation and focus. are specific types of polygons. lines. you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. called contours. 4. Fit to Map Window: You can create a geographic export zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. the different ways of editing polygons. or by deleting parts of the polygons. 2. by adding a vector layer to them and afterwards adding polygons. lines. described in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone. Lines. You can also create a geographic export zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the geogaphic export zone. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. Draw the geographic export zone: a. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone. by right-clicking the Geographic Export Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. can along with lines and points. be used to add additional information to geographic data. Right-click the Geographic Export Zone folder. You can move or delete the points that define polygons.9. or point. Lines. geoclimatic maps. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order. by path loss. lines. or by total losses). The context menu appears. Select Draw from the context menu.Atoll User Manual To define a geographic export zone: 1. 5. You can also modify certain geographic data maps. Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. Atoll provides you with several different ways of editing the polygons. for example. coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter.

You can now edit by: Moving a point: i. 1.4.. as explained in "Adding a Vector Layer" on page 34. 2. lines.9. see "Creating Polygons. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. Select Edit from the context menu. New Line: a. you can ensure that you select the correct folder. By renaming each vectors folder. For more information. New Point: Click once on the map where you want to place the point. To edit the shape of polygons and lines: 1. Lines. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle. Select the contour or line. you must define the value the polygon or rectangle represents and map the vector layer. it might be difficult to know which Vectors folder you are selecting.9. line. Tip: You can also make the vector tools available by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. 2. Double-click to close the contour. The context menu appears. c. lines. and Points Once you have created a vector layer. c. you can add polygons. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. Release the mouse to create the rectangle defined by the two corners. see "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115. and Points" on page 35. If the Vector Edition toolbar is not visible. © Forsk 2010 Position the pointer over the point you want to move. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour. b. Right-click the vector layer on the Geo tab. Select Edit from the context menu. Click one of the following buttons on the Vector Edition toolbar: New Polygon: a. New Rectangle: a.2 Creating Polygons. select View > Vector Edition Toolbar.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To add a vector layer to the Geo tab: • Click the New Vector Layer button ( ) ) on the Vector Edition toolbar. see "Renaming an Object" on page 17. and points to the vector layer. For information on renaming objects.4. Atoll creates a folder called "Vectors" on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. For information on adding vector objects such as contours. right-click the vector layer folder. b. Because Atoll names all new vector layers "Vectors" by default. 3. Lines. The tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are available. To add a polygon. Double-click to end the line. Click once on the map where you want to begin the line. Click each time you change angles on the line. b.3 Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines You can edit the shape of polygons and lines on the vector layer. Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. Press ESC to deselect the currently selected button on the Vector Edition toolbar. 3. or point to a vector layer: 1. 4. 35 . The context menu appears. The pointer changes ( Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited ). c. Note: If the polygon or rectangle is on the vector layer of a geoclimatic map. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle. and points to it. 1.

Atoll separates the area covered by the contour from the selected contour and creates a new contour. Click the contour to edit. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. The context menu appears.9. Double-click to close the contour. ii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. 2. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated.5 Editing a Point To edit a point: 1. Adding a point to a contour or a line: i. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new contour. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. Deleting a point from a contour or a line: i. A point is added to the contour border or line at the position of the pointer. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected contour by clicking once on the map where you want to begin drawing the area to delete. To edit a vector object using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar: 1. Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. Position the pointer over the contour border or line where you want to add a point. 36 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours. right-click the vector layer folder. i.4 Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar In Atoll. Atoll merges them. click the Intersection button ( ). ii.9. Select Edit from the context menu. Double-click to close the contour. : To create a contour out of the overlapping area of two contours: In the Vector Edition toolbar. Atoll deletes the area from the selected contour. click the Delete button ( ). : To combine several contours: In the Vector Edition toolbar. 1. Select Edit from the context menu. If contours overlap. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. Double-click to close the area. iii. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will overlap the selected one. iv. iv. 2. iv. click the Split button ( ). you can create complex contours by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar. iv. The context menu appears. The pointer changes ( ). click the Combine button ( ). v. 1. The point is deleted. iii. Double-click to close the contour.4. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu.Atoll User Manual ii. i. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the area. ii. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. iii. i.4. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. The pointer changes ( ). Draw more contours if desired. 3. ii. The Vector Edition toolbar has the following buttons: i. Atoll creates a new contour of the overlapping area of the two contours and deletes the parts of the contours that do not overlap. ii. Drag the point to its new position. right-click the vector layer folder. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will split the selected one. : To delete part of the selected contour: In the Vector Edition toolbar. iii. ii. : To split the selected contour into several contours: In the Vector Edition toolbar.

6 Editing Contours. or point. Move: i. by signal level. and points. Lines. In vector formats. line. ii. or you can export a defined area of the coverage prediction. When you export a coverage prediction in vector format. You can now edit by: Moving: i. or point. iii. line.10 Exporting Coverage Prediction Results In Atoll. you can not export a coverage prediction in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example. When you export a coverage prediction in vector format. or point. or AGD formats. ii.4. or point on the map. or point. Only the commands relevant to the selected contour. TIF. Note: 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 37 . In this case. When you export more than one coverage prediction. To edit a vector object using the context menu: 1. Open Line: Select Open Line to remove the segment between the last and the first point. by a transmitter attribute. line. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats. Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. Convert to Line: Select Convert to Line to convert the selected contour to a line. Click the point you want to delete. Insert Point: Select Insert Point to add a point to the border of the contour at the position of the pointer. ii. In raster formats. only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format.4. JPEG 2000. Click the point you want to move. however. you can export in ArcView©. line. Select the point. Click to place the contour. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: General: The General tab gives the name of the vector Layer. Close Line: Select Close Line to add a segment between the last and the first point of the line. In this section. Geometry: This tab gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the contour. line. You can export coverage predictions separately or you can export several coverage predictions at the same time. and Points Using the Context Menu When you are editing contours. you can export the coverage areas of a coverage prediction in raster or vector formats. or point. The file exported can then be imported as a vector or raster object in Atoll or in another application. and any Properties of the contour. MapInfo©. Click the vector object you want to edit. Atoll suggests the formats that can be used for all the coverage predictions to be exported. or by total losses). ArcView© grid. Right-click the vector object to display the context menu and select one of the following: Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour. or point are displayed in the context menu. All coverage types can be exported. you can access certain commands using the context menu.9. line. The pointer changes ( ). Convert to Polygon: Select Convert to Polygon to convert the selected line to a contour. Deleting a point: i. Move the contour. or Vertical Mapper (GRD and GRC) formats. The point is deleted.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. you can export in BMP. 2. the following are explained: • • • "Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format" on page 38 "Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format" on page 38 "Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions" on page 39. 1. the Surface of the object. or point from the map. by path loss. lines. Right-click and select Delete from the context menu. line. the exported zone is delimited by the rectangle encompassing the coverage. line. Select Move from the context menu to move the contour. 3. coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter. Drag the point to its new position. Quit edition: Select Quit Edition to exit editing mode. Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected contour. you can export the entire coverage prediction. The pointer changes ( ).

To export the entire coverage prediction: Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export. The Save As dialogue appears. move the Smoothing slider. Click Save to export the coverage prediction results. c. c. If desired.10. change the Resolution of the exported coverage.4. If you have chosen to export the prediction coverage in a vector format other than in AGD format: a. For information on displaying objects in the map window. the geographic export zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. If desired. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export. 5. 1. Select Export the Coverage from the context menu. Select Export the Coverage from the context menu. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. The Computation Zone to export a rectangle containing the entire computation zone. Click the Expand button ( Note: ) to expand the Predictions folder. b. The coverage prediction must be displayed in the map window before it can be exported. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account.1 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format To export a coverage prediction in vector format: 1. select the area to export: The Coverage Area of the Prediction Study to export a rectangle containing only the area covered by the study. 3. 6. or part of the coverage prediction. to define how much Atoll smooths the exported coverage. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. To export part of the coverage prediction: a. 7. change the reference coordinate system for the file being exported. Right-click the part of the coverage prediction you want to export. e. f. under Coordinate Systems. In the Save As dialogue. When you release the mouse.4. Click the Expand button ( Note: ) to expand the Predictions folder. The coverage prediction must be displayed in the map window before it can be exported. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. Draw the geographic export zone by clicking the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone and dragging to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the coverage prediction. 4. Right-click the Geographic Export Zone folder. 3. If desired. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. or 38 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The geographic export zone is delimited by a light purple line.Atoll User Manual 1. the geographic export zone. For information on displaying objects in the map window. b. The Raster Export dialogue appears. Select Draw from the context menu. If you clear the geographic export zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. To export the geographic export zone. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. define the geographic export zone: a. You can export the entire coverage prediction. The Save As dialogue appears.10. enter the File name and select the vector format from the Save as type list. Click Save to export the coverage prediction results. The default resolution is the resolution of the coverage prediction results (as set in the coverage prediction Properties dialogue). a. Enter the file name and select the type and the path of the file to be exported. 2. enter the File name and select the raster format from the Save as type list. b. d. 5. 2. 4. or enter the percentage in the text box. The context menu appears. Under Region. In the Save As dialogue.2 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format To export a coverage prediction in raster format 1.

The Save As dialogue appears. Select File > Save Image As.4. Geographic Export Zone Printing Zone ) in the Map toolbar. 2. You can select: Selection: The area on the map selected in step 1. Right-click the the Predictions folder. you can export them at the same time. Click OK to finish exporting the coverage prediction results. the file is converted using the selected coordinate system. select a destination folder. By default. Resolution in metres: You can define a resolution for the exported coverage predictions. Atoll allows you to save files larger than 2 Gb. When saving in BIL format. 4. 3. select the zone that you wish to save as an image. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. If you wish to use the saved file as a digital terrain model. If desired. enter a File name. The Coverage Export dialogue appears. or TXT format. Select Export Coverages from the context menu. 8. Under Options. Format: Select the vector file format you want Atoll to export the coverage predictions in. coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter. Drag to the opposite corner. c. The context menu appears. 3. 1. Click Export. Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format. Click Save. you should select the TIF. Atoll selects the check boxes of all coverage predictions whose visibility check box is selected on the Data tab of the Explorer window. 6. to define how much Atoll smooths the exported coverage.10. In the Map Export dialogue. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. or by total losses). The geographic export zone is only taken into consideration for raster file formats. 7. You can define the size of the exported image in one of two ways: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 39 . The Map Export dialogue appears. BIL. move the Smoothing slider. Notes • When selecting a coordinate system different than the one initially defined in Atoll. 5. BMP. Note: When you export several coverage predictions at the same time. or enter the percentage in the text box. b. and select a file type from the Save as type list. by a transmitter attribute. 4. you can define the following parameters: Folder: Enter the folder you want to store the exported coverage predictions in or click the Browse button ( ) to navigate to it. b. • You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example. In the Coverage Export dialogue. by path loss. 6. Click the Select an area button ( 2. select the check boxes corresponding to the coverage predictions you want to export. Define the area to save: a. and ArcView Grid (TXT). by signal level. The selected coverage predictions are saved in the selected folder. 1. In the Save as dialogue. To export several coverage predictions at the same time: 1. BIL. The following file formats are supported: TIF. Click Export to export the selected coverage predictions. Time stamp: If you select the Time stamp check box. Atoll will add the date and time to the file name of each exported coverage prediction.11 Saving a Map as a Graphic Image You can save a map as a graphic image. The Exported Image Size dialogue appears. Atoll does not take the geographic export zone into consideration.3 Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions If you have several coverage predictions that you want to export.Chapter 1: The Working Environment The Geographic Export Zone to export the rectangle defined by the geographic export zone. To save a map as a graphic image: 1. 5.4.

13 Map Window Pointers In Atoll. you can define the zone to be displayed on the map. To copy a selected area of the map into a document created using another application: 1. by clicking once to start the polygon. and by double-clicking to close the polygon.12 Copying a Map to Another Application You can copy a selected area of the map into a document created using another application. select Pixel Size. 7. Open the application into which you want to paste the image. 1. select Picture (Enhanced Metafile). 4. Close the polygon by clicking twice. 8. Atoll then creates a geo-reference file for the exported image. is pasted as an image into the new document. Rectangle drawing pointer Hand Zoom tool The rectangle drawing pointer indicates you can draw computation/focus/hot spot/filtering/printing/geographic export zones. Click OK. In the new application. enter a scale in the text box and a Resolution. Select Edit > Copy Image. If you wish to export the image with rulers. The hand pointer indicates you can move the visible part of the displayed map. 6.4. The zoom pointer indicates you can click to zoom in and right-click to zoom out at the location of the mouse pointer The zoom area pointer indicates you can zoom in on an area of the by clicking and dragging to define the area. including the rulers. In the Paste Special dialogue. The pencil pointer indicates you can create a polygonal clutter zone. in the Panoramic window. 1. Define the area to copy: a. Drag to the opposite corner. Define the resolution of the image in one of the following ways: Select Use Screen Resolution Select Use Custom Resolution and enter a resolution in metres.Atoll User Manual Scale: If you wish to define the size by scale. The Copy Image dialogue appears. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. click pointer once to start. To define a zone. on the map. select Scale. Zoom area Pencil 40 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . and enter a pixel size in the text box. 9. Click OK. b. Click the Select an area button ( 2. or Text to paste the upper left and lower right coordinates of the selection. you can define a zone to print or copy and. or draw vector or raster rectangles on the map. click and drag diagonally. 5. The area of the map. Pixel Size: If you wish to define the size by pixel size. Each pointer is described below: Appearance Description Selection arrow Meaning The zone selection pointer indicates that. 9. Note: You can also select Bitmap to paste the selection without rulers. once to create each corner. 3. and each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. Click OK. select Include Rulers. To draw a polygon. click and drag diagonally. select Edit > Paste Special. draw computation/focus/hot spot/filtering/printing/ eographic export Polygon drawing zones.4. To define a zone. ) in the Map toolbar. or draw vector or raster polygons on the map. The polygon drawing pointer indicates you can draw a zone to filter either sites or links. you must define the size of the exported image by pixel size. Important: If you wish to use the exported file as a digital terrain model. the pointer appears in different forms according to its function.

In this section. You can filter. The terrain profile between the two points is displayed in the Point Analysis window and stored under Terrain Sections in the Geo tab. You can move an existing point by clicking and dragging an existing point. the microwave link pointer changes and the next click ends the link. 3. The select/create points pointer indicates you can modify the polygon in the map window. etc. delete the polygon. the distance between the first point and the pointer is displayed in the status bar. The terrain section pointer indicates that you can create a terrain section by clicking once on the map to create the first point and once more to create the second point. Right-click the data folder of which you want to display the data table. You can right-click to open a context menu to delete a point.5. You can add columns to the data table and you can delete certain columns. and group the data contained in these tables. 2. In the case of a point-to-multipoint.) in the form of tables. antennas. connected to the hub by a link. and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42 "Editing the Contents of a Table" on page 43 "Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table" on page 44 "Defining the Table Format" on page 44 "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47 "Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents" on page 49 "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49 "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50 "Exporting Tables to XML Files" on page 51 "Importing Tables from XML Files" on page 52. The multihop and multipoint pointer indicates you can click once to create the first point of a multi-hop link or the hub of a point-to-multipoint link. When you create a new column. microwave links. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 41 . 1.1 Opening a Data Table To open a data table: 1. Select/create points Microwave link start End Multi-hop or point-tomultipoint microwave link Rotate hub antenna of point-tomultipoint link Measurements on the map Terrain section 1. The data contained in prediction reports are also stored in the form of tables. The rotate hub antenna pointer indicates you can click the hub antenna and drag it to a new position to change the azimuth of the hub antenna. each subsequent link creates anew point. Deleting. containing all their parameters and characteristics. You can add a new point and modify the polygon contour by clicking on one of the edges and dragging. delete the polygon. you can create a default value for a field you create. The microwave link pointer indicates you can click a point on the map to create the first point of a microwave link. Right-clicking the polygon border opens a context menu allowing you to add a point. or centre the map on the polygon. You can also export the data or import data into the Atoll data tables. The position indicator pointer indicates you can select the border of a polygon. As you move the pointer. each subsequent click creates another point in the link. sort. You can also create a list of options (for text fields) from which the user can choose when filling in the field. and view a statistical analysis of the data. In the case of a multihop link. The measurement pointer indicates you can click on the map to set the start point of your measurement.5 Working with Data Tables Atoll stores object data (sites. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Appearance Description Deletion Position indicator Meaning The deletion pointer indicates that you can delete a newly created polygonal clutter zone by clicking its border. Select Open Table from the context menu. the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • • • "Opening a Data Table" on page 41 "Adding. or centre the map on the polygon. Once you have created the first point.

The Type of the field. Right-click the table in the map window. The maximum Size of the field. Access the object type’s table fields as explained in "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42. Default Value: If you want. The Group to which the field belongs. Select Table Fields from the context menu.2 Adding. you can define a Group that this custom field will belong to.13: The Table tab 1. Legend: Enter the name for the field that will appear in the Atoll document.2.5. The Field Definition dialogue has the following text boxes: Name: Enter the Name for the field that will appear in the database Group: If desired.2 Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table You can add a custom field to any object type’s data table.5. The Name of the field in the ATL file (Legend). instead of loading all custom fields. When opening an Atoll document from a database. and Editing Data Table Fields The data for each object type is stored in the form of a data table. short integer. Click Add. 2. Deleting. The dialogue displays the following information for each type of data (see Figure 1. Figure 1.5. or currency) Size: The Size field is only available if you have selected "text" as the Type. each corresponding to a field. separating each list item with a hard return. date/time. Type: Select a type for the field (text. Every data table in Atoll is created with a default set of columns. You can create a choice list by entering the list items in the Choice List text box. Choice List: The Choice List field is only available if you have selected "text" as the Type. 3. In this section. the following functions are explained: • • • "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42 "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 42 "Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 43 1. When you open an Atoll document from a database. A dialogue appears where you can view the existing fields and add or delete new ones. To access an object type’s table fields: 1.1 Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields The fields contained in an object type’s table are defined in a dialogue. you can then select a specific group of custom fields to be loaded from the database. you can select a group of custom fields to be loaded from the database. true/false. - 42 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . open the data table as described in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. instead of loading all custom fields. enter a default value that will appear each time you create a new record of this object type. 3. Enter a size in characters.13): The Name of the field in the database (Name).14).2. To add a custom field to an object type’s data table: 1. double.Atoll User Manual 1. 2. The Field Definition dialogue appears (see Figure 1. The context menu appears. long integer. In the Explorer window. single. The Default value of the field.

Right-click the data folder of which you want to display the data table. Make sure that you are not deleting important information. Edit the content of the table by entering the value directly in the field (see Figure 1. Tip: Some fields can not be deleted. 2. 1. Click Delete. 3. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished to update the table. 5.3 Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table You can delete custom fields from an object type’s data table. To delete a custom field from an object type’s data table: Caution: All data stored in the field will be lost when you delete the field itself. 1.3 Editing the Contents of a Table To edit the contents of a table: 1. 4.15). the selected field is not a custom field and can not be deleted. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. as explained in "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 42.2.14: The Field Definition dialogue 1. Your changes are automatically saved. you can select a value from the list (see Figure 1.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 4.5. You can find these fields in the Other Properties tab of an object type’s Properties dialogue. Tip: If a list of options has been defined for a field. The field is deleted from the object type’s data table. Note: User or custom fields are for information only and are not taken into account in any calculation. Select Open Table from the context menu. 3. If you select a field and the Delete button remains unavailable.16) or enter a new value. 2. Click OK to return to the object type table. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 43 . Figure 1. Custom fields are the fields that the user adds to an object type’s data table. Access the object type’s table fields as explained in "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42.5. Select the custom field that you want to delete.

transmitter. 2.15: Editing data in the transmitters data tables Figure 1.5. To open the Record Properties dialogue of an object: 1. Select Record Properties from the context menu.5 Defining the Table Format Atoll lets you format the data tables so that the data presented is more legible or better presented. You can change the format of the data table by: • • • • • • "Formatting the Column Headers" on page 45 "Formatting Table Columns" on page 45 "Changing Column Width or Row Height" on page 45 "Displaying or Hiding a Column" on page 46 "Freezing or Unfreezing a Column" on page 46 "Moving Columns" on page 46 44 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. a site. To avoid editing the record when you double-click. double-click the left margin of the record instead of the record itself.16: Choosing data in the transmitters data tables 1. 3.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. Right-click the record whose properties you want to see. Note: You can also open the Record Properties dialogue by double-clicking the record. 1. for example. from its data table.5. antenna.4 Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table You can open the Record Properties dialogue of an object. or cell.

17). Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. a Background colour. by selecting a Foreground colour. Click OK. 2. 3. When you change the column width. The Format dialogue has the following tabs: Font: You can select the Font. 3. and Text Colour. by selecting a Foreground colour. When you change the row height. and the Colour for each column header. Outline (the font style). Colour: You can select the background colour (Interior) of the column headers. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Colour: You can select the background colour (Interior) of the column headers. You can also select a 3D Effect for the header. Changing Column Width or Row Height You can change the column width and row height in a data table. 2. and a pattern from the list box. Select Format > Column Format. the Type. Click OK. Effects. The Format dialogue appears. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Select Format > Header Format.18: Changing row height © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 45 . a Background colour. Click the border separating two rows and drag to change the row height (see Figure 1. and the Colour for each column header. Click the border separating two column headers and drag to change the column width (see Figure 1. font Size. Effects. Outline (the font style). you change the row height for every row in the table.17: Changing column width Figure 1. Alignment: You can select both the Horizontal and Vertical alignment of the column header text. the Type.18). 2. Borders: You can select the Border. 4. Formatting Table Columns 1. 2. You can also select a 3D Effect for the header. Figure 1. To change the row height: 1. The Format dialogue has the following tabs: Font: You can select the Font. The Format dialogue appears. however. Borders: You can select the Border. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Formatting the Column Headers 1. 4. font Size. Alignment: You can select both the Horizontal and Vertical alignment of the column header text. To change the column width: 1. you change the width only for the selected column. and a pattern from the list box. and Text Colour.

2. while scrolling through the Sites table. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. To move a column: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. For example. You can keep this column. Click and drag over several headers to select more than one column to move. Right-click the selected header or headers and select Freeze columns from the context men.Atoll User Manual Displaying or Hiding a Column You can choose which columns in data tables to display or hide. by freezing it. Select the header of the column you want to freeze. To display or hide a column: 1. Moving Columns In Atoll. To hide a column. Note: You can only freeze adjacent columns. Select the header of the column you want to move. 2. you might want to have the Name column always visible.19: The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue Note: You can also right-click the data table and select the Display Columns or Hide Columns command from the context menu. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Click Close. Click and drag over several headers to select more than one column to freeze. 3. To freeze a column: 1. Select Format > Display Columns. 2. you can change the column order so that you can group similar columns or present data in a determined order. Figure 1. To display a column. Tip: You can also hide a column by right-clicking on its header and selecting Hide Columns from the context menu. Note: You can not freeze a column in a report table. you can freeze one or more columns of a data table so that they always remain visible as you scroll horizontally through the table. 4. select its check box. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears (see Figure 1. To unfreeze columns: • Select Format > Unfreeze columns.19). You can hide more than one column by pressing CTRL while selecting the columns and then selecting Hide Columns from the context menu. clear its check box. 46 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 5. Freezing or Unfreezing a Column In Atoll. 3. or any other column visible.

you can copy and paste data in tables using the Copy (CTRL+C).20: Moving columns Note: It may be necessary to click Refresh in the Map toolbar for your changes to appear.1 Copying and Pasting a Table Element You can create a new element in tables by copying an existing element.20)." You can edit this name. Select Edit > Copy to copy the table row. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the element to select the entire row. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Select Edit > Paste to paste the copied data into the new row. 3. 4. 5. 3.5. the position the column will occupy is indicated by a red line (see Figure 1. To paste the same data into several cells: 1. the following is explained: • • "Copying and Pasting a Table Element" on page 47 "Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells" on page 47. Atoll. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. In this section. preceded by "Copy of. pasting it into a new row and editing the details that are different.2 Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells You can paste the same data into several cells. You can copy and paste data to create new elements or you can copy and paste the same data into several cells.6. 1.5.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Note: You can only move several columns at the same time when they are adjacent. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 47 .6 Copying and Pasting in Tables In Atoll. The name of the new element is the same as that of the copied element. 2. creates a new element from the copied data. 1. Note: Each element in a table must have a unique Name. and Paste (CTRL+V) commands on the Edit menu. Cut (CTRL+X). Figure 1. 1. using Fill Up or Fill Down. Click again on the selected column and drag to the desired area. Click on the cell with the data you wish to copy and drag to select the cells into which you wish to copy the data (see Figure 1.6.21). As you drag the column. To create a new element by copying and pasting: 1. 2. Click in the left margin of the table row marked with the New Row icon ( ) to select the entire row.5.

22: Copying the contents of the top cell To copy the contents of the bottom cell of the selection into the other cells.23: Copying the contents of the bottom cell 48 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .22). select Edit > Fill > Down (see Figure 1. Copy into the selected cells: To copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. select Edit > Fill > Up (see Figure 1. Figure 1.23).21: Selecting the cells 3. Figure 1.

3. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 49 . 3. see "Grouping. The context menu appears.5. Select Statistics from the context menu. The contents of the Statistics dialogue are updated automatically. Select Export from the context menu. you can view the statistical analysis of other cells by selecting them in the table. and Comma Separated Value. 4. The Statistics dialogue appears (see Figure 1. and Filtering Data" on page 56. To view a statistical analysis of a selection of cells in one column: Select the cells you want to analyse. You can select non-contiguous cells by pressing CTRL and clicking each cell in the column separately. 2. or by clicking the first cell. Right-click the table.5.24: The Statistics dialogue The statistics displayed depend on the type of numerical data selected.8 Exporting Tables to Text Files You can export entire Atoll data tables. 2.24). to ASCII text files (in text. For more information. Right-click the selection of cells. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. CSV. allowing you to select only certain data. The Export dialogue appears.7 Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents You can view a statistical analysis of the contents of an entire column in a table or of the contents of a selection of cells. To export a table: 1. The entire column is selected. Tip: In Atoll you can organise data in several different ways. Figure 1. To view a statistical analysis of table contents: 1. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last cell. You can see how the exported table will appear in the Preview pane (see Figure 1. TXT.25). 1. Select the column data you want to analyse: To view a statistical analysis of an entire column: Click the column title. Sorting. If you leave the Statistics dialogue open. You can select contiguous cells by clicking the first cell and dragging to the last cell of the selection you want to analyse.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. formats) and to MS Excel files. or selected columns. The context menu appears.

In the Save As dialogue. The Save As dialogue appears.25: Exporting a data table 4. Click Save to export the table. To remove a field from the list of Exported Fields. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The next time you export a data table.9 Importing Tables from Text Files You can import data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into Atoll data tables. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Export dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. To change the order of the fields. The context menu appears. and Point to Multipoint tables to text files by selecting the folder or a subfolder in the Explorer window and pressing CTRL+E. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Click Export. to move it b. 9. 2. 50 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 8. You can display all the fields belonging to a table by clicking the Expand button ( ) to the left of the table name. All fields in the Exported Fields list will be exported. 1. 7. a. select the field in the Available Fields box and click to the Exported Fields list. Select a Field Separator from the list. 10. Multi-Hops. see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50. Links. Select a Decimal Symbol from the list. To import a table: 1. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. 5.5. For information on importing data into a data table.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. Right-click the table. You can export the Sites. The fields at the top of the Exported Fields appear at the left of the exported table. Select the fields (displayed as columns in the table) you want to export. To select a field to be exported. you can click Load in the Export dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. select the field in the Exported Fields list and click to remove it. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. c. enter the File name and select the format from the Save as type list. 6. Select the Header check box if you want to export the names of the columns with the data.

see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49. Destination: The column headers from the Atoll data table. Select the Update Records check box if you want to replace the data of records already existing in the table. 1. The Open dialogue appears.26: Importing information into a data table 5. Under Field Mapping. See "Changing Column Width or Row Height" on page 45. Figure 1. Select a Decimal Symbol from the list. The next time you export a data table. The values of these records are replaced when the Update Records check box is selected. If the Update Records check box is not selected. Enter the number of the first line of data in the 1st Data Line box. 4. Select Import from the context menu. Tip: You can change the width of the columns to make the contents easier to work with.5.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 3. Align the content of the source file with the content of the destination file by clicking the column header in the Destination row and selecting the corresponding column from the Atoll data file (see Figure 1. Click Import. Select the ASCII text file you want to open and click Open. You can use XML to exchange information between Atoll and the OMC.26). these records are not imported. Note: 10. Note: Atoll compares the values in the left-most column of the data to be imported with the values in the same column of the data table to see if records already exist. The Import dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 6. For information on exporting the information in a data table into a text file. Select <Ignore> for source file columns that you do not want to import. 9. and Point to Multipoint tables by selecting the folder or a subfolder in the Explorer window and pressing CTRL+I. 7. Multi-Hops.26). there are two header rows: Source: The column headers from the text file you are importing. 8. The contents are imported in the current Atoll data table.10 Exporting Tables to XML Files You can export the data tables in your Atoll document to XML files. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 51 . you can click Load in the Import dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. You can save the choices you have made in the Import dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. Select a Field Separator from the list. You can import data from text files into the Sites. Links.

If you wish to see how the table will appear once printed. 3.6. 1. Atoll supports printing to a variety of paper sizes. etc. 3. you can print any part of your document. see "Importing Tables from XML Files" on page 52. see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55. Select File > Data Exchange > XML File Import. predictions. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. see the Technical Reference Guide. 3. Do not modify the order of tables in the index. Note: Tables are imported in the same order they appear in the index. If you want to print only a selected area.1 Printing Data Tables and Reports Data tables and reports are both presented in tabular format in Atoll and can.2 Printing a Map You can print a map in Atoll and create a paper copy of studies. Click the Make New Folder button if you want to create a new folder to store the XML files.5. select it by clicking in one corner of the area and dragging diagonally to the opposite corner. and the version of Atoll with which the XML files were created. the technologyTDMA.. 1. document reports. For more information about the formats of the XML files. The Browse for Folder dialogue appears. For information on exporting the data tables in your document to XML files. and an index. data tables. The Browse for Folder dialogue appears. Atoll performs a database integrity check.). 5. Click OK. and the Atoll version used to create the XML files must be the same as the version used to import the data. The data tables from the XML files listed in the index.11 Importing Tables from XML Files You can import data tables into your Atoll document from XML files.xml file is located. Once the import is complete. During the import procedure.6. You can use XML to exchange information between Atoll and the OMC. 2. both be printed in the same way. Select File > Data Exchange > XML File Export. etc. 2.xml file also stores the information on the system (GSM. 52 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . existing data in the tables are overwritten by the data from the XML files. CDMA. including maps. This section explains the following: • • • "Printing Data Tables and Reports" on page 52 "Printing a Map" on page 52 "Printing a Docking Window" on page 56 1. antennas used by transmitters must be imported before the transmitters themselves.xml file that contains the mapping between the tables that were exported and the XML files corresponding to each data table. 4.. Select the folder where the XML files are to be stored.xml file are imported in the document . Atoll offers several options allowing you to customise and optimise the printed map. For more information about the formats of the XML files. Click OK to print. some data must be imported before other data.xml file. Select the folder where the index. . and antenna patterns. 2. Select File > Print. To print a table: 1.). choose Selected in the Print dialogue. . therefore. see the Technical Reference Guide. All the data tables in the document are exported to XML files. etc.6 Printing in Atoll In Atoll. see "Exporting Tables to XML Files" on page 51. the technologyTDMA. the XML files and the current Atoll document must use the same system (GSM.xml file because the order in which the data is imported is very important. etc. For example. CDMA. Click OK. For information on importing the data tables from XML files into your document. UMTS. In order for Atoll to be able to correctly import the data tables from XML files. To export all the data tables in your document to XML files: 1. and a duplicate records check to ensure that the import did not create database problems. including A4 and A0.Atoll User Manual Atoll creates one XML file for each exported data table. The index. If you want to print an area of the table. 1. UMTS. etc. To import data tables into your document from XML files: 1.

or you can define an area of the map to be printed in one of the following ways: • • Selecting the print area (see "Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53). or airport). and predictions. Objects in Atoll are arranged in layers. Select the document window containing the map. click the Geo tab. and points (measurements. 4. 5.2. geoclimatic. over predictions. 4. The layers on the top (as arranged on the Data and Geo tabs) are the most visible on the screen and in print.): • • • • • • Points (vectors) Roads and Lines (vectors) Surface polygons (vectors) Multi-format maps . 1. you should review the "Printing Recommendations" on page 53 to avoid any memory-related problems. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the printing zone. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 53 . You can modify the print layout ("Defining the Print Layout" on page 54). such as roads. To put vector layers from the Geo tab over predictions: 1. Draw the printing zone: a. 2. The context menu appears. Drag the vector layer to a position above Predictions but below Sites. To create a printing zone: 1. Select File > Print. Right-click the Printing Zone folder. are displayed above objects on the Geo tab. This will ensure that these vector layers are visible when you print the map. Before printing a map. lines (vectors such as roads. it is strongly recommended to put vector layers. In the Explorer window. and Transmitters. transmitters.27). 5.1 Printing Recommendations The appearance of the map is determined by the arrangement and properties of the objects the map contains.6. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. Click OK.2 Defining the Printing Zone You can define an area to be printed. The printing zone is delimited by a light green line (see Figure 1. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the printing zone. Click the Data tab. it is recommended to organise the layers from top to bottom as follows. or clutter height maps (non-transparent maps). for example. 2. and others Clutter class maps (transparent raster maps) Images. Right-click the vector layer you wish to move to the Data tab. For this reason. sites. You can see how the map will appear once printed (see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55).Chapter 1: The Working Environment Before you print a map. the printing zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. Important: Printing graphics is a memory-intensive operation and can make heavy demands on your printer. To print a map: 1. Antennas. If you clear the printing zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. when a document contains surface layers (raster maps or polygonal vector maps). etc. 3. Creating a focus zone (see "Drawing a Focus Zone" on page 31). see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23). You can see how the map will appear once printed (see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55). You now have the following options before printing the map: You can select a print area ("Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53) or create a focus zone ("Drawing a Focus Zone" on page 31). 4. 3. The visibility of the lower layers depends on which layers are above it and on the transparency of these layers (for information on transparency. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account.2. For performance reasons. 1. When you release the mouse. 2. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. b. Select Transfer to Data from the context menu. you have the following options: • You can print the entire map. DTM. The context menu appears.6.population. Sites and transmitters must be above all the other layers. Select Draw from the context menu. visible objects on the Data tab. 3. Before printing for the first time. You can accept the default layout or you can modify the print layout (see "Defining the Print Layout" on page 54). traffic maps (vector or raster). however.

Add a title. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. • Once you have created a printing zone. Select paper size and source. Fit to Map Window: You can create a printing zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Choose to print the rulers with the map. you can change its size by dragging the edges of the zone displayed on the rulers of the map window.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. These settings can be saved as a configuration. Select File > Print Setup. by right-clicking the Printing Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. To define the appearance of the map when it is printed: 1. For more information on the polygon editing tools. You define the print set up on the Page tab. You can also use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit the printing zone. logo. You can see any changes you make in the schematic preview on the right side of the Print Setup dialogue. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a printing zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Printing Zone from the context menu.6. The Print Setup dialogue appears. Note: If you have previously defined a configuration file containing all the necessary settings. and the Header/Footer tab. 54 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. Choose to print the area outside the focus zone. you can click the Import button under Configuration to import those settings.27: Printing zone You can also create a printing zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the printing zone. see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. Note: You can export the printing zone as a polygon. allowing you to define a standard appearance which you can then import the next time you print a similar document.3 Defining the Print Layout You can use the Print Setup dialogue to define how your map will appear when you print it. header. On the Print Setup dialogue. comment. You can import it by right-clicking the Printing Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. Choose to print the legend. you can import it and use it as a printing zone. you can: • • • • • • Set the scale of the map. as well as the page orientation and the margins. 1.2. the Components tab. or footer.

Select the Comments check box if you want to print a comment with the map and set its Position. 5. in the form of a BMP graphic. The buttons outside of the square will place the legend outside of the map. you can set the position of graphic elements. For the selected check box. Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. Click a button to set the Position of the legend. This enables you to re-use the same settings the next time by importing them. or by selecting Scale and defining the scale. Select the correct Width and Height (in pixels). Select the Header/Footer check box if you want to define a header or footer for the map and set its Position. If a file named logo. c. a.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 2. Note: Only BMP graphics can be used as logos. Atoll searches for the header and footer logos in the Atoll’s installation folder. The Open dialogue appears. Click the Page tab.6. b. you must first convert it using a graphics programme to the BMP format. Click OK. Select the Area inside focus zone only check box if you only want to print the part of the map inside the focus zone. If you want the comment to appear on the map (and not outside of it). you can define the page size. margins. select the On the map check box. Select the Legend check box if you want to print a legend with the map. If your logo is in a different format. 1. Select the your graphic in BMP format and click Open. If you want the header or footer to appear on the map (and not outside of it).3 © Forsk 2010 Previewing Your Printing When you want to print maps. Click File. c. Under Orientation. 4. d. or click Print to print the document. Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. click OK to close the Print Setup dialogue. On the Header/Footer tab. Under Map. ii. you can define graphics that appear for the map. b. Click the Header/Footer tab. click the Properties button. Click the Components tab. iii. If you want the title to appear on the map (and not outside of it). you can define the appearance of the printed map: Select the Rulers check box if you want to print the map with a scale around it. and orientation and the scale of the printed map: a. b. Under Margins. a. such as copyright information. iv. you can preview your printing. v. The Logo dialogue appears. The buttons inside the square will place the legend on top of the map. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 55 . Under Paper. Select the Map Title check box if you want to define a title for the map and set its Position. Once you have made your settings. you can select a different file. set the margins of the page in millimetres. The graphics can be a company logo or other information. or reports. Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. Under Logo 1 and Logo 2. - Click a Font button to open the Font dialogue to define the font of the legend. By default. select whether the page should be printed in Portrait or Landscape. Under Scaling. On the Page tab. i.bmp is present in this folder. select the On the map check box. select the On the map check box. data tables. it is considered as the default header logo. Under Legend. you can define the placement of the legend. optionally. define the scale of the printed image either by selecting Fit to page. 3. c. the Source of the paper. Note: You can save the current settings as a configuration file by clicking the Export button under Configuration. However. select the Size of the paper and.

Click Next Page to display the following page Click Prev Page to display the previous page. Click OK to print.7. For examples of grouping data objects. After you have defined how you will group. 3. Drive Test Data Analysis Tool Microwave Link Analysis (for more information on this tool. modify only selected data or run calculations on the selected data. For information. or filter data. At the top of the Print Preview window. This section explains: • • • "Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property" on page 56 "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57 "Advanced Grouping" on page 58. The Print dialogue appears. You can save the grouping parameters as a folder configuration. Once you have grouped data objects.7. Sorting. Click Zoom Out to zoom out on the print preview. sort. 4. you can click one of the following buttons: Click Print to open the Print dialogue. you can access their Properties dialogue from the context menu to edit properties on all grouped objects. The objects to be grouped can be in a data folder or in a subfolder (see "Creating and Comparing Subfolders" on page 71). 1. Open the docking window you want to print. Grouping objects in the Explorer window is similar to sorting data in the data table because it puts all records with the selected property together.7 Grouping. 56 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . see "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24) Point Analysis Tool CW Measurement Analysis Tool (for more information on this tool. 2. Atoll allows you to group. and Filtering Data In Atoll you can organise data in several different ways.Atoll User Manual To preview your printing: 1.1 Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property You can group data objects by a selected property using the Group By command on the context menu. for example. Select File > Print Preview. Right-click the window you wish to print. sort. as explained in "Printing a Map" on page 52. see "Studying Reflection" on page 210) To print the content of a docking window: 1. If you want to print a Point Analysis window.1.4 Printing a Docking Window You can print the content of many docking windows using the context menu. see "Folder Configurations" on page 69. or filter data quickly by one criterion. In this section the following will be explained: • • • • • "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56 "Sorting Data" on page 60 "Filtering Data" on page 62 "Folder Configurations" on page 69 "Creating and Comparing Subfolders" on page 71 1. click the tab of the study you want to print. Click Zoom In to zoom in on the print preview.6. 2. selecting File > Print only prints the contents of a document window. Select Print from the context menu. You can also define the properties by which you can group objects. you can save this information as a folder configuration. The docking windows whose contents you can print are: • • • • • Legend Window (for more information on this tool. see the Measurements and Model Calibration Guide. see "Examples of Grouping" on page 59. allowing you to select only certain data and then. The Print Preview window appears. Click Two Page to display two pages side by side Click One Page to display a single page. 1. or by several. Select the map or table you want to print.1 Grouping Data Objects You can group objects according to a selected property on the Data tab of the Explorer window. 1.

Note: If the range of properties available in the Group By submenu has been configured as explained in "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. To select a field to appear in the Group By submenu.7. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1. Select the fields you want to appear in the Group By submenu.28: The Configuration dialogue 6. To configure the Group By submenu: 1.28). From the context menu. 2. The objects in the folder are grouped by that property. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Grouping Fields list. Right-click the folder whose Group By submenu you want to configure. For information on using the dialogue that appears. 2. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you want to group. select the property by which you want to group the objects. Click OK to close the Configuration dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. such as transmitters. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 57 . you can select additional properties by selecting More Fields from the Group By submenu. See "Examples of Grouping" on page 59. You can display all the fields belonging to a table by clicking the Expand button ( ) to the left of the table name. 1.1. 3. 3. The context menu appears. 7. You can make it easier to group data objects by configuring the Group By submenu to display only the properties that are relevant for grouping. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. select the field in the Grouping Fields list and click to remove it. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped. 2. To undo the grouping: 1. The context menu appears. Click the Configure button next to the Group By field that shows how the data objects are presently grouped. select from the Group By > None. see "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. Figure 1. have a large number of properties that will appear by default in the Group By submenu. From the Group By submenu.2 Configuring the Group By Submenu Some data objects. 5. from top to bottom. 4. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To group data objects by a selected property: 1. To change the order of the fields. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The Group By submenu will now contain only the fields you selected. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Grouping Fields list. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue. To remove a field from the list of Grouping Fields. 3. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Select Properties from the context menu.

1.7. Figure 1.3 Grouping Microwave Links by Site You can find all the microwave links that are connected to a specific site by grouping all links by site. select the field in the Group these fields in this order list and click to remove it. 2. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Group these fields in this order list. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. 5. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. Atoll creates subfolders for each site with a microwave link and sorts the links by site (see Figure 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Click the Group By button. The context menu appears.1.7. To change the order of the fields.29: Grouping microwave links by site To restore normal display of microwave links: 1.Atoll User Manual 1. using the Group By button on the Properties dialogue. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. The context menu appears. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order. 4. Right-click the Links folder. 3. Right-click the Links folder. Figure 1.29). The Group dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 58 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . To group microwave links by site: 1.1. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. To select a field to be used to group the objects. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Select Classify by Site from the context menu. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped.4 Advanced Grouping You can group data objects by one or more properties. from top to bottom. 4. 3. The default display of the contents of the Links folder is restored. To group data objects by one or more properties: 1. 2. 2. 3. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Group these fields in this order list. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue.30: The Group dialogue 6.30). Select the fields by which you want to group the objects. Select Classify by Site from the context menu.

select from the Group By > None. you can only see a very long list of transmitters under the Transmitter folder.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 7. By right-clicking the Transmitter folder and selecting Group By > Site (Figure 1. 1. Figure 1.1. Click OK to close the Group dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue and group the objects. transmitters. 3.32: Transmitters grouped by site © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 59 . in the Explorer window. therefore.7. you can group the transmitters by the site they are located on. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.32. While it is easy to see on the map which transmitters are part of which site. To undo the grouping: 1. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped.31: Grouping transmitters by site The result of grouping can be seen in Figure 1. Figure 1. there is an Atoll document with a large number of sites and.31). 2.5 Examples of Grouping In this example. From the context menu.

1 to 10) or descending (Z to A. you can sort the document data either in the data tables or using the Sort function of Properties dialogue. when you are working on a certain area of the network.34: Transmitters grouped by site 1. You can sort the data by either one or by several columns. the transmitters you are working on are immediately visible under the Transmitter folder. The transmitters are now in two groups: those inside the focus zone and those outside the focus zone. When you sort data by several columns. You can sort the data in ascending (A to Z. 60 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .7.32.31). You normally create a computation or focus zone when you want to concentrate on a given subset of transmitters. 10 to 1) order. For information. Figure 1. By grouping them by computation or focus zone. Once you have sorted data objects.33: Grouping transmitters by zone The result of grouping can be seen in Figure 1. This section explains the following: • • "Sorting Data in Tables" on page 60 "Advanced Sorting" on page 61 1. see "Folder Configurations" on page 69.1 Sorting Data in Tables When sorting data in tables. Atoll then sorts the records by the second column.7. for example. you can sort by one column or by several columns. you can save the settings as a folder configuration. and so on. Atoll sorts the records by the first column and then.Atoll User Manual You can also group objects by the computation or focus zone. within each group of identical values in the first column.2. Figure 1. you can group the transmitters in the focus zone together. By right-clicking the Transmitter folder and selecting Group By > Polygon > Focus Zone (Figure 1.2 Sorting Data In Atoll.

If you want to sort by columns that are not adjacent. 3.35). you can use the Sort function on the Properties dialogue. 5.2. select how you wish to sort: Sort Ascending: sort the data table records from the lowest value in the reference column to the highest value. Choose whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order. The entire column is selected. To sort data using the Sort function of the Properties dialogue: 1. 1. 7. 2. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41.7. 6. select how you wish to sort: Sort Ascending: sort the data table records from the lowest value in the first reference column to the highest value. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 61 . Right-click the column headers. Select the column name from the And by list. Right-click the folder whose data you want to sort. Click OK. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Click the header of the first column and drag over the adjacent columns that will be your sort references. The context menu appears 3.2 Advanced Sorting You can sort data by several criteria using the Sort function of the Properties dialogue. 2. Sorting by Several Columns You can only sort in a table by adjacent columns. To sort data in a table by several columns: 1.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Sorting by One Column To sort data in a table by one column: 1. For information. The context menu appears. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue. Choose whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order. 8. you can move the columns first as explained in "Moving Columns" on page 46. b. Select the header of the column that you want to sort on. Click the Sort button. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. 3. For the first column you want to sort on: a. 4. Select the column name from the Sort by list. The Sort dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 4. The context menu appears. From the context menu. Sort Descending: sort the data table records from the highest value in the first reference column to the lowest value. For each other column you want to sort on: a. Tip: If you want to sort data by several columns without moving the columns. 2. Right-click the column header. From the context menu. b. The entire column is selected. Sort Descending: sort the data table records from the highest value in the reference column to the lowest value. see "Advanced Sorting" on page 61.

or to facilitate working with large documents by reducing the amount of records displayed. 2. To filter a data table on one or more fields: 1. Once you have selected one or more values.7. You can save the filtering parameters as a folder configuration. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire data table (see Figure 1.36: Filtering by selection (Antenna AO9209) 62 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can filter data according to one or several criteria. - Figure 1. 3. Filter Excluding Selection: All records without the selected value or values are displayed. For information.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. see "Folder Configurations" on page 69. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. To select more than one value. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire data table (see Figure 1.3. you can choose to view only records that have the same value or only records that do not have that value. 1. press CTRL as you click the other values. You can filter data to be able to work with a subset of data.3 Filtering Data In Atoll.1 Filtering in Data Tables by Selection You can filter a data table by selecting one or more values.37 on page 63). This section explains the following: • • • • "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62 "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63 "Restoring All Records" on page 64 "Advanced Filtering: Examples" on page 64.7.35: The Sort dialogue 1.36 on page 62). The filtered data objects are the data objects that remain after you have applied your filter criteria. Select the value to filter on. Select one of the following from the Records menu: Filter by Selection: All records with the selected value or values are displayed.

To create an advanced filter: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Select as many columns as you want (see Figure 1. 2. you will find all the values represented in the selected field. Note: Making selections on the Filter tab of the Filter dialogue is the equivalent of filtering by selection as explained in "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62. 4. Figure 1. select the name of the column to be filtered on from the list. 3.Advanced tab b.38: The Filter dialogue . Click Clear All to clear all check boxes. Under Values to Include. In the Column row. Click the Advanced tab: a. b.37: Filtering excluding selection (Antenna AO9209) 1.7.2 Advanced Data Filtering You can use advanced data filtering to combine several criteria in different fields to create complex filters.3. Select Records > Advanced Filter. Click the Filter tab: a. Underneath each column name.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Figure 1. enter the criteria on which the column will be filtered as explained in the following table: Formula =X <> X <X Data are kept in the table only if value equal to X (X may be a number or characters) value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters) numerical value is less than X © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 63 . Tip: You can also access the Filter dialogue by clicking the Filter button of the Properties dialogue. Select a Field from the list. The Filter dialogue appears. Select the check boxes next to the values you want to include in the filter.38).

there is an Atoll document with antennas from two manufacturers and with different characteristics. The third criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth over 50°.3.Atoll User Manual Formula >X <=X >=X *X* X* Data are kept in the table only if numerical value is greater than X numerical value is less than or equal to X numerical value is greater than or equal to X text objects which contain X text objects which start with X 5. is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*").4 Advanced Filtering: Examples In this section. While you could write in the entire name ("=Kathrein"). Click OK to filter the data according to the criteria you have defined.40. as shown in Figure 1. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63): • The first criterion.40. 1.7." The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100°.4. it is not necessary because there is only one manufacturer with a "K. you may want to cancel the filter criteria and display all the records again.7.3. Figure 1. then vertically. 1. the following filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab.39: Initial table The objective of this example is to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. To restore all records: • Select Records > Remove Filter.3. 1. To do this.7.3 Restoring All Records After you have applied filter criteria to records.1 Advanced Filtering: Example 1 In this example. • • The combination of these criteria is all antennas from manufacturers with a name beginning with "K" and with a beamwidth under 100° but over 50°. you will find a few examples of advanced filtering: • • • "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64 "Advanced Filtering: Example 2" on page 65 "Advanced Filtering: Example 3" on page 65. Filters are combined first horizontally. See "Advanced Filtering: Examples" on page 64. 64 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1.

3. the entered filter syntax contains errors: • • As shown in Figure 1. the first criterion is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*").42. the objective of this example was to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. However.7. The filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab. however.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Figure 1. 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 65 . The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100° and over 50°. Figure 1. The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1. The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100° and over 50°. however. the document is the same as in "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64. The objective of this example is the same as well: to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. all antennas are displayed. The resulting filter searched for all antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth under 100°.4. in this case. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63). with "> 50" placed under "< 100". it functioned as an OR condition and not as an AND condition.3.3 Advanced Filtering: Example 3 In this example. the document is the same as in "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64.40. the entered filter syntax contains errors: • • As shown in Figure 1.2 Advanced Filtering: Example 2 In this example. The filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab. in this case. The objective of this example is the same as well: to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63).40: Advanced filtering 1.4.41.7. or all antennas over 50°. The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1.41: Errors in filtering As previously stated.40. because the second criterion (beamwidth under 100° and over 50°) is malformed. the first criterion is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*").

• • For a detailed description of the user configuration file. see the Administrator Manual. because the second criterion is malformed. even if not saved). orthogonality factor. is not stored in the database. You can create a user configuration file. When you create a user configuration file. default standard deviations. Vector maps must have the same coordinate system as the raster maps. Macros: The complete path of any macros.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. In this section. The file extension of the user configuration file is CFG. to ensure that all users in a large radio-planning project use the same settings. the visibility scale. and indoor loss) and raster or user profile traffic map description. map display settings (such as. Because a macro is linked to an Atoll session. • • Computation and Focus Zones: The computation and focus zone in the current document. etc. you can open and edit it with any XML-capable text editor. indoor loss. 1. you can export many types of settings you have made in a user configuration and then import the settings in another document. transparency. 66 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . and the display settings of radio data folders (including measurement display settings). height. Important: If you export the geographic data set in a user configuration file. If only the geographic data set or computation and focus zones are being exported in the user configuration file. the filtering zone. However. the information stored in a user configuration. such as geographic data. the objective of this example was to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. you can export the macros in a user configuration even if you do not have an Atoll document open. the filter only generates an error message and no antennas are filtered out. the following are explained: • • "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67 "Importing a User Configuration" on page 67. the percentage of pilot finger of each clutter class." Because the file is in XML (eXtensible Markup Language). grouping and filtering settings (those saved by the user and the current settings. however. name. Microwave Link Parameters: The settings of microwave links. you can export the following information: • Geographic data set: The complete path of imported geographic maps.). If you are working in a multiple-user environment with a central database.7.4 User Configurations In Atoll. and not to a specific Atoll document. clutter description (code. Folder configurations: Sorting.42: Errors in filtering As previously stated. the coordinate system of any vector geographic data must be the same as that of the raster geographic data. tips text. Atoll gives the file the extension "GEO. standard deviations.

1.43). Enter a File name for the user configuration file and click Save. Once you have created a site list.7.4. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. Figure 1.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1. as explained in "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67. 3. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import.44: Importing a user configuration 4. The Save As dialogue appears. Select the check boxes of the information you want to export as part of the user configuration. To import a user configuration: 1. 2. or to facilitate working with large documents by reducing the amount of records displayed.43: Exporting a user configuration 2. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 67 . The user configuration is imported. Select the user configuration file with the data you want to import.1 Exporting a User Configuration You create a user configuration by exporting the selected settings to an external file.4.7. Click Open. you can create lists of sites. Click OK. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.5 Site Lists In Atoll. 1.7. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 3. you can modify the list and use it to filter data to be able to work with a subset of data. The folder configuration has been saved.2 Importing a User Configuration You can import a user configuration that you or another user has created. 5. Figure 1. it into your current Atoll document. To export a user configuration: 1.44). 4. Select the check boxes of the information you want to import. The Open dialogue appears. Click OK.

Tip: You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list. site lists can be stored in the database. right-click the site you want to add to a list. Site list: if you want to add a site to a list: Select Add Site to a List from the context menu. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .4 68 Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone You can add the sites contained in a zone to a site or transmitter list.2 Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window You can add a site to a list by selecting it from the Explorer window. To add a site to a list: 1. A dialogue appears. b. 4.7. you can select the sites to load according to any defined site lists. When you open a document from a database. 1. The site is added to the selected list.3 Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window You can add a site to a list by selecting it from the map window. 5. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Sites folder to expand the folder. 3. 1.7.Atoll User Manual In a multi-user environment. Select Site Lists > Open Table from the context menu. The Site Lists table appears.5. Select the name of the list from the dialogue.5. 3. 1. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Creating a Site List" on page 68 "Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window" on page 68 "Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window" on page 68 "Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone" on page 68 "Editing a Site List" on page 69 "Filtering on a Site List" on page 69. The selected site will be added to the new list. Enter the name of the new list in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). The context menu appears. 2. In a large radio-planning project.7.5. this allows you to more effectively manage your resources by reducing the unnecessary data you retrieve from the database. Tip: You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list. Right-click the site you want to add to the list. Tip: You can quickly create a complete list by first filtering the contents of the Sites folder as explained in "Filtering Data" on page 62. To add a site to a list: 1. The selected site will be added to the new list. In the map window. you can add the filtered contents of folder to the list you select. The context menu appears. 3. 2. Right-click the Sites folder. Click OK. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. 1. The site is added to the selected list. Site list: if you want to add a site to a list: Select Add Site to a List from the context menu.5. A dialogue appears.7.1 Creating a Site List You can create lists of sites that you can then use to filter the data displayed. To create a site list: 1. by right-clicking the Sites folder and selecting Site Lists > Add Sites to a List from the context menu. Select the name of the list from the dialogue. Right-click the folder where you want to create the list: Site list: if you want to create a site list: a. Click OK. Then. In this section.

Right-click the folder whose contents you want to filter. 5. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 3. The Filter dialogue appears. You can now edit the list: To add a site to the list: Select the name of the site in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). 2. 1. Press DEL to delete the site from the list. Click OK. printing. Select Site Lists > Open Table from the context menu. On the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Create a zone as explained in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29 that contains the sites you want to add to a list. sorted.7. Select the name of the list you want to edit and click Properties. Select the check box of the list or lists that you want to display. 2. Click OK to close the Filter dialogue. 7. 6. The context menu appears. 3. 3. On the General tab of the Properties dialogue. 8. the parameters defining how data contained in a folder are grouped. 5.7. To edit a site list: 1. focus. Click OK when you have finished editing the site list. You can use a filtering. right-click the zone and select the following from the context menu: Add Sites to a List: Select Add Sites to a List to add the sites in the zone to a site list.6 Filtering on a Site List You can use site or transmitter lists to filter the contents of Sites folder. The Site Lists table appears. b. Tip: You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list. Right-click the Sites folder. To filter folder contents using a site list: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. Right-click the folder where you want to create the list: Site list: if you want to edit a site list: a. Click in the left margin of the row containing the site to select it. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Creating a Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Applying a Saved Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Exporting a Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Importing a Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Deleting a Folder Configuration" on page 71. The sites contained in the zone are added to the selected list. click the Filter button. 1.5. The Properties dialogue appears.7. computation. or sorting criteria. You can define folder configurations and save them. allowing you to consistently apply the same grouping. Only sites that belong to the selected list are now displayed in the Data tab of the Explorer window and in the map window. The context menu appears. 1.5. 2. or geographic export zone. The selected site will be added to the new list. or filtered are referred to as a folder configuration. To delete a site from the list: a. 4. A dialogue appears. b. filtering.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To add the sites contained in a zone to a list: 1.5 Editing a Site List You can edit a site list using the Site List table. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 69 .6 Folder Configurations In Atoll. 4. In this section. If you have created a list. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. Select the name of the list from the dialogue. there will be an additional tab: Sites: Click the Site Lists tab. The Properties dialogue appears.

To export a folder configuration: 1. Select the CFG file with the folder configuration you want to import.7. The saved folder configuration is only available for the current folder and can be reapplied to the folder by selecting it from the Configurations submenu on the folder’s context menu.6. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 4. To apply a saved folder configuration: 1. 2. 8. 1. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 3. To import a folder configuration: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. click Save. Enter a File name for the CFG file and click Save. 3. Click OK. Click OK to save the configuration and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. you can export it as part of a user configuration to an external file. The Open dialogue appears.7. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue. 2. you can reapply the same filter or sort settings to the new or modified data. so that it can be used in other documents. Select Properties from the context menu. or sorted a data folder. Select Apply Current Configuration from the context menu. In this case. 1. select those check boxes as well. Right-click the folder to which you want to apply a configuration. Enter the name of the configuration in the Save Configuration dialogue. The Save As dialogue appears. or sorted as a folder configuration. select the name of the configuration you want to apply.Atoll User Manual 1. 3. To reapply the folder configuration: 1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import. filtered. To create a configuration: 1. the properties of these may not match the folder configuration you previously made on the data folder. filtered.5 Importing a Folder Configuration Once you have exported a folder configuration as explained in "Exporting a Folder Configuration" on page 70. 2.3 Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration If you have grouped. 3. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the folder whose settings you want to save. However. If you want to export other configurations at the same time.7.43 on page 67). you have created and applied a folder configuration.7.4 Exporting a Folder Configuration When you create a folder configuration. 2. 3. If you have not yet done so. 4. you can save the parameters defining how data contained in a folder are grouped.44 on page 67).6. Select the Folder Configuration check box. 70 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select the Folder Configuration check box. set the following parameters as desired: Group By (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56) Sort (see "Sorting Data" on page 60) Filter (see "Filtering Data" on page 62). The previously configured folder configuration is reapplied to the data. On the Configurations submenu. 2. 7. Right-click the folder whose folder configuration you want to reapply.6.2 Applying a Saved Folder Configuration You can apply a configuration that has been created and saved for the present folder. 1.1 Creating a Folder Configuration In Atoll. The context menu appears. The folder configuration has been saved. 6. If you then add or modify data. 5.6. Click Open. you save it to the current ATL document. The folder configuration is applied to the current folder.7. 4. Under Configuration. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. you can import it into your current document.6. 1.

select the name of the configuration from the list. the data reappear under the initial folder. the data do not reappear under the initial folder. When you delete the last subfolder. Under Configuration. Click OK. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21.Chapter 1: The Working Environment If you want to import other configurations at the same time. on the map.6 Deleting a Folder Configuration You can delete a folder configuration from the Atoll document when you no longer need it. The data objects of the selected subfolder. For information on renaming an object. You can remove subfolders by deleting them. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. after deleting the last subfolder. 5. by displaying in turn each subfolder. Atoll will not ask for confirmation. depending on the different grouping.7 Creating and Comparing Subfolders You can compare the effects of different grouping. or filtering settings. Tip: If you have created several subfolders. Caution: When you delete a folder configuration. By limiting the number of sites.7.7. To create a subfolder of a folder: 1. or filtering settings by creating subfolders of object folders in the Data tab and applying different settings to each subfolder. A subfolder is created containing a copy of the original folder content. Select the check box of one of the subfolders. 1. with its grouping. Click Delete. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. Each subfolder contains a copy of the data in the object folder in which it was created. or filtering settings. leaving the check boxes of the other subfolders cleared. To delete a folder configuration: 1. To compare subfolders: 1. 6. The folder configuration is deleted. see "Renaming an Object" on page 17. Tip: If. You can now perform the following actions on the subfolder: • • • Grouping (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56) Sorting (see "Sorting Data" on page 60) Filtering (see "Filtering Data" on page 62). To delete a subfolder: • Right-click the subfolder to be deleted and select Delete from the context menu. For more information on display properties. the data contained are not deleted. How the objects are displayed on the map will change. you can compare the differences. Once you have performed the actions on each subfolder. are displayed on the map. 2. Select Create a Subfolder from the context menu. you can simplify your calculations by using a polygon on the map to limit the amount of data considered in calculations. 3. you can reduce the time and cost of calculations and make visualisation of data © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 71 . sorting. 1. select those check boxes as well. sorting. clear the check boxes to the left of each subfolder. right-click the folder you want to create a subfolder of.8 Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone In Atoll. Clear this check box and select the check box of a different subfolder. or filtering settings of the selected subfolder. When you delete a subfolder. The data objects are not displayed on the map. with its associated grouping. sorting.7. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue. 1. The folder configuration is imported. 5. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. it is deleted immediately. 3. sorting. 2. Right-click the folder with the folder configuration you want to delete. you can rename each one to give it a more descriptive name.6. 4. you can refresh the display by right-clicking the folder and selecting Group By > None from the context menu.

deleting. maps. the Undo and Redo histories are erased. This section explains: • • • "Searching for a Map Object by Its Name" on page 72 "Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property" on page 73 "Searching for a Point on the Map" on page 73. Tasks performed in the Explorer: such as creating and deleting objects (sites. You can also use the Location Finder to search for a point on the map by its x and y coordinates. and moving a site. ). groups of hexagons.1 Searching for a Map Object by Its Name You can use the Find toolbar to search for the following map objects by name: • • sites microwave links. For example.8. a microwave link. 1. for example. you can search for a site.8 Tips and Tricks In this section. up to a maximum of 10 actions. repeaters or remote antennas. to indicate that the For more information on creating and editing a filtering zone. any folder whose content is affected by the filtering zone appears with a special icon ( folder contents have been filtered.2 Refreshing Maps and Folders Under certain circumstances.3. Tasks performed in tables: such as adding or deleting records. repeaters.3 Searching for Objects on the Map Atoll provides several tools for finding data objects on the map. or links) by their name. moving a transmitter. You can refresh the display to get Atoll to reload the data and reapply the current configurations to folders. you can perform the following actions on the filtered data: • • • Grouping (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56) Sorting (see "Sorting Data" on page 60) Filtering (see "Filtering Data" on page 62). measurement paths. may not be actual. the data displayed on the map or in the Explorer window. The data objects filtered by the polygon are reflected on the map and in the data tables. 1. you can undo or redo: • • Most modifications in the workspace: such as creating. links. when you add data that is inconsistent with an applied filter. a station or a group of stations. On the Data tab of the Explorer window.8.).1 Undoing and Redoing You can undo or redo most actions in Atoll. 1. etc. transmitters. see "Using a Filtering Zone" on page 29. transmitters. a simulation. modifying the antenna azimuth. You can select a pre-existing computation or focus zone as a filter zone or you can draw a new filtering zone. By using the Location Finder.Atoll User Manual objects on the map clearer. pasting in tables. for example. To refresh the display of the Explorer window and the map: • Click the Refresh button ( ) on the toolbar or press F5. propagation models. or deleting a transmitter. You can search for some objects (sites. using the Find toolbar. • To undo an action: • Select Edit > Undo. or a vector by any text field.8. you will learn a few shortcuts and tricks to help you work more efficiently with Atoll: • • • • • • • "Undoing and Redoing" on page 72 "Refreshing Maps and Folders" on page 72 "Searching for Objects on the Map" on page 72 "Using the Status Bar to Get Information" on page 73 "Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer" on page 74 "Using Icons from the Toolbar" on page 74 "Using Shortcuts in Atoll" on page 75. coverage predictions. 72 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 1.8. To redo an action that you have undone: • Select Edit > Redo. If you perform an action that can not be undone. antennas. When you have applied a polygon filter. 1.

For information. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 73 . Note: You can also search for a map object by its name by using the Location Finder.e. You can use an asterisk as a wild card in the following ways: *X* X* text objects which contain X text objects which start with X 5. The Location Finder dialogue appears. choose the map object you are searching for: Site Link Vector 3.45): • • • • the current X-Y coordinates (according to the defined display coordinate system) the altitude (as defined in the DTM) the clutter class (as defined in the clutter classes properties) the clutter height (as defined in the clutter height file. 2. non-numeric) property: • • • sites microwave links vectors. From the Find list. Click OK. see "Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property" on page 73. Under Criteria.3. Click OK. From the Find list.8. select it and then select Delete from the context menu. Select View > Find Toolbar to display the Find toolbar. choose the map object you are searching for: Site Link 3. Note: You can change the Find toolbar to a floating window by double-clicking it. 4. Note: To remove the point icon ( ). Press ENTER. ) on the toolbar. including sites that are presently filtered out. Enter the x and y coordinates of the point. select the Include all the sites in the search (filtered or not) check box. Click the Location Finder button ( ) on the toolbar. using the same units as defined under Display on the Coordinates tab of the Options dialogue (see "Projection and Display Coordinate Systems" on page 81). 4. Atoll selects the object and centres it in the map window. Atoll selects the site and centres it in the map window. If you wish to search all the sites in the search. 2. 1.8. Enter the name of the object in the Named box.3 Searching for a Point on the Map You can search for a point by entering its x and y coordinates in the Location Finder. if available. 1. choose Point. about the current position of the mouse pointer in right side of the status bar (see Figure 1. You can use an asterisk ("*")as a wild card in the following ways: *X* X* *X names which contain X names which start with X names which end with X 4. select a Field to be searched and enter the value of the field. 3. Click the Location Finder button ( 2. Atoll marks the point ( ) and centres it in the map window. From the Find list..Chapter 1: The Working Environment To search for a map object by name using the Find toolbar: 1. To search for a map object by a text property using the Location Finder: 1. or in the clutter classes). The Location Finder dialogue appears. To search on the map for a point using the Location Finder: 1.8. 1.2 Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property You can use the Location Finder to search for the following map object using any text (i.4 Using the Status Bar to Get Information Atoll displays the following information.3.

Select Save As. 1.8. select View > Event Viewer to display it. If the Event Viewer is not displayed.Atoll User Manual X-Y coordinates Altitude (from DTM) Clutter class Figure 1. 4. and error ( ) messages. Click the event in the Event Viewer to select it. You can save the information displayed in the Event Viewer in a log file. For more information about these settings. see the Administrator Manual. Click OK. 5. The different icons located in the toolbar are listed below: • In the Standard toolbar Open the Project Templates dialogue (CTRL+N) Open the Open dialogue (CTRL+O) Save the current document (CTRL+S) Cut the selected data (CTRL+X) Copy the selected data (CTRL+C) Paste the content of the clipboard (CTRL+V) Undo the last modification (CTRL + Z) Redo the previous undone modification (CTRL + Y) Print the current window (table or map) (CTRL+P) Preview the current window before printing (table or map) (CTRL+P) Open the About Atoll dialogue • In the Map toolbar Select area Refresh display of map and folders (F5) Disable zooming and panning tools. Right-click the select event(s). The selected events are saved in the text file. The Event Viewer displays information ( ). You can also automatically generate log files for each Atoll session and select the level of information displayed in the Event viewer. 2. Some of them are also linked to shortcut keys (see "Using Shortcuts in Atoll" on page 75).6 Using Icons from the Toolbar You can access many commands in Atoll by clicking its icon on the toolbar. Move the map window (CTRL+D) 74 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . In the Save As dialogue. The Save As dialogue appears. enter a File name. warning ( ). and select a file type from the Save as type list. select a destination folder.8. as well as the progress of calculations.5 Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer Atoll displays information about the current document in the Event Viewer. 6. 3. To save events in the Event Viewer in a log file: 1.45: Information displayed in the status bar 1. The context menu appears. Click and drag to select several events.

• In the Vector Edition toolbar Create a new vector layer (in either the Geo or the Data tab) Select the vector layer to edit Draw a new polygon Draw a new rectangle Draw a new line Draw points Merge several vector polygons Cut out areas in polygons Create new polygon from overlapping areas Split one polygon along the drawn lines.7 Using Shortcuts in Atoll Atoll provides many shortcuts that enable you to access commonly used tools and commands more quickly. giving a short description. see "Using Icons from the Toolbar" on page 74): © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 75 . Create a new multipoint microwave link. Create a new multi-hop microwave link. 1.8.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Map scale currently used Previous/Next view (zoom and location) Zoom in on the map and centre on the cursor location (CTRL+A) and zoom out on the map and centre on the cursor location (CTRL+R) Define a zoom area on the map (CTRL+W) Turn on tool tips Measure distances on the map Location finder Display a point-to-point profile • In the Microwave link toolbar Create a new microwave link. Note: When you place the cursor over an icon. Currently selected microwave link model Activate the microwave link profile analysis window Show or hide victim and interferer links Show or hide site parities Stop the calculations in progress • In the Search toolbar Centre site in the map window. The shortcuts available are listed below (some of the same commands can be accessed using a toolbar icon. a tool tip appears.

For more information. click ) ) ) ) ) • CTRL+S: Save the current active document (in the toolbar. or Point to Multipoint folder or subfolder from a text file. click CTRL+–: Zoom out on the map (in the toolbar. click CTRL+D: In tables: Copy the first cell of a selection down into all selected cells In the map window: Move the map window (in the toolbar. Links. click CTRL+W: Define a zoom area on the map (in the toolbar. F5: Refresh display of map and folders (toolbar: select ) • Using the Function Keys - Tip: Menus and commands can be also accessed by pressing the ALT key and typing the underlined letter in the menu or command name.Atoll User Manual • Using the CTRL key: CTRL++: Zoom in on the map (in the toolbar. see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49. For more information. CTRL+N: Open the Project Templates dialogue (in the toolbar. see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50. click ) ) ALT+F8: Open the Add-ins and Macros dialogue F3: Select the Find Site tool. click CTRL+Z: Undo the last modification (in the toolbar. click →: Next zoom and location on the map (in the toolbar. Multi-Hops. or Point to Multipoint folder or subfolder to a text file. click ) ) and click the map) and right-click the map) CTRL+E: Export the table of the selected Sites. click CTRL+P: Print the current window (in the toolbar. click CTRL+SHIFT+N: Create a new document from an existing database CTRL+O: Open the Open dialogue (in the toolbar. click ) ) Using the ALT key: ALT+ ALT+ ←: Previous zoom and location on the map (in the toolbar. Multi-Hops. click CTRL+U: Copy the last cell of a selection up into all selected cells CTRL+V: Paste the content of the clipboard (in the toolbar. click CTRL+A: Select all records in a table CTRL+C: Copy the selected data (in the toolbar. 76 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . CTRL+F: Open the Find dialogue in a table CTRL+I: Import the table of the selected Sites. click ) ) ) CTRL+Y: Redo the previous undone modification (in the toolbar. click CTRL+Q: Select Zoom In/Out tool (in the toolbar. click CTRL+X: Cut the selected data (in the toolbar. Links.

Chapter 2 Starting an Atoll Project .

Atoll User Manual 78 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

The actual templates supplied depend on the modules included with your Atoll installation.1 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template You can create a new Atoll document from a template. this template is provided to enable you to create a project of only microwave radio links. Atoll has a template for each technology you will be planning for.2. or you can open it from the Open dialogue. coordinate systems. technology-specific parameters. You can also create your own templates by opening an existing template. Atoll enables you to find the file and repair the link. Microwave data: frequency bands. you can create the Atoll document. Once the necessary data have been assembled. etc. see the technology-specific chapters. 2. TD-SCDMATD-SCDMATD-SCDMA • © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 79 . microwave radio links.1 Templates Available Depending on your configuration of Atoll. you create an Atoll document in one of two ways: • From a document template: You can create a new Atoll document from a template.2. UMTS HSPA. see "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project".1 Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project For every microwave-planning project you must assemble the information necessary: • • • Microwave equipment: sites. you can modify the network parameters to meet your particular needs. 2. CDMA200 1xRTT 1xEV-DO. For information on starting a document from a database. WiMAX. the objects that are available are appropriate for the technology. Geographic data: clutter classes. see "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database" on page 84. and other equipment. population maps. For more information on equipment. You can also create your own template by basing it on an existing document that you have already customised with. UMTS cells are only available in UMTS documents and TRX are only available in GSM-TDMA documents. as part of a complete mobile telecommunications network. the tabs in the transmitter Properties dialogue as well as the radio parameters available differ according to the project. antennas. Once you have started your new Atoll project. see "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 79. Working with a database allows several users to share the same data while at the same time managing data consistency. In this chapter. For information on creating a document from a template. certain geo data or antennas.1. Several templates are supplied with Atoll: GPS GPRS EGPRS. The exact procedure for creating a new Atoll document from a database differs. When you open an existing project. For more information onmicrowave data. you can select it from the File menu if it is one of the last projects you have worked on. For example. you base it on a template that has the data and folder structure necessary for the technology you are using. from any technology template.2 Creating an Atoll Document Whatever the radio technology you will be modelling. For more information on geographic data. • From an existing database: When you create a new Atoll document from a database. it may happen that one of the linked files was moved or renamed since the last time you worked on that project. the following are explained: • • • "Templates Available" on page 79 "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 80 "Defining a New Atoll Document" on page 81 2. clutter heights.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 2 Starting an Atoll Project When you want to start a new project. In this section. Atoll is delivered with a template for each technology you will be planning for. and LTE. the following templates are available: • Microwave Radio Links: Atoll allows you to model microwave radio links. However. For example. the database you connect to has been created with the technology and data you need. Because Atoll can work with linked geographic data files. see the technology-specific chapters. depending on the database containing the data. 2. Atoll can work with several common databases. etc. Each template provides data and a data structure suitable for the technology. making the changes necessary to meet your own needs and then saving it as a new template. DTM. Once you have selected the appropriate template for your microwave-planning project. for example. the following are explained: • • "Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project" on page 79 "Creating an Atoll Document" on page 79. As well. you configure the basic parameters of the Atoll document (see "Defining a New Atoll Document" on page 81).

Figure 2. These can be modified or replaced. respectively. Atoll creates a new document based on the template selected.2.46: New Atoll document based on a template Figure 2.Atoll User Manual 2. The Project Templates dialogue appears.47 and Figure 2. The Data tab of the Explorer window now has a folder structure suitable for a UMTS HSPA HSPA radio-planning project. To verify whether the document is connected to a database: • Select File > Database > Connection Properties. folders for UMTS HSPA HSPA parameters and UMTS HSPA HSPA simulations. The Antennas folder is expanded to show the UMTSUMTS-compatible antennas suggested by Atoll. the document is not connected to a database.48: New Atoll document — Modules tab When you create an Atoll document from a template. Figure 2.46 shows a new Atoll document based on the UMTS HSPA HSPA template. Select the template on which you want to base your document and click OK. Select File > New > From a Document Template. 80 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The dialogue in Figure 2. Figure 2.1.2 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template To create a new document from a template: 1. 2.48 show the contents of the Geo and Modules tabs of the new document.49 appears. among other UMTSUMTS-specific elements. with.47: New Atoll document — Geo tab Figure 2.

3 Defining a New Atoll Document Once you have created a new Atoll document as explained in "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 80. etc.).50.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project Figure 2. The projected zones are referenced using cartographic coordinates (meter. Washington. This projection cannot be done without distortion. thus the cartographer must choose the characteristic (distance. You can also position on the map sites referenced in the display system: the coordinates are automatically converted from the projection system to the display system and the site is displayed on the map. you define the two coordinate systems for each Atoll document: the projection coordinate system and the display coordinate system.1 Projection and Display Coordinate Systems In Atoll. Atoll has databases including more than 980 international coordinate system references.3. such as basic measurement units. Snyder. Atoll distinguishes the cartographic coordinate systems for projection and either cartographic or geographic coordinate systems for display.C.. but a representation of a location on the earth's surface from geographic coordinates (degree-minute-second or grade) giving the latitude and longitude in relation to the origin meridian (Paris for NTF system and Greenwich for ED50 system). This projection type is useful for representing countries or regions that lay primarily east to west. On the other hand. site coordinates are stated in the geographic WGS 72 system (coordinates in degrees-minutes-seconds). area or shape) which is to be shown appropriately at the expense of the other characteristics. • A geographic system is not a projection. 1982. By default. you configure the basic parameters of the Atoll document. The Universal Transverse Mercator projection (UTM): a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cylinder tangent to a meridian (which is transverse or crosswise to the equator). direction. The maps displayed in the workspace are referenced with the same projection system as the imported geographic data files.1.1. D. In Figure 2. Two projection systems are widely used: • The Lambert Conformal-Conic projection: a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cone conceptually secant at one or two standard parallels. 1. a database based on the European Petroleum Survey Group and another one regrouping only France's coordinate systems. you can see (using the rulers or status bars) the location of sites on the map in a coordinate system different from the projection coordinate system. 2nd Edition. the following are explained: • • • "Projection and Display Coordinate Systems" on page 81 "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 82 "Setting Measurement Units" on page 82 2. 313 pages. Map Projections Used by the US Geological Survey. In this section. but you must set projection and display coordinate systems. scale.. John.2. A projection is a method for producing all or part of a round body on a flat sheet. the French Riviera geographic data file has been imported. yard. the same coordinate system is used for both. The map shows the French Riviera projected using the cartographic NTF (Paris)/France II étendue system (coordinates in metres). This projection type is useful for mapping large areas that are oriented north-south. United States Government Printing Office. thus. The locations in the geographic system can be converted into other projections. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 81 .49: An Atoll document based on a template is not connected to a database 2.2. or he must compromise on several characteristics1. P. the projection system depends on the imported geographic file. You can accept the default values for some parameters. By choosing a specific display system.

Note: The degree format options apply only to the geographic coordinate systems. For the display system. you must set a coordinate system for your Atoll document.50: NTF (Paris)/France II étendue system used with WGS 72 system Notes: All imported raster geographic files must be use the same cartographic system. The Options dialogue appears. Select a coordinate system from the list. If you wish to set a different coordinate system for the display. in the Display field as well. 4. Select Tools > Options. To define the coordinate system: 1. and offset to internal defaults.Atoll User Manual Figure 2. click the Browse button ( tems dialogue appears. select a catalogue from the Find in list.9’’N 26d56m29. both cartographic systems (identified by the symbol) and geographic systems (identified by the symbol) are available. transmission.2 Setting a Coordinate System Because you are working with maps. Select Tools > Options. 2. The selected coordinate system appears in the Projection field and.93914N +26.2. projection and display coordinate systems are the same.1.1. You can accept these default measurement units. 2. On the Coordinates tab. you must convert them to a single cartographic system. by default. Atoll sets certain measurement units for reception. On the Coordinates tab. The Coordinate Sys- 3. select the format from the Degree Format list.93914 To change the degree display format: 1. or you can change them using the Options dialogue. only cartographic systems (identified by the symbol) are available. In the Coordinate Systems dialogue.3 Selecting the Degree Display Format Atoll can display longitude and latitude in four different formats. The Options dialogue appears. 6. 2.2.9sN 26.1. 2. Click OK. 3. If not.3. By default. 5. but you can choose a different display coordinate system if you wish. ) to the right of the Projection field.4 Setting Measurement Units When you create a new Atoll document.3. Click OK. Tip: If you frequently use a particular coordinate system you can add it to a catalogue of favourites by clicking Add to Favourites. click the Browse button ( ) to the right of the Display field and repeat step 3. to step 5. 82 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . distance.2.3. 2. For the projection system. For example: • • • • 26°56’29. height.

Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project To set the measurement units: 1. there are issues related to sharing data that do not arise when you are working on a stand-alone document. Select Tools > Options.2. connected over a network: • A central Atoll project: The central Atoll project can only be accessed. The use of a database means that potential data conflicts due to modifications from other users. when you archive your changes to the database. Shared data: Shared data are initially set up by the administrator using the central Atoll project and are then accessed. When you create a new Atoll document from a database. and updated by the Atoll users and the administrator. When you work on a document created from a database.2. for example). so as to minimise the size of the Atoll file. The Options dialogue appears. refresh their projects from the data stored in the database. usually store these modifications locally. and updated by the Atoll administrator. users can modify their projects. for example. For example. Click OK. and is then subdivided into sections on which users or groups of users can work simultaneously. for example. the following are explained: • • • • • "The Atoll Multi-User Environment" on page 83 "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database" on page 84 "Working With a Document on a Database" on page 85 "Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database" on page 86 "Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database" on page 87. they are stored externally. 2. Shared geographic data: Shared geographic data files are usually stored on a common file server with a fast access connection. Since geographic data files are usually large. The shared data are mainly of the following three types: The central database: The central database stores all the radio data of all the Atoll user documents. work simultaneously on given parts of a single. thus ensuring access to the database by other users. Consequently. It is initiated through the central Atoll project by the administrator. worked on. and archive their modifications in the database. This section describes the different components of multi-user environments and outlines their purpose. load only the required part of the geographic data (as defined by the CFG file. • - • User Documents: Individual user documents are initialised by the administrator but are later worked upon and managed by each user.2 Working in a Multi-User Environment A multi-user environment is one where a number of users. modified or deleted records. or groups of users. select the desired unit for the following measurements: Reception Transmission Distance Height and offset 3. modified. you are working on data that you are sharing with other users. can be detected and resolved. On the Units tab. Atoll loads the data to which you have rights from database into your new document and then disconnects it from the database. editing edit clutter or traffic in their respective projects.1 The Atoll Multi-User Environment An Atoll multi-user environment consists of the following elements. the Atoll administrator can manage all the data shared by all the individual Atoll users or groups of users. Through this central Atoll project. Once the database is in place.e. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 83 . The connection to the reference database is reactivated only when necessary. they are usually linked to an Atoll file. large (may be nation-wide) network.. modified. Users who modify geographic data locally. In this section.2. User documents are Atoll files which are connected to the central database. 2. Different user groups may be working on regional or smaller sections of the network. since these modifications rarely have an impact on other users. i. 2. the changes you have made may occasionally interfere with changes other users have made and you will need to resolve this conflict. and have access to the shared path loss matrices folder.

allowing you to select the data to load into Atoll as a new document (see "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 85). "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 85.2. 3.2. Select File > New > From an Existing Database. Password. The Open from a Database dialogue appears. In the Files of type list. The exact procedure of connecting with the database differs from one database to another. you must connect to the database. in order to allow other users access to the database. Depending on the type of the database. Click OK. a dialogue may appear where you can enter your User Name. Then the connected is interrupted. 2.2. 84 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .1 Connecting to a Database To create a new document from a database: 1. and Server. Once connected. Note: Additional dialogues may open asking you to choose which project in the database to load or which site list to load. An example of a new Atoll document created from a database is shown in: • "Working With a Document on a Database" on page 85 2. see the Administrator Manual. The Data to Load dialogue appears.2.Atoll User Manual Figure 2.2 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database When you create a new document from a database. A new connection with the database will be created only when necessary. Atoll can work with the following databases: • • • • • Microsoft Access Microsoft SQL Server Oracle Sybase Microsoft Data Link files The following sections give examples of connecting to two different databases and loading data: • • "Connecting to a Database" on page 84. Atoll loads the database into a new Atoll document.51: Components of Multi-user Environments Note: For information on creating and maintaining the database.2. select the option corresponding to the type of your database. 2.

3 Working With a Document on a Database Figure 2. These can be modified or replaced.2.2 Selecting the Data to Load From the Database When you create a new document from a database.55 show the contents of the Geo and Modules tabs of the new document. Atoll will also load the associated exceptional pairs table.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 2. You can select which Project. and Neighbour to load.54 and Figure 2.2. The Data tab of the Explorer window now has a folder structure suitable for a UMTS radio-planning project. Figure 2. You can re-centre the document on the data displayed in the Data tab by expanding the Sites folder. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 85 . respectively.53 shows a new Atoll document based created from a database. rightclicking on any site. If you load the intra-technology or the inter-technology neighbour list. This is because the north-west point of the project is by default the axis origin. such as sites.2.52: Selecting the data to load 2. unlike a document created from a template. Figure 2.53: New Atoll document opened from a database Note: The new document may open with no site displayed in the map window.2. Figure 2.2. Site List. you can select the data to be loaded from the database to create the document in the Data to load dialogue. Custom Fields Groups. The Sites folder is expanded to show that a document created from a database can have additional data. and selecting Centre in the map window from the context menu.

If you chose Archive your changes in the database. Cancel your changes and reload database: This option allows you to cancel any changes you have made and start over from the point of the last archive to the database. Atoll proceeds without asking for confirmation.2.4 Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database As you are working on your document. Caution: If you disconnect your document from the database. Select File > Database > Connection Properties. Figure 2. Notes: • • If you chose Refresh unmodified data only or Cancel your changes and reload database. To refresh an Atoll document from the database: 1. The Database Connection dialogue appears (see Figure 2. You can ensure that you have the most recent data in your document by refreshing the information from the database. you can view the characteristics of the database connection. If the database is updated frequently. it will be become a stand-alone document and you will not be able to reconnect it to the database. Select File > Database > Refresh From the Database. You can now: Disconnect your document from the database. Refresh unmodified data only: This option allows you to refresh from the database only those items that you have not modified in your document. 86 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . the Archive dialogue appears. How frequently you refresh the document depends on how frequently the database is updated. In the dialogue. To view the characteristics of the database connection: 1. see "Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database" on page 87. The Refresh dialogue appears.2.55: New Atoll document — Modules tab When you create an Atoll document from a database.56: The Database Connection dialogue 2.54: New Atoll document — Geo tab Figure 2. 2. in order to continue working with the most up-to-date data. you should refresh your document frequently as well. - Modify your connection to the database. you can do one of the following if you have modified your document but have not yet saved those changes in the database: Archive your changes in the database: This option allows you to archive your changes to the server instead of refreshing your document from the server. 2. other users who have access to the database may have modified some of the data.56). For information on using the Archive dialogue.Atoll User Manual Figure 2.

However. 2. 2. you can archive only some of them or even undo modifications you have made locally. In the Archive dialogue. What you can archive depends on the user rights the database administrator has given to you. You can archive all your modifications or only the site-related modifications. you can generate a report for the refresh process.5 Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database When you are working on an Atoll document that is attached to a database. Under Modifications Since the Last Refresh.57). 4. because only the administrator can modify the properties of the antennas. and opens it. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 87 . you can select the neighbour lists. you should from time to time archive the modifications you have made to the data on the database. Click OK.1 Archiving All Modifications in the Database To archive all your modifications in the database: 1. click Close. in a UMTS HSPA radio planning project. and updates) that were stored in the database since the last time you refreshed or opened your document.2 Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the Database Atoll allows you to archive only site-related data if you wish. Which data is archived depends on the radio technology you are working with. 2. the following are explained: • • • "Archiving All Modifications in the Database" on page 87 "Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the Database" on page 87 "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. etc. 2. You can then rename the file and save it where you wish. How frequently you should archive your document depends on several factors: the amount and size of changes you make. In this section. 5. For example. Select File > Database > Archive to the Database. Occasionally. when you are archiving. the site-related data are: sites. Intra-technology Neighbours and Inter-technology Neighbours. Atoll creates a text file in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format in the temporary files system folder. you can do the following: Click Run All to archive all your changes to the database. 4. and neighbours. The Archive dialogue appears (see Figure 2.2. Atoll will inform you of the possible conflicts and help you resolve them. allowing you to create a new Atoll document with the given antennas. When you are finished archiving.5. additions. The Atoll archiving process is flexible.2. if you wish. transmitters. you can have read access to the antennas table. cells. the number of other users using the database who may benefit from your modifications.2. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Undo to refresh the modification with the original data from the database. Atoll shows you all modifications that will be archived and. Under Take into account. For information on managing conflicts. when you archive your changes. The report lists all the modifications (deletions. see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. For example.2.2. If you selected to generate a report. The document is refreshed according to the selected options. If some of the data has been modified on the database since you last refreshed. you will not be able to archive any changes you make to the antennas without write access to the table. As well.2. other users might have modified some of the same data and.5. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Run to archive the selected modification to the database Select one item under Pending Changes and click Differences to view the differences between the local item and the item on the database.57: The Archive dialogue 3. Atoll stops the archiving process and asks you to resolve the conflict. to refresh. Figure 2.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 3.

Figure 2. Atoll ignores all items causing conflicts in all tables being archived. or wait until the end of the archive process. The Conflict in Changes dialogue appears. you can see the value of the field in the database in the Database values column.59). In the Pending Changes pane of the Archive dialogue. select the conflict you want to resolve and click Resolve. If some of the data has been modified on the database since you last refreshed.5. When you are finished archiving. In the Conflict in Changes dialogue. the archiving process stops. To resolve data conflicts one by one: 1.58: Conflict warning You have three options: • Ignore: If you click Ignore. Atoll will warn you with the Database Transfer Error dialogue again. and archives all other modifications. click Close. 2. if conflicts are found in other tables. There are two different types of data conflicts: On a modified record: You are in the process of archiving your modifications on the database and another user has modified the same data since you last archived or refreshed your data. Ignore All: If you click Ignore All. However. see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. Atoll stops the archiving process and asks you to resolve the conflict. Abort: If you click Abort. You can attempt to resolve conflicts before restarting the archiving process. this also creates the possibility of two users modifying the same data. and continues with the next table. When the second user attempts to archive his changes.3 Resolving Data Conflicts Atoll enables several users to use the same database by allowing user to load the data and then freeing the database for other users. 4. the procedure to resolve the conflict is the same. • • Whether you abort the archive process to resolve the conflict immediately.Atoll User Manual To archive only the site-related data in the database: 1. A conflict is caused only by differences in the same field of the same record between the database and the current Atoll document. You can resolve the conflicts after the archiving process has ended.2. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Run to archive the selected modification to the database Select one item under Pending Changes and click Differences to view the differences between the local item and the item on the database. 2.58. Atoll allows you to resolve data conflicts. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Undo to refresh the modification with the original data from the database. with the fields in conflict highlighted (see Figure 2. as well as the value of the same field in your document in the Current values column. 3. you can do the following: Click Run All to archive all your changes to the database. However. it displays the warning shown in Figure 2.2. For information on managing conflicts. archives all other modifications in the table. The Archive dialogue appears. You can resolve the conflicts after the archiving process has ended. In the Archive dialogue. Atoll warns him that the data have been changed since he last refreshed the data and that there is a conflict. Atoll ignores items causing conflicts in the table being archived. 88 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select File > Database > Archive to the Database. When Atoll finds a conflict.

No: Select No to overwrite the modifications made by other users in the database with the values from your document. Your modification will be written to the database. Your modification will be lost and the value in the database will remain unchanged. - - On a deleted record: You are in the process of archiving your modifications on the database and another user has deleted a record since you last archived or refreshed your data. No: Select No to abandon your modifications to this record and delete this record from your document. 2. Important: You should only resolve all the data conflicts when you are certain about the modifications.59: The Conflict in Changes dialogue If you want to overwrite the database value with the value of the same field in your document. Click Close to close the Archive dialogue. Cancel: Select Cancel to cancel. In the Pending Changes pane of the Archive dialogue. 2. select the check box next to the highlighted change and click Archive.60: Conflict on a deleted record Yes: Select Yes to store your modifications in the database. Cancel: Select Cancel to cancel. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 89 . see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. If you want to accept the value of the field in the database. select any conflict and click Resolve All. overwriting the value there. Click Close to close the Archive dialogue. Select one of the following: Figure 2.61). Select one of the following: Figure 2. Atoll displays a message explaining that the record you are trying to update has been deleted from the database (see Figure 2. clear the check box next to the highlighted change and click Archive.61: Resolving all the data conflicts simultaneously Yes: Select Yes to accept all the modifications made by other users in the database and update your document with values from the database. thereby recreating the deleted record. For information.60). Atoll displays a message explaining how Resolve All works (see Figure 2.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project Figure 2. To resolve all the data conflicts: 1.

Atoll displays a message in the Event Viewer every time a backup file is updated. In this section.atl. the automatic backup is delayed until the calculations have ended. if you have a lot of documents open. Atoll prompts you each time before backing up the document. 90 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . If you are performing calculations. Atoll proceeds to back up all open documents.3 Making a Backup of Your Document Atoll can create and automatically update backups of documents you are working on. If you open two large documents in the same Atoll session.3. To configure automatic backup: 1. Select the Activate automatic backup check box. i. The timer starts again once the calculations are over." Atoll will create a backup file called "filename.atl. Enter a time interval.1 Configuring Automatic Backup You can set up automatic backup for each Atoll session. coverage predictions or simulations. The Automatic Backup Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 2. Select File > Configure Automatic Backup. Once you have saved the document.63: Automatic backup prompt The automatic backup timer is stopped while the prompt is displayed.62: Automatic backup configuration dialogue 2.bak" in the same folder as the original document. When you have activated automatic backup. see the Administrator Manual.Atoll User Manual 2. Atoll skips the backup once. Note: It can take a long time to back up large documents. you can optimise the process by opening large documents in separate Atoll sessions.ini file. Click OK. If you open them in two different Atoll sessions. these documents will use the same 2 GB memory pool. in minutes. For more information. 5. This also improves memory management because each instance of Atoll has its own 2 GB (under 32-bit operating systems.e. Figure 2. this operation can take a long time. Atoll automatically creates a backup for every document open. You can also configure Atoll to create automatic backups of external path loss matrices (LOS files) by setting an option in the atoll. For example. 2. Consequently. You can define the update interval each time you start Atoll. you should set a correspondingly larger interval between backups when working with large documents in order to optimise the process. Therefore. for a document named "filename. If you click Cancel. between consecutive backups in the Automatically save backups every text box. However. the following are explained: • • "Configuring Automatic Backup" on page 90 "Recovering a Backup" on page 91. Select the Prompt before starting automatic backup check box if you want Atoll to ask you before saving the back up of your file every time (see Figure 2. instead of in the same Atoll session.62).. If you save the original document manually. If you click OK. Figure 2. 4. each document will have its own 2 GB allocated memory. 3. Atoll creates a backup of the original document and updates it at a defined interval. the timer is reset to 0. If you selected the Prompt before starting automatic backup check box. 4 GB under 64-bit operating systems) memory allocation.63).

dbf files are stored in the archive because they are needed when reopening the archive in Atoll. Click OK. Therefore. 5. Select File > Open from Zip. Often these geographic data files are quite large. A ". and data present within folders on the Geo tab are stored inside their respective folders. If the original document was named "filename. navigate to the folder containing your original Atoll document and its backup. 2.3. Using Windows Explorer.atl. such as a file server over a network. Click Open. and performance reasons. For example. 4. coverage predictions. you could change the name to "filename-backup. more useful to make a project portable by creating an archive that contains the ATL and all geographic data files. simulation results. 3. and select "Zip Files (*. Externally stored path loss matrices are not added to the archive because they are not necessary for making a portable document because they can be recalculated based on the network and geographic data in the ATL file.2 Recovering a Backup You can easily recover your backup document and open it in Atoll just like any other Atoll document.atl.atl. your backup file will have the same file name as the original file and Windows will not allow you to rename the file. geographic data. it opens the extracted ATL file. they are first copied to the local computer in the Windows’ temporary files folder and then added to the archive. The Open dialogue appears. it is safer to give a new name to the backup file and keep the original file until you are sure which version is most recent.). Rename the document and remove the BAK extension. Atoll lets you make an archive containing the ATL file and all geographic data directly from the File menu. and it is not feasible to embed these files in an ATL file due to file size. Select the folder where you want to extract the contents of the ZIP file. 3.zip)" from the Save as type list. memory consumption." Important: If you just remove the BAK extension.4 Making and Sharing Portable Atoll Projects You can create portable Atoll documents in two ways: • • by embedding all the geographic data in the ATL file. To make an archive containing the ATL file and all linked geographic data files: 1. To open an archive containing an ATL file and all linked geographic data files: 1. If the geographic data files linked to the document are located on a remote computer." the backup document will be in the same folder and will be called "filename. The Browse For Folder dialogue appears. 2. Once Atoll has finished extracting files from the archive. enter a File name for the archive to be created. Select File > Save to Zip.dbf file and a LowRes subfolder which contains the pathloss. Atoll creates a ZIP file containing: A copy of the ATL file with the same name as the name of the archive (ZIP file). therefore. Select the ZIP file that contains the ATL file and linked geographic data files. The ATL file added to the archive contains all the data that might be embedded in it (path loss matrices. Select the folder where the created archive is to be stored. Once the portable archive is created. A "Geo" folder with all the linked geographic data available on the Geo tab of the Explorer window for the Atoll document. You will be able to recover all the work up to the last time the backup was saved. In most working environments.losses" folder containing a pathloss. measurement data. 2. Geographic data that are found outside folders on the Geo tab are stored in files under the Geo folder. you can open it directly from Atoll without first having to extract it using another tool.dbf file corresponding to the extended path loss matrices. geographic data files are stored on a common file server and are linked to the ATL documents of different users over a network. Atoll extracts all the files from the archive to the selected folder. etc.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 2. The pathloss. Open the renamed backup document in Atoll.bak". It is. or by creating a compressed archive (ZIP file) containing the ATL file and all geographic data linked to the Atoll document. The Save As dialogue appears. This folder contains subfolders with the same names as the folders on the Geo tab. Geographic data extracted from the archive are linked to the ATL file. If necessary. To recover your backup document: 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 91 . it creates the subfolders required for extracting the contents of the Geo folder. 2.

Atoll User Manual Notes: • • You do not need to have a compression utility. The highest compression level is used when creating the archive. such as WinZip or WinRAR. installed on the computer for this feature. 92 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data .

Atoll User Manual 94 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

lines. The different geographic data types play different roles in the Atoll document: • Geographic data used in propagation calculation: • Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps Images from web map services (WMS) Contours. deciding the priority of data files with different information or different resolutions. Other types such as scanned images. the following data types are described: • • • • • • "Digital Terrain Model" on page 95 "Clutter Classes" on page 95 "Clutter Heights" on page 96 "Contours. Clutter classes are taken into account by the propagation model during computations. You can import a wide variety of both vector and raster-format geo data files. railways. You can also create and edit geographic data. Clutter Classes The clutter class geo data file describes land cover or land use. and traffic data maps are types of the geographic data that you can import or create. you can edit the data. scanned images. 3. or points. choosing a folder is choosing what the file will be used for. Lines. are used to create a more realistic display of the region under study. and Points" on page 106 "Scanned Images" on page 107 "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108 "Setting the Priority of Geo Data" on page 109 "Editing Geographic Data" on page 113 "Saving Geographic Data" on page 116. discrete values. You can add a vector layer to certain data types to which you can add contours. roads. Therefore. You can also create raster-based geographic data such as traffic maps or clutter classes. You can also create your own data type by importing a file and defining what data is to be used. such as clutter classes. either by transferring them to the Data tab. lines. Atoll supports a wide range of file formats for geographic data files. For example: the Digital Terrain Model (DTM). Geographic data used for display purposes: In this section. raster polygons. DTM. You can display the DTM in different ways: by single value. Atoll also allows you to save changes you make to geo data objects back to the original files. clutter heights. can be used to give more realistic calculations. Some data types. or regions. clutter heights. you can decide in which folder it goes. Atoll also allows you to manage multiple files for a single data type. This chapter explains the following topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • "Geographic Data Types" on page 95 "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96 "Importing Geo Data Files" on page 96 "Clutter Classes" on page 103 "Clutter Heights" on page 106 "Digital Terrain Models" on page 103 "Contours. You can also display geo data over items on the Data tab. or vector layers) for use in other Atoll documents or in other applications. clutter classes. for example. create new geographic data.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3 Managing Geographic Data Several different geographic data types are used in an Atoll document. and Points" on page 96 "Scanned Images" on page 96 "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 96 Digital Terrain Model The DTM describes the elevation of the ground over sea level. or by value intervals (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21). This enables you to update the original files and.1 Geographic Data Types An Atoll document can contain several different geographic data types. Once you have imported a file into the Atoll document. or modify existing data. recompact the file. or by importing them directly to the Data tab. clutter classes. The DTM is automatically taken into account by the propagation model during computations. When you import a geo data file into Atoll. The Geo tab of the Atoll Explorer window has folders for the commonly used data types. You can export most geo data objects (for example. Lines. and points representing. through the process of saving them. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 95 . define how the geo data will be displayed.

SHP. BMP (16-bit). Contours can also be used to create filtering polygons or computation or focus zones. They are used to provide a precise background for other objects or for less precise maps and are used only for display. BIL (8-bit). they have no effect on calculations. Traffic data maps are used for network capacity analyses. Traffic Data Maps Traffic data maps contain information on capacity and service use per geographic area. BMP (8-bit). IST (1 to 24-bit). Atoll supports a variety of both raster and vector file formats. and Points Atoll supports contours. JPEG 2000 (16-bit). discrete values. Planet. BIL (16-bit). Planet. Clutter height maps can offer more precise information than defining an altitude per clutter class because. Scanned Images Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the actual physical surroundings. and TAB. and Erdas Imagine (8-bit) Vector data files in the following formats: AGD. Planet. Note: The only propagation models that can take clutter heights into account in calculations are the Standard Propagation Model and WLL model. it is possible to have different heights within a single clutter class. • • 3. Clutter heights can also be defined by a separate clutter heights file (see "Clutter Heights" on page 96). When you import a new geo data file.3 Importing Geo Data Files You can import the geographic data you need into the current Atoll document. Contours. They are used for display only and have no effect on computations. BMP (1 to 24-bit). MIF. vapour density. JPEG 2000 (8 to 16-bit). JPEG 2000 (8 to 16-bit). SHP. Planet. see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104. Geoclimatic files in the following formats: AGD. Planet. Planet. lines. or by value intervals (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21). or in other words to a certain type of ground use or cover. IST (16-bit). Geoclimatic Maps Geoclimatic maps are vector files containing information on climatic conditions such as rain density. in a clutter height file. 3. the height will be defined as an average height for each clutter class. You can 96 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . and points to represent polygons such as regions. AGD. GRC Vertical Mapper (8 or 16-bit). Vector traffic files in the following formats: AGD. SHP. IST (8 or 16-bit). As explained in "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96. JPEG 2000 (1 to 24-bit). Scanned image files in the following formats: TIF (1 to 24-bit). GRD/GRC Vertical Mapper (8 or 16-bit). and TAB. The height per class can be defined as part of the clutter class. Caution: All raster maps imported must have the same projection coordinate system.2 Supported Geographic Data Formats Atoll supports the following geographic data formats: • • • • • • DTM files in the following formats: TIF (8 or 16-bit). BMP (8-bit). and ECW (8 or 24-bit) JPEG 2000 (16-bit). DFX. IST (8-bit). JPEG 2000 (8-bit). GRC Vertical Mapper (8-bit). and TAB.. SHP. For information on defining the height per clutter class. Lines. or lines such as roads or coastlines. and TAB. Clutter Heights Clutter height maps describe the altitude of clutter over the DTM with one altitude defined per pixel. and refractivity. IST (8 or 16-bit). Other data in the following formats: TIF (16-bit). DFX. Erdas Imagine (16-bit). however. or points. road maps or satellite images. When clutter altitude is defined both in clutter classes and in a clutter height map. temperature. A clutter height map can represent height much more accurately because it allows a different height to be assigned for each pixel of the map. Atoll recognises the file format and suggests the appropriate folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Erdas Imagine (1 to 24-bit). clutter altitude is taken from the clutter height map. You can display the clutter height map in different ways: by single value. DXF. and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16-bit) Clutter class and traffic files in the following formats: TIF (8-bit). and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16-bit) Clutter height files in the following formats: TIF (8 or 16-bit). BIL (8 or 16-bit). DXF. MIF. for example. Geoclimatic maps are used in microwave link documents to calculate radio wave attenuation. Planet.Atoll User Manual Each pixel in a clutter class file contains a code (from a maximum of 256 possible classes) which corresponds to a clutter class. BMP (8-bit). BIL (1 to 24-bit). GRD/GRC Vertical Mapper (16-bit). GRC Vertical Mapper (1 to 24-bit). MIF. BIL (8 or 16-bit). MIF.

2. Note: If the Vector Import dialogue appears. 5. c. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. For information on exporting the paths of your document’s files or to import the path from another document using user configuration files. e. To import a geographic data file in a raster format: 1.3. You can share the paths of imported maps and display settings with other users by using Atoll’s user configuration files. 3. Tip: You can use the drag-and-drop feature to import geo data files into a document. the imported file is linked to the Atoll document. You can import more than one geo data file at the same time. The total percentages must equal 100. Clutter Classes: Select Clutter Classes from the Data Type list. The total percentages must equal 100. or only in the Uplink. The Open dialogue appears. For UMTS and CDMA. Under Services (%).Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data embed geo data files in the Atoll document while you are importing them or afterwards (see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102). select the Embed in Document check box. Select File > Import. Under Clutter Distribution. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte-Carlo simulations. The File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. When you import a traffic data map. enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. f. Scanned Images: Select Image or Scan from the Data Type list. Under Mobilities (%). You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic density maps because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel. enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users. choose one of the following options: DTM: Select Altitudes (DTM) from the Data Type list. Depending on the type of geo data file you are importing. only in the Downlink. providing that the geo data files are of the same type. see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102. select whether the users are active in the Uplink/Downlink. enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. Select the geo data file you want to import. see "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 97 . 3. enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. The total percentages must equal 100.64). Clutter Heights: Select Clutter Heights from the Data Type list. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file. b. 4. Under Terminals (%). For information on embedding files. d. By default. The format is automatically recognized and Atoll presents you with the appropriate dialogue. go to "Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File" on page 98. The geo data file is imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Click Import. Click OK. To embed the data file in the Atoll document. Click Open.1 Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File All raster geo data files must be represented in the same projection coordinate system as the Atoll document itself. You can select contiguous files by clicking the first file. This section explains the following: • • • • • • "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 97 "Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File" on page 98 "Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data" on page 99 "Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 101 "Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders" on page 102 "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102. the traffic map’s Properties dialogue appears: a.

and the second list lets you select whether the attribute corresponds to population density or to a number of inhabitants. Select Population from the Import to list. Note: If the File Import dialogue appears.67). pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. To import a vector-format geographic data file: 1.65: Population density (number of inhabitants/km²) Figure 3. The Open dialogue appears. You can import more than one geo data file at the same time.65 and Figure 3. Under Fields to be imported. providing that the geo data files are of the same type. Figure 3. Click Open. the first list contains the attributes of the population vector data file that you are importing. Select File > Import.64: Importing a clutter class file 3. 3. The Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. 2. Select the geo data file you want to import. go to "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 97. choose one of the following options: Vector Data: i. Select from the first list which field is to be imported and from the second list whether the imported field is a Density (number of inhabitants per square kilometre for polygons. or number of inhabitants per kilometre for lines) or a Value (number of inhabitants) (see Figure 3. their geographic system can be converted to the system used by the Atoll document. Select Geo from the Import to list.2 Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File When you import geo data files in vector format. Depending on the type of geo data file you are importing.66: Population values (number of inhabitants per item – polygon/road/point) 98 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .3. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file. Population: ii. iii.Atoll User Manual Figure 3. You can select contiguous files by clicking the first file.66).

or you can import several MSI Planet® geo data files at the same time. select from the first list which field is to be imported and select Value from the second list. This way. you import the index file containing the information necessary to import the set of files containing the geo data. Under Fields to be imported. Atoll can detect the correct coordinate system automatically. such as a DTM or clutter heights. Select Geoclimatic Parameters from the Import to list. The Open dialogue appears.67: Vector Import dialogue Notes: • • You can import ellipses and arcs from MapInfo files (MIF and TAB). select the Embed in Document check box. ii. you can import each type of geo data separately. by importing several index files. and Atoll. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 99 . The index file is in ASCII text format and contains the information necessary to identify and properly interpret each geo data file.3. 4.3.3 Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data MSI Planet® geo data are contained in a series of files described in index files. 5. By default. The geo data file is imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Select File > Import. by importing the corresponding index file. The Data Type dialogue appears (see Figure 3. You can define mappings between the coordinate system used for the MapInfo/ESRI vector files.68). see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102. Click Import. Select the index file you want to import and click Open. This section explains the following: • • "Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type" on page 99 "Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database" on page 100. the imported file is linked to the Atoll document. Figure 3. To embed the data file in the Atoll document. Rectangles are interpreted as polygons. For more information about defining the mapping between coordinate systems. defined in the corresponding MIF/PRJ files. when you import a vector file. 3. 3.1 Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type When you want to import a certain type of MSI Planet® geo data. To import one type of MSI Planet® geo data: 1.3. When you import MSI Planet® geo data. please refer to the Administrator Manual.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Geoclimatic File: i. 2. For information on embedding files.

If you want to embed the data. 4. select the Embed check box. click .68: Importing an MSI Planet® index file 3. 2. click OK. When you have selected all the types of data you want to import. 100 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The Planet Data to Be Imported dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Figure 3. The Open dialogue appears. Select the corresponding check box b. For each type of data that you want to import: a. Select File > Import. 4. The Open dialogue appears. The path and name of the file appears in the corresponding field of the Planet Data to Be Imported dialogue.69: Importing an MSI Planet® database 3. d. 3.Atoll User Manual Figure 3. Select the MSI Planet® index file and click Open. To import the MSI Planet® geo database: 1.3. To locate the MSI Planet® index file. Select "Planet® database" from the Files of Type list. The data is imported into the current Atoll document. Select the type of geo data you are importing and select the Embed check box if you want to embed the data in the current Atoll document.2 Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database You can import all available MSI Planet® geo data at the same time by importing all index files.69). c. Click OK to import the geo data into the current Atoll document.3.

you can place the least transparent image towards the bottom so that the other images imported at the same time remain visible. In the left pane of the Web Map Services Data Import dialogue.70: The Web Map Services Data Import dialogue 5. such as roads. i. you can arrange them by placing on top the image that is the most important. All images imported at the same time are imported as a single image. you must ensure that the coordinate system used in your document is the same projection system supported by the server. Click Import.. The Open dialogue appears. For information on defining these entries. navigate to the item you want to import by clicking the Expand button ( ) to open each level.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3. Note: The list of WMS servers that appears in the Server URL list are defined by entries in the atoll. The image is imported by reference into the Atoll document. 3.ini file. Or. or the image group. The Web Map Import dialogue appears. All raster geo data files must be represented in the same projection coordinate system as that used by the Atoll document itself. Select either the image you want to import. 2. Arrange the order in which you want the images to appear by selecting each image in the right pane and clicking to move it towards the top or to move it toward the bottom. a group preceded by an Expand button ( ). Figure 3. 8. 7. 10. From the Files of Type list. The following information is given about the imported WMS data: Data Types: "Image or Scan" is selected. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 101 . Select File > Import. 6.70 on page 101). the Lambert Conformal-Conic or the Universal Transverse Mercator projection) can be imported. Geographic Coordinates: The geographic coordinates are the WMS data are given. Select the URL of the WMS server from the Server URL list or enter it directly.4 Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File You can import raster images from a Web Map Service (WMS) server into your Atoll document. 4. 9. Before importing an image from a WMS server. Click for each image you want to import.e. The files you want to import appear in the right pane of the Web Map Services Data Import dialogue. it can not be embedded. Click the Connect button. Note: You can remove an image or group of images from the images to be imported by selecting it in the right pane and clicking . The Name suggested is the name of the lowest layer to be imported. The Web Map Services Data Import dialogue appears.3. Before you import them. you can modify this name. The image will be referenced in the document. see the Administrator Manual. Only WMS data mapped with a projection system (for example. To import a geographic data file from a web map service: 1. If desired. Atoll connects to the URL of the WMS server and displays the information available along with a description of the service (Figure 3. The image must be in TIF format. The images will be imported as a single object and their appearance will depend on the order you define here. 11. You can not embed a WMS image in your document. select Connection to a Web Map Services server.

Distributed calculations can not work with embedded geo data files. You can. either when you import it or later. To embed a geo data file in the current Atoll document while you are importing: • Select the Embed in Document check box on the File Import or Vector Import dialogue box. Click Embed. Atoll cannot find the file and displays the error message shown in Figure 3. To embed a geo data file that is already linked to the current Atoll document: 1. When Atoll is linked to a geo data file. From the Data Type list (on the File Import dialogue) or the Import To list (on the Vector Import dialogue). select New folder in Geo. To create a new geo data folder when importing: 1.Atoll User Manual If you had selected more than one image or an image group. however. the Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. When the geo data file is embedded in the Atoll document. and points. 3. you can import it directly into the new folder. 3. Right-click the file you want to embed in the current document. 102 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .7 Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data File By default. Select File > Import. The next time you open an Atoll document with the linked geo data file.3. Note: You can transfer geo data that has been imported from the Geo tab to the Data tab. Both linking and embedding present advantages and disadvantages. Enter a name for the folder in Folder Name box and click OK. lines. 5. or vice versa. however. the link will be broken. 6.5 Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders By default. 5. lines. you must link your geo data files. 3. 4. the display settings cannot be managed at the folder level. Click Import. Select the geo data file and click Open. Atoll creates a link to the file.3. For information. they appear directly on the Geo tab. such as clutter classes. the geo data file remains separate and modifying or saving the Atoll document has no effect on the geo data file. however. You can now import other geo data files into this folder by selecting it from the Data Type list (on the File Import dialogue) or the Import To list (on the Vector Import dialogue) when you import.71. They retain. and points into folders as well. it is saved as part of the document. group scanned images and contours. the geo data file remains separate and modifying or saving the Atoll document has no effect on the geo data file. If the file to be imported is a raster file. however. when you import a geo data file. 3. You create the folder when you import the first geo data file that will be imported into it. Important: If you are using distributed calculations. If the file to be imported is a vector file. see the Administrator Manual. either raster or vector. You can not modify this object. Select Properties from the context menu. are listed together in a single Clutter Classes folder. The New Folder dialogue appears. 2.64). Note: If you want to import your file to the Data tab. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. If you want to remove one of the images or add another one you will go through the import process again. When you import the next geo data file. For more information. Atoll creates a link to the file. 4. 3. The geo data file is now embedded in the current Atoll document. Once grouped. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue. when you import scanned images and contours.3. Click OK. see the Administrator Manual. Other data files. you can select New folder in Data. the File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. 2. If. Atoll imports the group as a single object. when you import a geo data file. the geo data file is moved. these geo data files can be displayed or hidden and moved more easily. Your file is imported into the newly created folder. The Open dialogue appears. choose to embed the geo data file in your Atoll document. their own individual display settings.6 Embedding Geographic Data By default.67). Right-click the data in the Explorer window and select Transfer to Data or Transfer to Geo. You can.

if you want to display very few little relief or towards x6 if you want to emphasise the differences in altitude. Right-click on the geo data file whose link you want to repair. 3. 3. Figure 3. click the Browse button to locate the geo data file. 3. It searches for the nearest match. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. however this height is only an average per class. Atoll automatically searches for the missing file as well. For information on clutter height maps. To manage the properties of the DTM: 1. On the General tab of the Properties dialogue.71: Missing shortcut To find the file yourself: • When the Missing Shortcut dialogue (see Figure 3. 4. or DTM folder. To repair a broken link from within the Atoll document: 1. select it and click OK. Select Properties from the context menu. or in other words to a certain type of ground use or cover. If the file corresponds to the source file: • Click Yes. 5. The link will be corrected to point to the indicated file. Each pixel of a clutter class file contains a code (from a maximum of 256 possible classes) which corresponds to a clutter class. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.72). If the geo data file is in a folder. 3.71) appears. Traffic. For information on Display tab settings. When it finds a possible match. A clutter height map can represent height much more accurately because it allows a different height to be assigned for each bin of the map. click folder. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 103 . Select Properties from the context menu. and type. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. it informs you with a message (see Figure 3. The height per class can be defined as part of the clutter class.72: Problem with shortcut You can also repair the link to the geo data file from within the Atoll document.5 Clutter Classes The clutter class geo data file describes land cover or land use. 5. such as the Clutter Classes. The Properties dialogue appears. date.4 Digital Terrain Models The Digital Terrain Model (DTM) is a geographic data file representing the elevation of the ground over sea level. click the Find button. The context menu appears. Right-click the Digital Terrain Model folder. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for the DTM. 6. based on size. 2. see "Clutter Heights" on page 106.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Figure 3. Browse to the geo data file. Move the Relief slider towards Flat. 4. to expand the 2.

4. you can enter a value for each of the following fields applicable to the current document: For all Atoll documents: Model Standard Deviation (dB): to calculate shadowing losses on the path loss. Atoll can automatically assign names to clutter classes if the clutter class file has a corresponding MNU file. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. JPEG 2000. 5. you can select the Use default values only check box on the Default Values tab to make Atoll use the values specified in this tab instead of the values defined per clutter class. Click the Description tab of the Properties dialogue.1 Assigning Names to Clutter Classes The clutter class file identifies each clutter class with a code. To make it easier to work with clutter classes. point analysis. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. contact support. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. 3. The values entered on the Default Values tab are used if no clutter map is available. When you import a clutter class file in BIL. and Monte Carlo simulations. Even if there is a clutter classes map. TD-SCDMA Note: - 7. 3.5. For more information on the MNU file format and on creating an MNU file. If desired. Select Properties from the context menu. Click the Default Values tab. you can assign a descriptive name to each clutter class name. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. For more information. TIF. Select Properties from the context menu. To assign names to clutter classes: 1. as related to a userdefined cell edge coverage probability. it is the name that appears in tool tips and reports. When a clutter class has a descriptive name. By selecting or clearing the visibility check box. This is an optional feature that must first be activated. Indoor penetration losses depend on the clutter types as well as the operating frequency. 3. 5. CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO. For information about each field. enter descriptive text for each class identified in the Code column. see the descriptions in the previous step. 104 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 3. or IMP format. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for clutter classes. see the Technical Reference Guide. 8. 2.2 Defining Clutter Class Properties The parameters are applied in relation to the location of the receiver being studied and the clutter class of the receiver location. Enter a Name and average Height (m) for each code. 4. Indoor Loss (dB): to be applied to the path loss and used in coverage predictions. The MNU file contains a list with the clutter class codes and their corresponding names. Important: If the Height field is left blank. and TD-SCDMA documents. In the Name column. Enter default values for each field. UMTS HSPA. Click the Description tab of the Properties dialogue.5. 2. you can display or hide clutter class display types individually. These parameters can be set on the Properties dialogue: To define clutter class properties: 1. You can define an additional indoor loss per frequency band used in the Frequency bands table in GSM GPRS EGPRS. In addition to the Display tab options described in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. 6.Atoll User Manual This section explains the following: • • • • • "Assigning Names to Clutter Classes" on page 104 "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104 "Adding a Clutter Class" on page 105 "Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes" on page 105 "Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class" on page 105. propagation models which use the height information of clutter classes will assume a clutter height of "0" if there is no clutter height map. each clutter class display type has a visibility check box.

Select Properties from the context menu. Fill in the remainder of the fields as described in step 5. To refresh the list of the clutter classes: 1. 3.5. displaying the surface area (Si in km²) of each clutter class (i) and its percentage (% of i) in the computation zone or focus zone. press CTRL+V to paste the values in the table. Si % of I = ------------. 2. Click OK. in the computation zone if there is no focus zone and. For information on modifying the clutter class map. if you have imported two clutter class files and then deleted one of them. To display the surface area covered by each clutter class: 1. 3. The Statistics dialogue appears.5. For example. at the bottom of the table. Click Refresh. enter an unused number from 1 to 255 in the Code 6. Atoll removes the unused clutter classes from the list. 5. see "Creating a Clutter Polygon" on page 114. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder.3 Adding a Clutter Class You can add a new clutter class to your document. of "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104. 2. Select the Description tab from the Properties dialogue. 100 Sk  k © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 105 . Click OK. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. In the blank row marked with column. 3. you can refresh the list. To copy the description table. it can happen that the list of clutter classes on the Description tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue contains unused clutter classes. On the Description tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue in the new Atoll document. 3. if one exists. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 3. 4. Tip: You can copy the description table into a new Atoll document after importing the clutter classes file. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. select the entire table by clicking the cell in the upper-left corner of the table and press CTRL+C. the list of clutter classes will still contain the clutter classes of the deleted file.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Note: Selecting white as the colour for a clutter class value or value interval will cause that clutter class value or value interval to be displayed as transparent. Click OK.5. 9. Select Statistics from the context menu. 3. Select the Description tab from the Properties dialogue. Atoll displays the total surface area covered by each clutter class in the entire document. This information is also available in prediction reports. 6.4 Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes Under certain circumstances. and step 6. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Select Properties from the context menu. 2. 7. 5. To add a new clutter class to the your document: 1. Atoll displays the surface area covered by each clutter class in the focus zone if there is one. You can now use the new clutter class when modifying the clutter class map.5 Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class You can display the total surface area covered by each clutter class in the document. if there is no focus or computation zone. even if they are not used in the remaining file. Whenever you want to ensure that the list of clutter classes is accurate and current. 4.

7. Vector Layer Table All the vector objects of a vector layer and their attributes are listed in the vector table. lines. When you import a vector file. roads. In addition. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. Atoll uses the average clutter height per clutter class as defined in the clutter classes properties (see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104). 2. Select the Display tab of the Properties dialogue. Right-click the Clutter Heights folder.2 Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer The properties of the objects on the vector layer can be managed in two ways: either from a table containing all vectors and their attributes or from the Properties dialogue. For information on using the display tab. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Clutter height files allow for a higher degree of accuracy because they allow more than one height per clutter class. To manage the display of a vector layer: 1.Atoll User Manual 3. vector objects such as contours. In an Atoll document. for display (in tool tips and in the status line). The Properties dialogue appears. The vector object data can be managed in the vector layer table. The Properties dialogue appears. Atoll can use additional information related to vectors as display parameters. right-click the vector layer folder. and points are arranged in vector layers. For information on working with data tables. The context menu appears. and points. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for clutter heights. 3. To manage the properties of clutter heights: 1. Select Properties from the context menu. Lines.7.7 Contours. the height is given as an average per clutter class. 2. The context menu appears. Click the Data or Geo tab in the Explorer window on which the vector layer is located. 4. In a clutter height file. you can import or create vector objects such as contours. 5. with. 4. In this section. lines. but polygons can be used as filters. Note: You can manage the display of an individual vector object by right-clicking the vector object in the vector layer folder and selecting Properties from the context menu. Atoll uses its clutter height information for calculations using certain propagation models (the Standard Propagation Model and WLL model). 106 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .1 Managing the Display of a Vector Layer Imported geographic vector files can have different attributes depending on their file formats. and Points In Atoll. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. the following are explained: • • • "Managing the Display of a Vector Layer" on page 106 "Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer" on page 106 "Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab" on page 107. When a clutter height file is available. If no clutter height file exists. 3. 3. The imported or created vectors are used primarily for display purposes. Right-click the vector layer. For information on Display tab settings. Atoll adds the file as a new vector layer containing all the vector objects in the file. 3. If you define clutter height as a property of clutter classes. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41. and for CW measurements and test mobile data paths. for example. The vector table appears. The clutter height of the current pointer position as given in the clutter height file or in the clutter classes is displayed in the status bar. To open the vector layer table: 1. a height is given for each point on the map. 3. Atoll can read three-dimensional vector data. Select Open Table from the context menu. Select Properties from the context menu. or computation or focus zones. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21.6 Clutter Heights Clutter height maps describe the altitude of clutter over the DTM.

Sort: Click the Sort button to sort the data contained in the vector layer. and Records menus.1 Importing Several Scanned Images You can import scanned images into the current Atoll document one at a time. You can rename the vector layer using this field. for example. Change: Click the Change button to change the coordinate system of the vector layer. see "Setting the Priority of Geo Data" on page 109. calculated as XMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width). To open the Properties dialogue of a vector layer: 1. the coordinate system used is the file’s. For information on sorting. with the information separated by a space: • • • • File name: The name of the file. major geographical features. Right-click the vector layer you want to transfer. The vector layer is transferred to the Data tab. Deleting. the coordinate system used is document’s. Source File: The complete path of the vector layer file if the file is linked to the Atoll document. For information on filtering. 3. For more information about display priority in Atoll. Select Transfer to Data tab from the context menu. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21.. In this section. For more information on editing tables in Atoll. You may wish. antennas. YMIN: The beginning Y coordinate of the file. or you can import a group of images by importing an index file listing the individual image files. To transfer a vector layer to the Data tab of the Explorer window: 1. 2. The index file is a text file with the information for each image file on a separate line. When the a vector layer is embedded. 3. such as transmitters. 5. The context menu appears. 2. are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab. You can use the Display tab to manage the vector layer display. XMIN: The beginning X coordinate of the file. and predictions. They are used to provide a precise background for other objects or for less precise maps. Embed: Click the Embed button to embed a linked vector layer file in the Atoll document. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. For information on the Table tab. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 107 . all objects on the Data tab. Select Properties from the context menu. roads. For information on the Table tab. with its path relative to the current location of the index file. otherwise the file is described as embedded. Each line contains the following information. Click the Table tab. Vector Layer Properties Dialogue The vector layer Properties dialogue has three tabs: a General tab. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. as specified when the file was imported. right-click the vector layer folder. You can transfer the vector layer back to the Geo tab by right-clicking it in the Data tab and selecting Transfer to the Geo tab from the context menu. Click the Display tab. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63. The following options are available: Name: The name of the vector layer.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data You can edit the contents of this table using the commands from the context menu or from the Edit.7. The context menu appears. - 4.8 Scanned Images Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the actual physical surroundings. 3. see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41. remain visible in the map window.8. road maps or satellite images. and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42. a Table tab.3 Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab In Atoll. Coordinate System: When a vector layer is linked. as explained in "Importing Geo Data Files" on page 96. Find: Click the Find button to redefine the path when the file’s location has changed. Click the General tab. as specified when the file was embedded. 3. see "Advanced Sorting" on page 61.They have no effect on calculations. You can use the Table tab to manage the vector layer table content. You can do this by transferring the geo data from the Geo tab to the Data tab and placing it above data such as predictions. to ensure that certain geo data. the following are explained: • • "Importing Several Scanned Images" on page 107 "Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images" on page 108. XMAX: The end X coordinate. however. 3. see "Adding. Filter: Click the Filter button to filter the data contained in the vector layer. and a Display tab. for example. Format. etc.

Transparent Colour: Select White from the list if you wish parts of the scanned image that are coloured white to be transparent.tif 984660 995380 1860900 1872280 0 nice2.8. 108 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Visibility Scale: Enter a visibility scale minimum in the between 1: text box and maximum in the and 1: text box. 3. Right-click the scanned image. or Watermark from the list. calculated as YMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width). Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window 2.64). nice1. The image files imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Geoclimatic maps are used in microwave link documents to calculate radio wave attenuation.9 Geoclimatic Maps Geoclimatic maps are vector files containing information on climatic conditions such as rain density. Figure 3. Select the index file and click Open. Click OK. they have fewer display parameters than other object types. 4. Lightness: Move the slider to lighten or darken the scanned image. 3.tif 996240 1004900 1860980 1870700 0 File name To import an index 1. The context menu appears. temperature. the scanned image is not displayed. XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX 0 3. The Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 3. The File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Select Image or Scan from the Data Type list. To define the display properties of a scanned image: 1. When the displayed or printed scale is outside this range. Shades of gray.73). 2. 4. Select Properties from the context menu.2 Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images Because imported images cannot be modified.Atoll User Manual • • YMAX: The end Y coordinate. and refractivity. Click Import. Contrast: Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Select File > Import. 5. vapour density. the following are explained: • • "Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties" on page 109 "Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics" on page 109. 0: The zero character ends the sequence. In this section. allowing objects in lower layers to be visible. Select the Display tab and set the following options: Colour: Select either Automatic.73: Scanned image Properties dialogue 3.

1 Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties To manage the properties of a geoclimatic map: 1. The layers are arranged from top to bottom in the map window as they appear on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. The order of the layers: The layer at the top of the Geo tab is on top of all other layers in the map window. not all objects in the folder are displayed. Select Properties from the context menu. If the check box. if the check box is cleared ( ). and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42. Select Statistics from the context menu. 7. see "Adding. are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab.2 Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics You can display the relative and absolute distribution of each value interval according to the defined value intervals in the display properties (for information on defining value intervals. Data on layers below is only visible where there is no data on the top layer or if you adjust the transparency of the objects on the top layer. The following tabs are available: Data Mapping: The Data Mapping tab enables you to select which value from each imported vector file is part of the geoclimatic map. • © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 109 . See "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. 3. for the computation zone if there is no focus zone and. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 6. Right-click the Geoclimatic Parameters folder. Note: Statistics are displayed only for visible data. The Table tab enables you to manage the contents of the class table. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. Select Properties from the context menu. Right-click any geoclimatic file in the Geoclimatic Parameters folder. Display: The Display tab enables you to define how the geoclimatic map appears in the map window. 2.9. with the relevant data selected in the Field column.10. Click the Table tab. You can select the parameter it corresponds to from the Parameters column. clutter class or traffic objects in their respective folders and creates a separate folder for each imported vector data file and scanned image. To display the statistics of the geoclimatic data: 1. You can use drag and drop to change the order of layers by dragging a layer on the Geo tab of the Explorer window towards the top or the bottom of the tab. 4. Atoll displays the statistics for the focus zone if there is one. the object is displayed. such as transmitters. It is important to remember that all objects on the Data tab. Thus. 2. 3.1 Setting the Display Priority of Geo Data There are several factors that influence the visibility of geo data: • The display check box: The check box immediately to the left of the object name in the Geo tab controls whether or not the object is displayed on the map. 3. For information on using the display tab. Each object is placed on a separate layer. see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22) of a geoclimatic map. If the check box is selected ( ). see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. is selected but shaded ( ). - 5. antennas. For more information. and predictions. Right-click the Geoclimatic Parameters folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Click to expand the Geoclimatic Parameters folder. 3. the object is not displayed. Atoll displays the statistics for the entire document. The imported vector files are listed in the Name column. 3.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3.10 Setting the Priority of Geo Data Atoll lists the imported DTM. Value interval is the only available display type. there are as many layers as imported objects. The Statistics window appears with the distributions of each value interval. Deleting. if there is no focus or computation zone. For information on working with the Table tab.9.

so that the object is not displayed on the map. For more information. are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab. The only cases where clearing the display check box means that the data will not be used are for population data in reports. remain visible in the map window For more information. In other words. The clutter class layer is visible in the area where there is no traffic data (outside the computation zone). RAILWAYS and AIRPORT). An object is visible only in the map window if the scale. you can ensure that certain vector geo data. and one with a lower resolution but covering the entire area.74: Displaying Geo data layers 3. Note: The visibility in the context of calculations must not be confused with the display check box ( ). RIVERLAKE. In Figure 3. These are normally the objects which cover the least area but have the highest resolution. clutter classes. and for custom geo data maps. clutter heights. Atoll can base its calculations for the downtown core on the clutter class file with the higher resolution. roads. you should place the objects with the best data at the top. and predictions. for example. For more information. Even if the display check box of an object is cleared ( ). Vector geo data. to allow objects on lower layers to be visible on the map. such as transmitters. see "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 23. see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23. both of which can be used in prediction reports follow the same rules of calculation priority. For example. Atoll takes the object on top and objects below only where there is no data in higher levels. it will still be taken into consideration for calculations. clutter classes. as displayed on the zoom toolbar.. can contain more than one data object. and traffic density folders. for example. In the map window. RIVERLAKE. vector data (including the linear vectors HIGHWAYS.) are visible both inside and outside the computation zone. etc. such as predictions. 110 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . • • The transparency of objects: You can change the transparency of some objects. Population maps and custom geo data maps. the linear objects (ROADS. you might have two clutter class files: one with a higher resolution for the downtown core. when calculating coverage in an urban area. In this way. what is used is what is seen. the data taken into account in each folder (Clutter Classes.Atoll User Manual Note: All objects on the Data tab. In this case. DTM. such as clutter classes.2 Setting the Priority of Geo Data in Calculations The priority of geo data in calculations is determined in much the same way as it is for display. MAJORSTREETS. the DTM. When you make calculations in Atoll. where the density of users is higher. These objects can represent different areas of the map or the same parts of the map with the same or different resolutions.74. etc. MAJORROADS. see "Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab" on page 107. COASTLINE. by placing the clutter class file for the downtown core over the file with the lower resolution. however. antennas. using the second file for all other calculations. the DTM layer which is beneath the clutter class layer and the scanned map which is beneath the DTM layer. major geographical features. where they can be placed over data such as predictions. DTM and scanned image have been imported and a UMTS environment traffic map has been edited inside the computation zone.) is the data from the top down. etc. is within this range. Figure 3. The visibility range of objects: You can define a visibility range for object types. Object folders. are not visible. and some object types. can be transferred to the Data tab. On the other hand.10. Therefore for each folder.

in both Case 1 and Case 2. and the data from "Clutter 1" everywhere that is covered by "Clutter 1" but not by © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 111 . Atoll uses both the clutter and DTM data in calculations. In Case 1. This area is also covered by "Clutter 1" In the case of two clutter class maps. Explorer window Case 1 DTM • • Work space DTM 2 (20m) DTM 1 (50m) Case 2 DTM • • DTM 1 (50m) DTM 2 (20m) Figure 3.2. In both Case 1 and Case 2.3 Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area In this example.2.75: Multi-layer management in calculations – two DTM maps representing different areas 3.10. In Case 1.10. Atoll uses the order of the maps in the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window to decide which data to use.2 Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area In this example. 3.76: Multi-layer management in calculations – Clutter and DTM maps representing the same area 3. "Clutter 2" is on top of "Clutter 1". Independently of the order of the two maps in the Explorer window. the file order of the DTM files in the Explorer window does not matter because they do not overlap.” A DTM map called “DTM”. "Clutter 2" represents a smaller area with a resolution of 20 m. In Case 2.1 Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas In this example. there are two imported clutter classes maps: • • "Clutter 1" represents a large area with a resolution of 50 m.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data The following sections give several examples to better illustrate how data are used in Atoll: • • • "Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas" on page 111 "Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area" on page 111 "Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area" on page 111. the clutter class map is on top of the DTM map.2.10. Explorer window Case 1 Clutter classes • Clutter DTM • DTM Case 2 DTM • DTM Clutter classes • Clutter Work space Figure 3. the DTM map is on top of the clutter class map. Atoll will therefore use the data in "Clutter 2" where it is available. Atoll will use both the clutter and DTM data in calculations. In this example. there are two imported DTM files: • • "DTM 1” represents a given area and has a resolution of 50 m. Atoll will take all the data from both "DTM 1” and "DTM 2” into account. “DTM 2” represents a different area and has a resolution of 20 m. there are two imported maps: • • A clutter class map called “Clutter.

etc.12." Explorer window Work space Case 1 Clutter classes • Clutter 2 (20m) • Clutter 1 (50m) Case 2 Clutter classes • Clutter 2 (50m) • Clutter 1 (20m) Figure 3. percentage pilot finger of each clutter class. you can save much of this information in a user configuration file.77: Multi-layer management in calculations – two clutter maps representing the same area 3. default standard deviations.11 Displaying Information About Geo Data You can display information about a geo data map by using tooltips.1 Exporting a Geo Data Set When you export a geo data set in a user configuration file. indoor loss. you export: • • • • the paths of imported geographic maps map display settings (visibility scale. the following are explained: • • "Exporting a Geo Data Set" on page 112 "Importing a Geo Data Set" on page 113. see the Administrator Manual.12 Geographic Data Sets In Atoll. working on a similar Atoll document. In this section. To display information about the geo data in a tool tip: • Hold the pointer over the geo data until the tool tip appears. and indoor loss) raster or user profile traffic map description. tips text." Therefore. For information. ) on the toolbar has been 3. name. standard deviations. 3. once you have imported geographic data and defined their parameters. height. The surface area is only given for closed polygons. When you export the geographic data set. For information on how to display information in tooltips.Atoll User Manual "Clutter 2. can import the configuration file containing the paths to the imported geographic data and many of the defined parameters. transparency.) clutter description (code. Atoll will only use the data from "Clutter 1." In Case 2. Note: You can export and import other types of information with user configuration files as well. orthogonality factor. Note: Tool tips only appear when the Display Tips button ( selected. another user. the information listed in "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112 is saved into an external file. "Clutter 1" is on top and completely covers "Clutter 2. Then. 112 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24. Important: Vectors must be in the same coordinate system as the raster maps.

The following types of geographic data can be edited: • • • • • • Clutter classes (for more information. To import a user configuration file containing a geo data set: 1. Click OK. "Editing Polygons. you can edit geo data that you have imported or you can create geo data by. browse to the folder where you want to save the file and enter a File name..12. The Open dialogue appears. select the Delete existing geo data check box. 4. select it and click Open. In the User Configuration dialogue. "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115). 4. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import. When you import a user configuration file including a geographic data set. 5. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 113 .e. the information listed in "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112 is imported into your current Atoll document. for example.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data To export a geo data set in a user configuration file: 1. or TAB format) (for more information. Browse to the user configuration file. If you already have geographic data in your current Atoll document and would like to replace it with any imported data. SHP. 6. 3. lines. You can also edit the Windows shortcut to Atoll and add "-cfg <. select the check boxes of the items you want to import.13 Editing Geographic Data In Atoll. 2. The Save As dialogue appears. "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115) Geoclimatic maps (for more information. "Editing Clutter Class Maps" on page 114) Contours. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export.2 Importing a Geo Data Set When you import a user configuration file containing a geo data set. adding a vector layer to the Population folder and then adding polygons. 5. Lines. "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115) Traffic data maps Custom data maps (for more information. Figure 3. 3. The User Configuration dialogue appears. Atoll checks if there are already geographic data in the current Atoll document.78). AGD.78: The User Configuration dialogue 3. the option Delete existing geo data appears with other options in the User Configuration dialogue. If so. In the User Configuration dialogue. If you do not want to replace existing geo data with imported data. Note: You can automatically start Atoll with a user configuration file by naming the file "atoll. and points (for more information. i. In the Save As dialogue. MIF. select the Geographic Data Set check box. and Points" on page 34) Population maps (if they are in vector format. Erdas Imagine (16-bit). 2. clear the Delete existing geo data check box. Click OK. Click OK.cfg" and placing it in the same folder as the Atoll executable.cfg_file>" where is the complete path to the user configuration file. DXF. 3. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 3.

79: Editor toolbar 4. and a Close button (see Figure 3. 7. Position the pointer over the point you want to move. 2. 114 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Figure 3. 3. Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. Position the pointer over the polygon border where you want to add a point. The pointer changes ( ). You can edit these maps by creating or modifying polygons. 2. To edit clutter polygons: 1.1.79).Atoll User Manual 3. "Deleting Clutter Polygons" on page 115 3. The pointer changes to a pencil ( ). In this section. Select Edit from the context menu. 3. 8. The pointer changes ( ). The context menu appears. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. ii. The context menu appears. The pointer changes ( ).1.79). Drag the point to its new position. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. You can now edit the clutter polygon by: Moving a point: i. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Select Edit from the context menu. To create a polygon: 1. The Editor toolbar appears with a clutter or traffic list. Adding a point: i. a polygon deletion tool . Double-click to close the polygon.13. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3. 5. All modifications you make to clutter class maps are taken into account by propagation model calculations. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.13. select the clutter class for the polygon you want to create.2 Editing Clutter Polygons You can edit clutter polygons by moving existing points of the polygon or by adding or deleting points. Click the polygon drawing button ( ). ii. A point is added to the border at the position of the pointer. 4. You can later edit and export the polygons you have created.1 Creating a Clutter Polygon In Atoll. From the list. 6. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. Note: You can copy the exact coordinates of a closed polygon by right-clicking it on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu. Select the polygon. the following are explained: • • • • "Creating a Clutter Polygon" on page 114 "Editing Clutter Polygons" on page 114 "Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons" on page 115. you can modify imported clutter class maps or create your own maps by adding data in the form of polygons. The point is deleted. a polygon drawing tool . Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon. ii. 3.1 Editing Clutter Class Maps Clutter class maps and certain traffic maps are raster maps. Note: Clutter classes are defined on the Descriptions tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue. Deleting a point: i.13. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder.

The Properties dialogue appears with the coordinates of the points defining the polygon and the total area. 3.13. The context menu appears. Release the mouse to create the rectangle defined by the two corners. b. Enter a value: Geoclimatic Parameters: Enter a value in the Rain Intensity field to indicate the intensity of rainfall for the polygon. For Atoll to consider the new vector layer as part of the data map. ) or the New Rectangle ( ) button on the Vector Edition toolbar. 8.4 Deleting Clutter Polygons You can delete clutter polygons. it might be difficult to know which Vectors folder you are selecting. lines. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. A new data object called "Vectors" is created in the selected geo data object folder.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3. see "Renaming an Object" on page 17. 5.79). Right-click the new vector layer. 3. Note: You can select and copy the coordinates displayed in the Properties dialogue of the polygon. Click the polygon deletion tool ( ). click the New Rectangle button ( ) on the Vector Edition toolbar: a.1. folder. 10. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle. folder.13. 3. Double-click to close the contour. To draw a polygon. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. The context menu appears. Select Edit from the context menu. c.1. Right-click the geo data object. 4. You can modify and create these geo data maps by adding a vector layer and then adding vector objects (contours. c. 2. Because Atoll names all new vector layers "Vectors" by default. To draw a rectangle.79). 9. Right-click the the Geoclimatic Parameters. to which you want to add a vector layer. you can ensure that you select the correct folder. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Click the polygon you want to delete. the Geoclimatic Parameters. ) on the Vector Edition toolbar: 6. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 115 . for example. Select Add Vector Layer from the context menu. Select Edit from the context menu. The polygon is deleted. Right-click the new polygon or rectangle and select Properties from the context menu. 2. Select Edit from the context menu.3 Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons To display the coordinates of the points defining the polygon area: 1. 4. 4. The pointer changes ( ). 3. To create a vector layer and vector objects on a geo data map: 1. The context menu appears. are made up of individual vector objects. you must map the vector layer. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated.13.2 Editing Geoclimatic Maps Some geographic data maps. The context menu appears. Press ESC to deselect the New Polygon ( 11. and points) to this layer. By renaming each vectors folder. For information on renaming objects. geoclimatic maps. b. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 5. 3. 2. Right-click the polygon and select Properties from the context menu. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour. click the New Polygon button ( a. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle. 7. To delete a clutter polygon: 1.

Atoll automatically creates the corresponding HDR file containing the georeference information.14. You can also choose to export the entire clutter class geo data. To export clutter class modifications in a raster-format file: 1. Click Save. This section explains the following: • • • • • "Saving Modifications to an External File" on page 116 "Updating the Source File" on page 117 "Combining Several Files into One File" on page 118 "Exporting an Embedded File" on page 118 "Creating a New File from a Larger File" on page 119 3.1. TXT: The ArcView text format is intended only for export. The Save As dialogue appears. 3. enter a name for the file. Saving a geographic file separately from saving the Atoll document enables you to: • • • • • Save modifications you have made to an external file: If you have made modifications to geo data. Select Save As from the context menu. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. the part containing the computation zone.14 Saving Geographic Data Atoll allows you to save your geographic data files separately from saving the Atoll document. no corresponding geo-reference file is created. either in the same format as used in the current Atoll document. In the Save As dialogue. 2. no corresponding geo-reference file is created. The Properties dialogue appears. you can save your modifications to an external file. Atoll automatically creates the corresponding TFW file containing the georeference information. 13. 3. 116 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . You can select from one of the following file formats: BMP: When you select bitmap format.1 Saving Modifications to an External File In Atoll.1 Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File You can export clutter class modifications in a raster-format file. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Select Properties from the context menu. see "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96). Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb. you can save these changes to the source file.14. Atoll supports a variety of both raster and vector file formats (for more information. Export an embedded file to be used in another Atoll document or in another application: You can save a file to an external file. you can save them as one file. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats. 3. Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb. or just your modifications to the geo data. You can edit the vector objects as explained in "Editing Polygons. This section explains the following: • • "Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File" on page 116 "Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File" on page 117. "Rain" is selected by default. JPEG 2000: When you select the JPEG 2000 format. Combine several files into one file: If you have several smaller files in one folder of the Geo tab. exporting either the entire geo data or just your modifications allows you to save those modifications to an external file. BIL: When you select the BIL format. When exporting in BIL format. and Points" on page 34. Create a new file from part of a larger one: You can select part of certain geo data types and then save the selected part as a new file. For the following geo data: Geoclimatic Parameters: In the Field column. When you have made modifications to a raster-format geo data file. Lines. 5. Update the source file with modifications you have made: If you have made modifications to a geo data type in Atoll. you can export them to a new external file.80). in the same format or in another one. Click the Data Mapping tab. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. TIF: When you select tagged image file format. GRC or GRD: Files with the extension GRC or GRD are Vertical Mapper files. Atoll automatically creates the corresponding BPW file containing the georeference information. browse to the folder where you want to save the file. and select the file format from the Save as type list. or in a different raster format.Atoll User Manual 12. 4.

MIF and TAB: MapInfo formats. including any modifications you have made to the geo data.80: Export dialogue 6. Click Save in the Save As dialogue. and select the file format from the Save as type list. no other clutter class geo data file. Along with vector layers you have added to the Geo tab. If the geo data file is embedded in the Atoll document. The exported geo data file will replace the geo data file in the current Atoll document. 5. Under Region. If there is no initial clutter class object. The context menu appears. The vector layer is saved in the format and with the name you specified and the exported file replaces the vector layer in the current document as a linked file. 8.1. Click OK. displaying the current coordinate system and allowing you to change the coordinate system by clicking Change. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the Clutter Classes geo data folder. 3. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the selected geo data folder. If the Atoll document in which you created the clutter class file has no DTM. the resolution will equal the highest resolution of the DTM maps. or traffic objects. Atoll can read AGD files faster than the other supported vector formats. In the Save As dialogue. browse to the folder where you want to save the file. If you have a vector layer with vector lines or points. enter a name for the file.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Figure 3.14. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the clutter class geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone. 3. 3. SHP: The ArcView vector format should be used for vector layers containing only polygons. To export a vector layer: 1. whether or not the computation zone is visible. Define a Resolution in Metres. A vector layer can contain contours. Select Save As from the context menu. lines. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. it cannot save vectors made of lines or points. The Vector Export dialogue appears.2 Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File You can export an edited vector layer as a vector format file. You can select from one of the following file formats: AGD: The Atoll Geographic Data format is an Atoll-specific format. the suggested resolution is 100 m. select one of the following: The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the entire clutter class geo data file. right-click the vector layer folder. 2. You can embed the file afterwards (see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102). - - 7. the suggested resolution is the resolution of the modified object. you may make changes to geo data. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 117 . the following maps can be exported as vector format files: • • • Vector-format population maps Vector-format geoclimatic maps Vector-format custom maps.14.2 Updating the Source File While working on an Atoll document. the suggested resolution is the highest resolution of the modified objects. The Save As dialogue appears. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. Atoll saves the changes automatically when you save the document. and points. - 4. If several objects have been modified. The selected data is saved in an external file. Only Pending Changes: This option allows you to export a rectangle containing any modifications you have made to the clutter classes. If the geo data file is linked. the exported file replaces the vector layer as a linked file. use either the AGD. the MIF or the TAB format. Atoll prompts you to save the changes when you close the document. Once you save a vector layer. As a format created for Atoll. Click Export. The suggested resolution value is defined by the following criteria: If one object has been modified.

4 Exporting an Embedded File You can export an embedded geo data file to be used in a different Atoll document. the combined file will show the file on the top. The Save As dialogue appears.14. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 3.14. If the geo data file is a vector file. 3. 6. The files will be combined according to their order from the top down in the folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window.81). for example. Right-click the folder of the geo data files you want to combine into one file. the Vector Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. The linked file is updated. 3. You can combine these separate files to create one single file. 5. Therefore. Right-click the folder containing geo data file whose source file you want to update. Click OK. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. select The Entire Project Area. 2. ensure that you want to replace the current file before proceeding to the following step. including any modifications you have made to the geo data. 2. Caution: You will not be warned that you are replacing the current file. you can save your changes to an external file ("Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File" on page 117). or in a different application. after importing an MSI Planet® index file. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. Select Save As from the context menu. 5. 8.3 Combining Several Files into One File In certain circumstances. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 3. 118 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll replaces the embedded file in the current Atoll document with the newly exported file. Define a Resolution in Metres. 3. The context menu appears. If the files overlap on the map. Under Region. Select Save from the context menu. 2.81).Atoll User Manual To update the source file of a linked geo data file: 1. 4. you may have several geo data files of the same type. To export an embedded geo data file: 1. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. The selected data is saved as a new file. The suggested resolution value is the highest resolution of all objects. The context menu appears. 7. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the folder of the embedded geo data file you want to export. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. When you export an embedded file. Click OK. The Save As dialogue appears. The context menu appears. If you do not want to replace the current file. 4. Select Save As from the context menu. You can create a one file from a section of the following geo data types: • • • • Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps To combine individual files into a new file: 1. This option allows you to save the entire area covered by the geo data files. Click OK.

The geo data file is exported with the selected coordinate system. b. the Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. click Change.14. You can create a new file from a section of the following geo data types: • • • • • • Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps Population Geoclimatic maps To create a new file from a section of a larger file: 1. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. 3. Only Pending Changes: This option allows you to export a rectangle containing any modifications you have made to the geo data.82). 2. Select Save As from the context menu. 3. c. The selected data is saved in an external file.81: The Vector Export dialogue a. including any modifications you have made to the geo data.5 Creating a New File from a Larger File You can create a new file from a section of a larger file. To change the coordinate system used for the exported file. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 119 . If the geo data file is a raster file. You can use this new file in the same Atoll document. The Vector Export dialogue displays the coordinate system of the file. select one of the following: The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the entire raster-format geo data file.82: Export dialogue a. - b. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 5.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Figure 3. The Save As dialogue appears. Define a Resolution in Metres. The Coordinate Systems dialogue appears. Click OK. Click OK. whether or not the computation zone is visible. The exported file will replace the embedded file in the Geo data tab. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. Figure 3. or in a new Atoll document. 4. Under Region. The context menu appears. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone. Right-click the folder of the embedded geo data file you want to export. Click Export. you must first define the area by creating a computation zone. For information on the Coordinate Systems dialogue. The exported file will be added as an object in the geo data folder.81). see "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 82. The exported file will be added as an object in the geo data folder. To create a new file. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list.

Atoll User Manual 6. This option allows you to export the geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone. select The Computation Zone. The selected data is saved as a new file. 120 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Define a Resolution in Metres. 8. 7. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the selected geo data folder. whether or not the computation zone is visible. Click OK. Under Region. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1.

Chapter 4 Antennas and Equipment .

.

1 Defining the List of Manufacturers In Atoll.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 4 Antennas and Equipment In Atoll. you can copy the horizontal and vertical antenna patterns from a spreadsheet or word processor. To create an entry in the Manufacturers table. horizontal pattern. Each of these patterns can have both co-polar and cross-polar patterns defined. Right-click the Links folder. 5. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.e. 4. enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ): Name: The name of the manufacturer. In this section the following are described: • • • • "Creating an Antenna" on page 123 "Importing Microwave Antennas" on page 125 "Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns" on page 125 "Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns" on page 126. You can enter information in the following fields: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 123 .. the manufacturers of microwave radio equipment. The MW Antennas New Element Properties dialogue appears. 4. horizontal and vertical plane diagrams for horizontal and vertical polarization. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. This chapter explains working with antennas as well as equipment such as waveguides and cables: • • • • • "Defining the List of Manufacturers" on page 123 "Defining Antennas" on page 123 "Microwave Equipment" on page 127 "Microwave Waveguides and Cables" on page 137 "Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility" on page 138. 5. waveguides. Select Antennas > New from the context menu.1 Creating an Antenna The microwave antenna is used to radiate or receive electromagnetic energy in the form of high-frequency radio waves. To modify an entry in the Manufacturers table. horizontal and vertical antenna patterns. To create or modify an entry in the Manufacturers table: 1. Right-click the Links folder. the equipment used to create a network is modelled.2. vertical pattern. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 6. manufacturer. Atoll enables you to create new antennas and set the parameters of each (i. As well. The context menu appears. and antennas are listed in the Manufacturers table. The operating frequency band and manufacturer-related information are used as filtering criteria when defining compatible antenna/equipment sets. Atoll models microwave antennas and provides default microwave antennas. 4.2 Defining Antennas In Atoll. modify any of the entries in the corresponding row. each microwave antenna is identified by a name. 2. 1. 3. 3. along with the characteristics which have a bearing on network performance. Select Manufacturers > Open table from the context menu. 4. Four different antenna pattern diagrams are used in microwave antennas. 2. Tip: To create an antenna: When you create a new antenna. Comments: Any comments. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Because an antenna can be horizontally and vertically polarized.e. i. and defined by the operating frequency band. Click the General tab. Atoll uses the relevant antenna pattern diagrams when determining propagation. manufacturer name. gain. The context menu appears. and antenna diameter. 4. gain.. and diameter). The Manufacturers table appears. name.

. You can modify the name Atoll enters if you wish.Atoll User Manual Name: Atoll automatically enters a default name for each new antenna. Comments: Any additional information on the antenna. If some values are missing in the data sheet. Horizontal: The ratio of power received in the cross-polar section to the power received in the co-polar section. When performing a calculation along an angle for which no data is available. Click the upper-left cell of the horizontal pattern. displays the cross polar discriminations for horizontal and vertical polarisations. Atoll calculates a linear interpolation from existing pattern values. e.Horizontal plane: - - Vertical polarisation . 124 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Cross-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the horizontal plane. Select the columns containing the angles and attenuation values of the horizontal pattern. Click Apply to display the pattern. Atoll will interpolate the values in order to obtain a complete and realistic pattern. Manufacturer: The name of the antenna manufacturer. Figure 4.Vertical: The ratio of power received in the cross-polar section to the power received in the co-polar section. Switch to Atoll. Copy the selected data. Cross-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the vertical plane. Atoll removes blank rows in the pattern table when you press the Apply button.Vertical plane: - - Vertical polarisation . Co-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the horizontal plane. for the horizontal polarisation. Click OK. Gain: The antenna’s isotropic gain. Define the co-polar and cross-polar sections for each plane of the antenna. Cross-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the vertical plane. for the vertical polarisation. Cross-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the horizontal plane. On each of the four tabs of the antenna properties dialogue. Diameter: The diameter of the antenna. Frequency Band: The frequency band that this antenna will be used with. f.Vertical plane: - a.Horizontal plane: Co-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the horizontal plane. A microwave antenna is defined by 8 radiation patterns. Co-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the vertical plane. Switch to the document containing the horizontal pattern. 7. c. you can define the co-polar and cross-polar sections for each plane of the antenna: Horizontal polarisation .83: Copying horizontal pattern values d. Horizontal polarisation . Co-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the vertical plane. When you paste the data into the MW Antennas New Element Properties dialogue. - - 6. Paste the data in the table. Atoll calculates a linear interpolation from the existing pattern values. Under Cross Polar Discrimination (XPD). g. b. When you calculate along an angle for which no data is available. Atoll interpolates the values in order to obtain a complete and realistic pattern around the antenna. If there are some blank rows in the data sheet.

99. Right-click the Links folder. Edit the antenna pattern by entering new values in the table. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 125 .0501.html. Atoll continues until all files are imported and then displays how many files have been successfully and unsuccessfully imported in the Events viewer. 2.gov/oet/info/software/nsma/nsma-intrp. The file or folders are imported.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 4.2. 6. For further information about the standard NSMA format (recommendation WG16. Click the Browse button ( 7. In the Data Import dialogue. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. The antenna diameter is calculated using the following equation for a radiation efficiency of 55 %: Gain  dBi  = 20  Log  Diametre  m   + 20   Frequency  MHz   – 42.89.2. Right-click the antenna in the Antennas table whose horizontal or vertical pattern you want to edit. see "Creating an Antenna" on page 123).Minimum Frequency)/2.11 – Log  Max Frequency – Min Frequency  ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------  2 20 Diametre  m  = 10 For more information on antenna file formats. The context menu appears. see the following web site: http://www. Select Record Properties from the context menu.3 Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns In Atoll. Right-click the Links folder. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. ) to navigate to the file or the folder to be imported. The MW Antennas table appears.2 Importing Microwave Antennas Atoll enables you to import antenna files in the Planet microwave antenna format or in standard NSMA (National Spectrum Managers Association) formats defined by recommendations WG16. 5. 4. You can define the display by right-clicking the pattern window and choosing the either Linear display or Logarithmic display from the context menu.fcc.050). which gives:  Gain  dBi  + 2. Note: You can display antenna patterns with either linear or logarithmic axes. choose one of the following options: One file only: Choose this option if you only want to import one file. 4. Select the tab of the pattern you want to edit (for information on the tabs of the antenna’s Properties dialogue. 4. Editing a Single Radiation Pattern You can edit the horizontal or vertical patterns of an antenna. Entire folder: Choose this option if you want to import all the files in a folder. Click Import. Atoll automatically calculates the antenna diameter from the antenna gain and average operating frequency. The average operating frequency is calculated as (Maximum Frequency .99. 3. 8. The antenna’s Properties dialogue appears. Atoll does not stop the import process if an error occurs.2 . Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. Select Antennas > Import from the context menu. The Data Import dialogue appears. 6. 5. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. To import antenna files: 1. 3. The context menu appears. 1. Select the file or folder to be imported and click Open. To edit the horizontal or vertical patterns of an antenna: 1. The context menu appears. you can modify antenna patterns by editing them individually or you can copy the antenna patterns of one antenna and replace the antenna patterns of another antenna: • • "Editing a Single Radiation Pattern" on page 125 "Copying an Antenna Pattern to One or More Antennas" on page 126.003 and WG16. 8. see the Technical Reference Guide. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 7.

84). By resizing row height and column width. 4. By copying and pasting patterns in the MW Antennas table you can assign the antenna patterns of one antenna to another. 6. Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. Notes: • You can also copy an antenna pattern by right-clicking the pattern on the tab of the antenna’s Properties dialogue and selecting Copy from the context menu. Atoll replaces the old pattern with the new one in the MW Antennas table.84: MW Antennas table 5. In the row of the antenna you want to copy the pattern to.4 Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns To print the pattern of a microwave antenna: 1. 2. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Linear or Logarithmic from the context menu. you can view all antenna patterns in order to be able to compare them (see Figure 4. The context menu appears. .horizontal plane V Polar. 6. 126 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 5.vertical plane 8. Figure 4. . Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. select the cell with the pattern. Right-click the Links folder. • Patterns are displayed in the MW Antennas table with either linear or logarithmic axes as defined in the Properties dialogue of an individual antenna. 3.2. To open the MW Antennas table: 1. Select Edit > Copy to copy the cell. You can define the display by right-clicking the pattern of an antenna and choosing either Linear display or Logarithmic display from the context menu. 8. select the cell with the pattern. 3.H Plane: Vertical polarization . Select Record Properties from the context menu.Atoll User Manual Copying an Antenna Pattern to One or More Antennas Atoll enables you to copy antenna patterns in the MW Antennas table. .V Plane: Vertical polarization . The context menu appears. 2. Right-click the antenna whose pattern you want to print. 7. 4.H Plane: Horizontal polarization . The MW Antennas table appears. Right-click the Links folder. . The MW Antennas table appears.V Plane: Horizontal polarization . Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. The Properties dialogue appears.vertical plane V Polar. 4. Select Edit > Paste to paste the antenna pattern. In the row of the antenna with the pattern you want to copy.horizontal plane H Polar. 7. Select the tab with the antenna pattern you want to print: H Polar.

horn. or array) to achieve its specific objectives.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 9. lens. is composed of three main sub-systems: • • • Indoor unit (IDU) Outdoor unit (ODU) Antenna Figure 4. The microwave radio system. flat or planar. typically between 35 and 50 dB. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 127 . • • Gain: The gain is the amount of power radiated in a given direction using only the RF power at the input terminals of the antenna. It consists of the following components: • • The radio modem that converts the digital signal into a form suitable for modulation on the radio carrier signal The power supply for the Outdoor Unit (ODU) Outdoor Unit (ODU) The ODU converts the modulated signal from its low frequency form to a high frequency radio signal in the appropriate radio band and channel for radio transmission. yagi.85: Radio system components Indoor Unit (IDU) The IDU is the termination point of the end-user equipment that generates the data to be carried by the microwave link. 4. The antenna can be in one of many different shapes (for example. as well as the equipment that constitute it. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Print from the context menu. Using polarisation enables the same radio frequency to be used by different radio systems in physical proximity to one another. Antenna The antenna is the part of the microwave link that transmits electromagnetic energy from transmission lines into the air and receives transmitted electromagnetic energy from the air to be then sent on transmission lines. In general. Front-to-Back Ratio (FBR): The FBR is the ratio of the power radiated in the desired direction to the power radiated in the opposite direction. Radiation pattern: The radiation pattern is a diagram showing the direction of the radiated power. the higher the gain of the antenna.3 Microwave Equipment Microwave radio equipment are the elements used to convert the initial data to microwave frequency signals that can then be transmitted over a given microwave link and to the elements used to convert microwave frequency signals received to data. The portion of the pattern where the maximum gain occurs is often referred to as the main lobe of the pattern Polarisation: Polarisation is the ability to transmit only one of the two electromagnetic vector components of the wave (either the horizontal component or the vertical component). The main characteristics of the microwave antenna are the following: • Directivity: In practical terms. directivity is defined as: • • The ability to send the transmitted power in only the desired direction The ability to reject undesired signals coming from other directions. parabolic. the higher the FBR.

Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. XPD is a design parameter that is maximized in the main lobe of the antenna pattern. It is used to reduce the scattering of interference from the undesired polarisation into the desired polarisation due to rain fading by increasing the cross-polarisation discrimination factor (XPD). 4. The Max ATPC is used by the transmitter to adjust power by increasing or reducing it in order to maintain signal quality in case of multipath or rain fading that temporarily attenuates the received signal. XPIF is generally within the range of 15-20 dB. 128 QAM modulation is modelled as shown below: 4 PSK (QPSK) modulation is modelled as shown below: - Enter the maximum power (Max Power) and the Noise Figure. 2. the standby channel frequency must be the same as one of the active channels.Atoll User Manual Vertical polarisation Horizontal polarisation Figure 4. you must select the Hot Standby Available check box. to describe the system configuration in terms of channels and to define supported bit rates using trunk types with defined digital hierarchy. modulation and demodulation of signals to be transmitted and signals received at the antenna. The maximum improvement factor reserved for cross-polarisation reduction (XPIF) is used only when an XPIC (cross-polarized interference canceller) is present. the IDU and ODU are combined and modelled as microwave equipment. For more information on antennas. The defining parameters of each piece of microwave equipment are stored in the MW Equipment table. Max ATPC also enables the transmitter to respond to increased interference levels resulting from ATPC on other links. Switching to the standby channel in case of failure can be automatic and is then referred to a "hot" standby system. see "Defining Antennas" on page 123. Enter the Number of States and select the modulation from the Modulation list. Enter the power range reserved for Adaptive Transmission Power Control (Max ATPC) and the maximum improvement factor reserved for cross-polarisation reduction (XPIF). Select Equipment > New from the context menu. The system configuration is defined in the form of "n + m" where "n" is the number of active channels and "m" is the number of standby channels. On the General tab of Properties dialogue. Microwave transceiver equipment is used to manage output power. If the system must be manually switched to the standby channel. set the following parameters: Enter the Model or descriptive name of the equipment. 3. For cold standby systems. Enter the Frequency Band that this equipment will use. If a hot standby system is available. the 128 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Standby channels are inactive and used only when active channels fail. The MW Equipment New Element Properties dialogue appears.e.3. The Max ATPC can be optionally taken into consideration during calculations. For a hot standby system. The context menu appears. the system is called a "cold" standby system. 4.1 Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll In Atoll. In this section. To create a piece of microwave equipment: 1.86: Polarisation • Cross Polarisation Discrimination (XPD): The XPD is the ratio of power received in the desired polarisation to the power received in undesired polarisation. the following are explained: • • • "Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll" on page 128 "Importing Microwave Equipment" on page 132 "Advanced Configuration" on page 132. You can create a new piece of microwave equipment using the MW Equipment table. power control. and then define its parameters using its Properties dialogue. - Specify the System Configuration (i.. 5. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. the equipment protection configuration). Right-click the Links folder.

pp. and define the frequency shift (Width) and Depth for both minimum and non-minimum phases.D. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 129 . 1 + 1 redundancy mode with monitored hot standby (Hot Standby Available) is modelled as shown below: In this system configuration. select Rummler model. On the Hierarchy and Rate tab of Properties dialogue. 6. pp.4 5. both the main and standby equipment are on. For more information. Note: The radio signature parameters are not used by all types of receiver equipment. 1073-1100. Modulation 64-QAM 16-QAM 8-PSK 4-PSK Kn 15. the number of trunks) and the trunk type from the list. Rummler. Lundgren and W. produce acceptable errors rates) in the presence of frequency-selective fading. C.. which will serve as a back-up in case the main equipment fails. This method will characterise the ability of a receiving equipment to perform successfully (i. "Characterizing the effects of multipath dispersion on digital radios. Frequencies allocated to active and standby channels are defined in the microwave link properties dialogue. May-June 1979.e. set the following parameters: Under Digital Hierarchy. choose the method to be used to predict outage times (dispersive fade margin) due to multipath fading. only the main equipment is active and on. W. select the digital hierarchy type (SDH/SONET or PDH). select Normalised and enter a value for the Kn Parameter. 2.e.530 recommendation. "Digital radio outage due to selective fading. This information is available from the manufacturer. Figure 4. see studies by C." IEEE Globecom Proceedings. prediction from laboratory simulations. is not turned on. The Kn parameter is mostly dependant on the modulation used. Rummler2 and the ITU P.W." Bell System Technical Journal. 1727-1732. Lundgren and W.D.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment standby channel frequency can be different from active channels. 1 + 1 redundancy mode is modelled as shown below: In this system configuration.observation vs.W.87: Defining the method to be used to predict outage times Normalised: For a normalised signature. The other equipment. Rummler. Under Radio Signature. 1988. but only the main equipment is active. select the Capacity (i.5 7 1 Kn values (without adaptive equalization) Rummler Model: If you want to use the Rummler model to predict outage times.D. - Under Rate.. The standby equipment will be automatically put into service immediately if the main equipment fails.

You can enter the channel bandwidth defined by the manufacturer in the From manufacturer text box. you can define how the MXPD is calculated: Calculated C/I min. set the Port it is attached to. On the Losses tab of Properties dialogue. 8.. 9. set the following parameters: Enter the Mean Time Before Failure (MTBF). set the following parameters: Enter the losses due to the use of filters on transmission (Transmission Filter) and reception (Reception Filter): - For each circulator present on this piece of equipment. define the Overflow Threshold.. The Hot Standby Commutation Delay is the maximum amount of time it would take to switch to backup equipment if the main equipment fails. Under Signal Enhancements Margin Calculation (E). It is used to calculate the margin against enhancements. define the (BER-Sensitivity) pairs. Atoll will calculates the required quality based on the user-defined interference margin. On the Sensitivity tab of Properties dialogue. The MTBF is available from the equipment manufacturer. and define an interference margin in the For a Margin Against Interference Of text box. - - - User-defined C/I min. and define the losses on Transmission and Reception. select User-defined C/I min. The overflow threshold is the maximum receiver sensitivity before saturation. as well as the quality required for a BER of 10-3 and 10-6 in the For a BER of 1e-3 and the For a BER of 1e-3 text boxes. On the Outages tab of Properties dialogue. 7.: If you want to define a minimum C⁄I. select Calculated C/I min. Under Cross-polar Discrimination Reduction Calculation (MXPD). The Hot Standby - 130 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . and define an interference margin in the For a Margin Against Interference Of text box. Enter the receiver signal level (threshold) at which the radio runs continuous errors at a specified rate (BER). The MTBF is used to define the reliability of the equipment and corresponds to the average length of time that the equipment functions without failing. This will be used to calculate the thermal fade margin.Atoll User Manual The rate is calculated by the capacity per trunk multiplied by the number of trunks: The minimal and standardised channel bandwidth resulting from the parameters defined on the Hierarchy and Rate tab is displayed under Channel Bandwidth. set the following parameters: Under Calculation of the Thermal Fade Margin (TFM).: If you want to use a calculated minimum C⁄I. Enter the Hot Standby Commutation Delay.

This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer. On the Transmitter Mask tab of Properties dialogue. The context menu appears. The resulting transmitter mask is displayed in the graph window on the right. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The resulting receiver mask is displayed in the graph window on the right. Right-click the Links folder. 6. On the T⁄I Graph tab of Properties dialogue. This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). Furthermore. This is done instead of calculating C/I values and comparing them to the published objectives. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 131 . 10. You can edit the properties of microwave transceiver equipment through the properties dialogues. define a receiver mask either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button. The context menu appears. 2. The T/I graph defines the graph of maximum interfering power levels for different frequency separations between the transmitter and victim receivers. 5. For more information on defining link properties. or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att. to let Atoll create the mask from standard values. 4. when you define the properties for a link. or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att. to let Atoll create the mask from standard values. define a threshold-to-interference (T⁄I) graph either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button. 7. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 12. On the Receiver Mask tab of Properties dialogue. 13. you must indicate which channel will be used as a backup in case of main equipment failure. 11. The microwave transceiver equipment’s Properties dialogue appears. see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). Right-click the record whose properties you want to edit. 3. It is provided by the manufacturer. or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att. This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer. Click OK to create the new piece of equipment. Edit the properties as previously explained in this section. The Equipment table appears. The threshold-to-interference (T/I) ratio is used to calculate the interference fade margin (IFM) which defines the vulnerability to co-channel and adjacent channel interference. the received power level in dB is compared to the maximum power level to determine whether the interference is acceptable.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment Commutation Delay is used only if Hot Standby Available is selected on the General tab of this Properties dialogue. For each interfering transmitter. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. The resulting T⁄I graph is displayed in the graph window on the right.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). define the transmitter spectral mask either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button. Select Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. To edit the properties of microwave transceiver equipment: 1. to let Atoll create the graph from standard values.

For example. the average frequency of all slave clocks in the system is the same.2 Importing Microwave Equipment Atoll enables you to import equipment files that are in standard NSMA (National Spectrum Managers Association) format defined by the recommendation WG 21. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. In Atoll. Select the file or folder to be imported and click Open. 4. see the Technical Reference Guide. 3.3.1 Digital Hierarchies Atoll models PDH as well as SDH digital hierarchies. Creating a Microwave Trunk Type Atoll has a set of default trunk type definitions available. It continues until all the files have been imported and then displays in the Events viewer how many files have been successfully and unsuccessfully imported. The synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) refers to the group or layers of transmission rates or standards that can transport digital data of different capacities through high bandwidth mediums such as optical fibres or radio waves. For more information on the theoretical graphs.3.051 or in Pathloss format (version 4. Click the Browse button ( 7. but you can create new trunk types and set their parameters.3 Advanced Configuration Atoll offers several advanced configuration options: • • • "Digital Hierarchies" on page 132 "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 133 "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. Each equipment file can contain several T/I graphs for different pairs of modulations. Entire folder: Choose this option if you want to import all the files in a folder. the rising and falling edges of the pulses in each data streams do not coincide. The following section describes creating and modifying trunk types to model digital hierarchies. in other words. 4. The context menu appears. In the Data Import dialogue. 4. you can copy it from the spreadsheet or word processor and paste the data into the Trunk Type table.Atoll User Manual 4. NSMA-format equipment files are ASCII files with the extension NSM. The European (SDH) and American (SONET) versions of SDH systems differ slightly. 5. if you have the data available in tabular format. Select Equipment > Import Manufacturer Data from the context menu. the T/I graph defined for identical modulations is imported into the T/I Graph tab while the others are imported into the theoretical graphs table. The plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) is a technology used to transport large quantities of data over digital transport equipment such as fibre optic and microwave radio. However. Pathloss-format equipment files are ASCII files with the extension RAF. For further information about the NSMA and Pathloss file formats. Click Import. Right-click the Links folder. choose one of the following options: One file only: Choose this option if you only want to import one file. Note: If you are creating a large number of different trunk types from manufacturers data. a microwave link that has a capacity of 2 with an assigned trunk type of E1 will be capable of transferring data at twice the E1 standard bit rate.3. A microwave link inherits the capacity of the trunk type through its assigned equipment. The European and American versions of PDH systems differ slightly in their data rates. but the basic principles of multiplexing are the same. To import equipment files: 1.0). Due to the synchronous nature of the SDH. The file or folders are imported.99. 132 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . In this case. Each defined trunk type defines a supported bit rate and is a parameter of microwave equipment. see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136. PDH networks have data streams with the same nominal frequency but are not synchronised with each other. it can take a long time. 8.3. The Data Import dialogue appears. ) to navigate to the file or the folder to be imported. 6. The frame formats and thus the data rates of both systems are not the same but are compatible due to their synchronous nature. digital hierarchies are modelled as trunk types. Notes: Atoll does not stop the import process when an error occurs.

88). BERses: BERses corresponds to Bit Error Rate (BER) as documented in Annex 2. For each trunk type you define. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. SDH/SONET: If the check box is selected ( ).. the interference reduction factor (IRF) is a method of reducing interference on the received signal. 4. The IRF is a function of the difference between the central frequencies of the interfered signal and the interfering signal. You can define a protection level for each victim–interferer microwave transceiver equipment pair by defining the protection levels (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz).88: Trunk Types table 5. Figure 4. Table 2) of the ITU-R P.3. add the following data: Trunk Type: The name of the trunk type that will model the digital hierarchy.e. Binary Rate Supported (Mbit/s): The binary rate supported is the payload rate (i.2 Interference Reduction Factor As the name indicates. Right-click on the Links folder. the useful bits plus the overheads bits).89: Trunk type Properties dialogue 4. To open a trunk type’s Properties dialogue: • Double-click the trunk type in the left margin of the Trunk Types table. the rate of the useful bits not including the overheads bits). the digital hierarchy being modelled is PDH. The context menu appears. the digital hierarchy being modelled is SDH or SONET.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment To create a microwave trunk type: 1. Binary Rate (Mbit/s): The binary rate is the gross data rate of the frame if all the bits are used for traffic. No.3.e. The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 4. You can also define the properties of a trunk type in its Properties dialogue. If the check box is not selected ( ). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 133 . Bits/Block: The number of bits per block corresponds to the number of bits per frame (i. The trunk type’s Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 4. Figure 4. 2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.530-8 recommendation.89). Select Equipment > Digital Hierarchies from the context menu..

Select the name of the Victim equipment from the list. Double-click in the left margin of the record to open its Properties dialogue (see Figure 4. use the row marked with the New Row icon ( ) 7. Atoll uses T⁄I graphs to determine the IRF graph. Right-click on the Links folder. capacity and modulation.Atoll User Manual The IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the calculation of interference. If so. Atoll uses it. When studying the interference between transmission equipment and reception equipment.90). 4. see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136). If so. Figure 4. or modulation are not the same. Select the name of the Interferer equipment from the list.90: IRF table 5. or the theoretical "T⁄I" graphs if not (for more information on the theoretical graphs. 2. 2. Atoll proceeds as follows: 1. Select Equipment > IRF > Open Table from the context menu. These IRF graphs will be used to reduce the interference between victim and interferer microwave equipment when calculating interference. or the theoretical graphs if not. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Atoll verifies that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer. Defining IRF Graphs Manually You can define IRF graphs using the IRF table. The context menu appears. 6. In this section. Otherwise. the following are explained: • • "Defining IRF Graphs Manually" on page 134 "Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant" on page 135. The following sections describe the modelling of IRF in Atoll. To create or modify an IRF graph: 1.91). Atoll determines the IRF graph during the process of calculating interference. Atoll first verifies whether an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment-reception equipment pair in the IRF table. Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to determine the IRF graph. The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 4. Figure 4. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. Note: If you are creating a new IRF graph. If the equipment manufacturer.91: IRF record Properties dialogue 134 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. capacity.

2. delete an IRF graph. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.92: IRF Setting dialogue 5. Figure 4. Select the TX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. When you select a frequency band and the equipment manufacturers with equipment that operate in the same frequency band. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). Only equipment operating in the selected frequency band is displayed in the grid. Select the RX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. To use the assistant to define IRFs: 1. 6. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. The IRF Setting dialogue appears (see Figure 4. Right-click on the Links folder. Select the Frequency Band from the menu. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. Click OK. Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define IRFs between transmission and reception transceiver equipment. 7. Select Equipment > IRF > Edit Grid from the context menu.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 8. 9. 8. The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the Properties dialogue. You can now define an IRF graph. 4. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid.90). The context menu appears. Atoll presents the entries where the transmission and reception equipment present the possibility of interference. Under Protection values in the Properties dialogue. or create an IRF graph using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 135 .

The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the dialogue. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). Click OK to close the IRF Setting dialogue. the receiver mask. Right-click the Links folder.3. 6.3 Theoretical Graphs Atoll allows you to define theoretical graphs that you can use when the equipment description is not complete (i. 4. or a receiver mask. Under Reception Filter. 7. d. 5. The context menu appears. select either "As Equipment" to use the transmission spectrum graph defined for the equipment. or the receiver mask. 3. Default theoretical graphs are available for different frequency bands and bandwidths.3 Creating Theoretical Graphs A theoretical graph contains information on the behaviour of microwave transceiver equipment under different conditions of C/I.gov. The Theoretical Graphs table appears. These theoretical graphs can describe either the transmitter mask. Select Add Record from the context menu. or T/I graph for a certain manufacturer. 2. or a T/I graph. T/I graphs have been found at the web address http://www. The IRF Calculation dialogue appears.e. the receiver mask. Select Delete from the context menu.Atoll User Manual To define an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. To delete an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. 9. b. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. Under Transmitter Filter.radio. f. 136 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .. Type of Graph: The type of theoretical graph you define. Click Run to calculate the IRF graph. It can be either a transmitter mask. Rate: The rate for which the graph is valid. It represents the changes in the Bit Error Rate as a function of the level of interference. Select Calculate from Masks from the context menu.dk.uk and transmitter and receiver masks have been found at http:\\www. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. e. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. rate.3. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The context menu appears. Click OK. Note: You can create a new theoretical graph by entering a name in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ) and pressing ENTER. g. Click OK. The context menu appears. Channel Width: The bandwidth for which the graph is valid. Select Record Properties from the context menu. bandwidth. The theoretical graph’s Properties dialogue appears. Define the calculation step stated in frequency spacing (MHz). b. To create a theoretical graph: 1. frequency band. The context menu appears. Manufacturer: The manufacturer for which the graph is valid. the T/I graph) and calculate IRF graphs when no IRF is defined in the IRF table. Select Equipment > Theoretical Graphs from the context menu. A dialogue appears. d. c. Frequency Band: The frequency band for which the graph is valid. The context menu appears. or select a theoretical "transmission spectrum" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the transmission equipment. and modulation. 4. 3. Under Enter graph values.ero. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. Click the General tab and define the following parameters: Name: The name of the theoretical graph. To create an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: a. or select a theoretical "receiver selectivity" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the reception equipment. select either "As Equipment" to use the receiver selectivity graph defined for the equipment. Right-click the theoretical graph you want to modify. or T/I graph is missing). They can be used to initialise equipment properties (the transmitter mask. c. Modulation: The modulation for which the graph is valid. b. when information about the transmitter mask.

For information on the MWGuides table. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band from the list. Note: If you are creating a large number of waveguides and cables based on manufacturers data. Right-click the Links folder.4 Microwave Waveguides and Cables Waveguides and cables are both used to transfer the RF signal from the transmission module of the microwave equipment to the microwave antenna. The dielectric material is usually air or foam.93: MWGuides New Element Properties dialogue 5. The cable is covered with a plastic jacket for protection. The MWGuides New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 4. Clicking the Browse button ( erties dialogue of the selected frequency band. the thicker the cable. with very low attenuation. The waveguide is designed for a specific wavelength. 4. Cables. However. Click the Values tab and define the corresponding graph. if you have the data available in tabular format. Figure 4. called a waveguide. 3. define the following parameters: Name: The name of the waveguide or cable. see "Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable" on page 138.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 8. 2. A waveguide operates between two limiting frequencies. If the graph describes the transmitter mask. the operating frequency is a very important characteristic for a waveguide. These are quite robust and therefore easy to install. have a metallic inner core with a dielectric material separating the outer metallic conductor. 9. The following sections describe the modelling of waveguides and cables in Atoll: • • "Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables" on page 137 "Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable" on page 138. ) opens the Prop- © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 137 . define the attenuation of the main transmitted signal (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz). Click OK. Microwave energy can be guided in a metallic tube. you can copy it from the spreadsheet or word processor and paste the data into the MWGuides table. The context menu appears. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. you can assign it to a microwave link for both transmission and reception. If the graph describes the receiver mask. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. define the variation of the T/I (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz). 4. Cable loss is a function of cross-sectional area. Select Waveguides and Cables > New from the context menu. the dielectric losses are also negligible.93). the lower the loss. If the graph is a T/I graph. on the other hand. To create a microwave waveguide or cable: 1. Since the dielectric is air. define the attenuation of the main received signal (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz). For the new waveguide or cable.4. The electric and magnetic fields are contained within the guide. 4. it can take a long time. Once a microwave waveguide or cable has been defined. Cable loss is measured in terms of decibels per 100m.1 Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables In Atoll. called the cut-off frequency. microwave waveguides and cables are characterised by the loss a signal undergoes per 100m of their length. and therefore there is no radiation loss. Hence.

Click OK. 2.5. you can modify the following parameters: Name: The name of the waveguide or cable.1.2 Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable In Atoll. Type: Select the type of waveguide or cable. Select Waveguides and Cables > Open Table from the context menu. equipment. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band from the list. In this section. Circular. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Signal Loss: Enter the signal loss in dB per 100 m.4. and waveguides) of a microwave link. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Circular. ) opens the Prop- Manufacturer: Select the manufacturer from the list. 4.5 Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility Atoll allows you to define compatibility between antennas. Elliptic. or Rectangular. Clicking the Browse button ( erties dialogue of the selected frequency band. Click OK.e. The context menu appears. 4. 3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Type: Select the type of waveguide or cable. Right-click the Links folder. 3. 4. The record’s Properties dialogue appears.1 Defining Compatibility Manually In Atoll. You can select from Cable. you can access and modify any defined microwave waveguide or cable using the MWGuides table. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufacturer. Right-click the Links folder. Elliptic. The context menu appears. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufacturer. When you define the properties (i.1 Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table You can use the Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility table to list compatible microwave antennas and waveguides.. The Waveguides and Cables table appears. antennas. these compatibility definitions can be used to display only compatible antennas. equipment. For the waveguide or cable. Signal Loss: Enter the signal loss in dB per 100 m. 2. 7. and waveguides as options in lists. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 138 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 4. 5. Right-click the record in the Waveguides and Cables table that you want to modify. To define antenna/equipment compatibility using the Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility table: 1.5. equipment. The defined compatible antenna/ equipment/waveguide sets can be then selected when you define the properties of a microwave link. the following are explained: • • "Defining Compatibility Manually" on page 138 "Using Assistants to Define Compatibility" on page 139. you can use the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility and Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility tables to define which microwave antennas are compatible with which waveguides and which microwave antennas are compatible with which equipment. 6. 6.Atoll User Manual Manufacturer: Select the manufacturer from the list. Other. Select Record Properties from the context menu. 8. You can define compatibility directly in the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility and Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility tables or you can use the assistants available in Atoll to define compatibility. The context menu appears. Other. the following are explained: • • "Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table" on page 138 "Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table" on page 139 4. In this section. and waveguides. To modify a microwave waveguide or cable: 1. or Rectangular. You can select from Cable.

and waveguides as options in lists. Only waveguides manufactured by the selected manufacturer is displayed in the table. 5. 4. The context menu appears. Clicking the Browse button ( frequency band. or you can paste them into the Antenna/Guides Compatibility table. Only antennas and waveguides operating in the selected frequency band are displayed in the table. In this section. 5.. Create a new antenna/waveguide compatibility pair by selecting an Antenna and a Guide from the lists in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). equipment.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 4. by default. Create a new antenna/equipment compatibility pair by selecting an Antenna and Equipment from the lists in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). equipment. enter a Comment by double-clicking the Comment field to open the record’s Properties dialogue. Select the Antenna Manufacturer from the list. or you can paste them into the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table. antennas. if desired. 2. The context menu appears. enter a Comment by doubleclicking the Comment field to open the record’s Properties dialogue. Right-click on the Links folder. respectively. You can also. Select the Guide Manufacturer from the list. Note: If you have a large number of antenna/equipment compatibility pairs to enter.5. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 139 . 4.5. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.e. Clicking the Browse button ( turer. if desired. You can also.2. Clicking the Browse button ( turer. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Waveguide > Open Table from the context menu. a piece of equipment compatible with an antenna will be compatible with the waveguides compatible with this antenna. To use the assistant to define compatible pairs of antennas and waveguides: 1. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- 7. respectively.1 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define compatible pairs of antennas and waveguides. 3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. these are taken into account and. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Waveguide > Edit Grid from the context menu.1. 4. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.5.2 Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table You can use the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table to list compatible microwave antennas and equipment. If you have previously defined compatible antenna/waveguide pairs. Right-click the Links folder. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected 6. these compatibility definitions can be used in order to display only compatible antennas. The Antenna/Guides Compatibility table appears. 2. you can import them by right-clicking on the table and selecting Import from the context menu. When you define the properties (i. you can import them by right-clicking on the table and selecting Import from the context menu. To define antenna/equipment compatibility using the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table: 1. The assistant gives you an overview of antennas and waveguides that operate in the same frequency band.2 Using Assistants to Define Compatibility Atoll provides assistants to help you define which microwave antennas are compatible with which waveguides and which microwave antennas are compatible with which equipment. and waveguides) of a microwave link. 4. 5. Note: If you have a large number of antenna/equipment compatibility pairs to enter. The Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table appears. 4. the following are explained: • • "Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility" on page 139 "Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility" on page 140. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The values in the Antenna and Guide lists are taken from the MW Antennas table and the MWGuides table. Select the Frequency Band from the list. Only antennas manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the table. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. The values in the Antenna and Equipment lists are taken from the MW Antennas table and the MW Equipment table. A dialogue appears.

b. 9. The cell is no longer marked in green. Select the Equipment Manufacturer from the list. Select Delete from the context menu. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer is displayed in the table. The context menu appears. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected 6. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Equipment > Edit Grid from the context menu. 2. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Clicking the Browse button ( frequency band. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and waveguide are compatible. 4. Only antennas manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the table.2.5. Down. Click OK. Select the Antenna Manufacturer from the list. Clicking the Browse button ( turer. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. The assistant gives you an overview of antennas and equipment that operate in the same frequency band.2 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define compatible pairs of antennas and equipment. 4. A dialogue appears. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- 140 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .Atoll User Manual 8. Clicking the Browse button ( turer. The context menu appears. Only antennas and waveguides operating in the selected frequency band are displayed in the table. To delete a defined compatible antenna-waveguide pair: a. To use the assistant to define compatible pairs of antennas and equipment: 1. The context menu appears. b. Select the Frequency Band from the list. You can use the Fill (Up. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. Select Add Record from the context menu. Left) and the Copy and Paste commands to create or delete compatible antennawaveguide pairs. You can now define the compatibility between an antenna and a waveguide or delete a defined compatible antenna-waveguide pair: To define the compatibility between an antenna and a waveguide: a. Right-click on the Links folder. Right. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- 7. 5.

and waveguides: To define the compatibility between an antenna and equipment: a. In the properties dialogue. the waveguides compatible with the corresponding antenna are selected. or define compatibility with an antenna. b. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and equipment are compatible. under List of the Compatible Guides. Right. The context menu appears. Left) and the Copy and Paste commands to create or delete compatible antennaequipment pairs. Select Delete from the context menu. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and equipment are compatible. delete a defined compatible antennaequipment pair. To define compatibility with an antenna.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 8. The context menu appears. by default. a piece of equipment. Click OK to close the properties dialogue. e. If you have previously defined compatible antenna/ waveguide pairs. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with the entries for the antenna and the equipment. You can use the Fill (Up. a piece of equipment. The cell is no longer marked in green. Select Add Record from the context menu. 9. The context menu appears. d. these are taken into account and. To delete a defined compatible antenna-equipment pair: a. select the waveguides that you want to make compatible with this antenna/equipment pair. The properties dialogue opens. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 141 . Down. Right-click on the square and select Record Properties from the context menu. You can now define the compatibility between an antenna and equipment. and waveguides: a. b. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. b. Select Add Record from the context menu. Click OK. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. c.

Atoll User Manual 142 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Chapter 5 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands .

Atoll User Manual 144 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

1 Microwave Frequency Bands Microwave links operate within a high frequency range (2-58 GHz). Frequency Band Maximum Path Attenuation Antenna Diameters and Gain Polarization Used 2 GHz 7 GHz 10 GHz 80 km 50 km 45 km Multipath fading Multipath fading Multipath fading Up to 370 cm for a 36 dB gain Up to 370 cm for a 46.1 Long-Haul Frequency Band A long-haul frequency band operates within a range of 2 to 10 GHz and can cover a distance from 45 to 80 km.8 dB gain Horizontal and vertical Horizontal and vertical From 60 to 120 cm for a 34-40 dB gain Horizontal and vertical © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 145 .748-4 ITU-R F. The default frequency bands supplied with Atoll are based on the F-series ITU-R recommendations: ITU-R Recommendation Frequency Band ITU-R F.749-2 Usually the frequency bands can be divided into three types: • • • "Long-Haul Frequency Band" on page 145 "Medium-Haul Frequency Band" on page 146 "Short-Haul Frequency Band" on page 146. managing frequency bands and sub-bands is explained: • • • "Microwave Frequency Bands" on page 145 "Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands" on page 146 "Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands" on page 147. Each frequency band is in turn divided into a number of frequency sub-bands. The following table gives details of long-haul frequency bands.595-8 ITU-R F.Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands 5 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands When planning a microwave link network. Frequency sub-bands are standardised. Atoll enables you to define frequency bands and sub-bands. The characteristics of microwave frequency bands are different depending on the frequency. 5.636-3 ITU-R F. breaking it into channels.385-7 ITU-R F.637-3 ITU-R F. In this chapter. The length of a microwave length is dependent upon the frequency: as the frequency increases.747-0 ITU-R F. the length of the microwave link decreases. 7 GHz 8 GHz 10 GHz 15 GHz 13 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 28 GHz 38 GHz 5. By defining frequency bands you can determine the operational limits of a microwave link network. Long-haul frequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading.1. ITU-compliant divisions of a frequency band.386-6 ITU-R F.497-6 ITU-R F.

for rain of 20 mm per hour.1. Frequency Band Maximum Path Attenuation Antenna Diameters and Gain Polarization Used 23 GHza 26 GHz and 27 GHza 38 GHzb 55 GHzc 58 GHzd a. At 38 GHz. By default. the frequency band experiences atmospheric attenuation of 0. 146 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . c. there is multipath fading as well. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. 18 km Rain and multipath fading Rain fading Rain fading Rain fading Rain fading From 30 to 120 cm for a gain of 35. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.94). The following table gives details of short-haul frequency bands. and 27 GHz. 5. there is atmospheric attenuation of 12 dB per km.3 dB From 30 to 60 cm 30 cm for a gain of 39. At 55 GHz.3 Short-Haul Frequency Band A short-haul frequency band operates within a range of 23 to 58 GHz and can cover a distance up to 18 km. Frequency Band Maximum Path Attenuation Antenna Diameters and Gain Polarization Used 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHza a. for rain of 20 mm per hour. Atoll includes several pre-defined. 40 km 35 km 20 km Multipath fading Multipath fading Rain and multipath fading From 60 to 120 cm for a gain of 36.2 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands Microwave frequency bands are implemented in Atoll.1. Select Frequencies > Frequency Bands from the context menu.1 dB per km. there is atmospheric attenuation of 5 dB per km. for rain of 20 mm per hour as well as multipath fading. d. there is atmospheric attenuation of 0. 26 GHz. At 23 GHz. To create or modify a frequency band: 1. there is atmospheric attenuation of 0. Medium-haul frequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 7 dB per km. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 3 dB per km. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 7 dB per km.2 Medium-Haul Frequency Band A medium-haul frequency band operates within a range of 11 to 20 GHz and can cover a distance from 20 to 40 km. 2. The context menu appears. At 58 GHz.1 dB per km.4 dB Horizontal and vertical From 60-120 cm for a gain of 38-44 dB Horizontal and vertical From 60-180 cm for a gain of 39-49 dB Horizontal and vertical At 18 GHz.4-42. The following table gives details of medium-haul frequency bands.1 dB per km. for rain of 20 mm per hour. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 3 dB per km. 3. At 23 GHz. 5. There must be at least one frequency band that can be assigned to microwave links that are created.5-47. for rain of 20 mm per hour. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 1 dB per km. The Frequency Bands table appears (see Figure 5. Short-haul frequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading as well as rain fading (for the lower frequencies in the band). ITU-compliant frequency bands.66 dB 15 cm 15 cm Horizontal and vertical 15 km 10 km A few kilometers A few kilometers Horizontal and vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical b.Atoll User Manual 5.

Frequency sub-bands are standardised. Figure 5. A duplex link usually uses one of these half-bands in one direction and the other half-band in the other direction. Note: The information necessary to define a frequency band can be found in the F-series ITU-R recommendations. To modify a frequency band. These half-bands are referred to as upper and lower half-bands. To create or modify a frequency sub-band: 1. 5. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. Select Frequencies > Frequency Sub-Bands from the context menu. To create a frequency band. Frequency (MHz): The minimum frequency of the frequency band (in MHz). enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( Name: The name of the frequency band. breaking it into channels.94: The Frequency Bands table 4. The context menu appears. The Frequency Sub-Bands table appears (see Figure 5. ITU-compliant divisions can have more than one frequency sub-band defined for a single frequency band. modify any of the entries in the corresponding row. ITU-compliant divisions of a frequency band. Frequency (MHz): The maximum frequency of the frequency band (in MHz). 2. Min. Atoll automatically generates a channelisation plan or channel-to-frequency map using the information entered for the frequency sub-bands. ): 5. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Max. You can define a channelisation plan for the lower and upper half-band of each sub-band.Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands Figure 5.95: The Frequency Sub-Bands table © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 147 . A frequency sub-band has two half-bands. 3.95). Comments: Any comments.3 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands Frequency bands can be divided into a frequency sub-bands.

Atoll User Manual 4. To create a frequency sub-band, enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( Name: The name of the frequency sub-band. Frequency band: The name of the frequency band to which the sub-band belongs. Reference Frequency (MHz): The reference frequency (in MHz). Lower Half-Band Shift (MHz): The lower half-band shift of the sub-band (in MHz). Upper Half-Band Shift (MHz): The upper half-band shift of the sub-band (in MHz). First Channel: The first channel of the sub-band. Last Channel: The last channel of the sub-band. Step: The step between channels. Note: The information necessary to define a frequency sub-band can be found in the F-series ITU-R recommendations. ):

5. To modify a frequency sub-band, modify any of the entries in the corresponding row.

5.3.1

Example of Creating a Frequency Sub-band
You can find the information necessary to create a frequency sub-band in the appropriate ITU-R recommendation. In this example, the recommendation R F.747-0 (for 10 GHz) is used. On the first page of ITU-R F.747-0 (see Figure 5.96), you see that the recommendation is for Frequency Band 10 GHz.

Figure 5.96: First page of Recommendation ITU-R F.747 On page 2, you see the information in Figure 5.97:

Figure 5.97: Second page of Recommendation ITU-R F.747 The information on page 2 of Recommendation ITU-R F.747 gives you the following values: • • • Reference Frequency (MHz): 11 701 MHz (the reference frequency is the central frequency of the sub-band). Lower Half-Band Shift (MHz): -1204 MHz Upper Half-Band Shift (MHz): -1113 MHz Important: Remember to include the negative sign ("-") when defining the lower and upper half-band shifts. • • • • Inter-Channel Space (MHz): 7 MHz (as indicated by "+ 7m") First Channel: 1 (as indicated by "from 1 to 12") Last Channel: 12 (as indicated by "from 1 to 12") Step: 1 (as indicated by "The 12 values of m from 1 to 12)

148

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 6
Managing Calculations in Atoll

Atoll User Manual

150

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll

6

Managing Calculations in Atoll
Once you have created microwave links, you can make predictions to study how well your network functions: • • • "Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects" on page 151 "Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives" on page 154 "Defining Calculation Parameters" on page 156.

6.1

Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects
The following propagation models are available in Atoll for use in microwave projects: • Microwave Propagation Model: The Microwave Propagation Model is used to calculate the fade margin and to determine the link profile. For more information, see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 151. Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: The Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model is used to calculate interference. For more information, see "Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model" on page 153.

6.1.1

Working with the Microwave Propagation Model
The Microwave Propagation Model is used to calculate the fade margin and to determine the link profile. When calculating attenuation, the Microwave Propagation Model takes free space path losses, atmospheric losses, attenuation due to diffraction, and tropospheric losses into account. If you want to analyse a microwave link, a propagation model must be assigned to it, as explained in "Link Parameters" on page 159. The parameters of the propagation model, including some of its coefficients, can be modified using the Microwave Propagation Model Properties dialogue. To define the parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Propagation Models folder.

3. Right-click the Microwave Propagation Model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 6.102).

Figure 6.98: Microwave Propagation Model Properties - Parameters tab Under Heights, you can set the following parameter: Clutter Taken into Account in Diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" to have Atoll take clutter height information into account when calculating diffraction. Otherwise, select "0 - No". If you choose to take clutter height into account, Atoll uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file if available. Otherwise, it uses average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes.

Under LOS Attenuation, you can set the following parameters: K1, K2, and K3: Enter the K1, K2, and K3 values that will be used to calculate free space losses.

Under Diffraction, you can set the following parameters: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate diffraction.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

151

. the clearance). 7. Atoll multiplies the loss given by the selected method to calculate the tropospheric scatter loss. which is the surface refractivity of the centre of the path. 90%.833-4 recommendations. The clearance information is used when clutter is taken into account in diffraction.e. Clutter categories: Select a clutter category for each clutter class.Click OK. For more information on the parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model.Atoll User Manual Deygout Epstein-Peterson Deygout with correction Millington ITU 452-11 Full Deygout K4: Enter the K4 value that will be used to calculate diffraction. Ktropo: Enter the value for the weight factor. or 99. N0: Enter the value for N0. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.99: Microwave Propagation Model Properties . see the Technical Reference Guide. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 6. you can set the following parameters: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate tropospheric scattering: No attenuation: No attenuation will be calculated. A1 and Alpha coefficients are used to calculate the maximum attenuation experienced by a transmitter or a receiver site located within a vegetation area. It is not taken into account when calculating the total attenuation. ITU-R P.99). The maximum attenuation is taken into consideration to calculate the attenuation due to vegetation. Figure 6. Simplified Method: Attenuation will be estimated using an Atoll-specific equation. 152 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .Clutter tab Under Clutter Consideration. A1: Enter the value of the A1 coefficient. you can set the following parameters: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate attenuation due to vegetation: No attenuation: No attenuation will be calculated. Clutter categories are ITU-standardised clutter classes. For information on clutter categories. Under Tropospheric Scatter.99% of the time. The attenuation due to vegetation is calculated and displayed in link budget and interference reports for information only. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. Alpha: Enter the value of the Alpha coefficient. Under Vegetation. 6.833-4: Attenuation will be calculated according to ITU-R P. ITU-R P617-1: Attenuation will be calculated according to the ITU-R P617-1 recommendations for 50%. ITU-R P452: Attenuation will be calculated according to the ITU-R P452 recommendations. you can set the following parameters for each clutter class: Clearance per clutter class: Define a clearance (in metres) around each transmitter and each receiver site for each clutter class. Clutter categories are taken into consideration when studying reflections and must be defined in order to analyse reflections along the profile. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the transmitter and the receiver sites (i.

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll

6.1.2

Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model
The Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model is used to calculate interference. It is an empirical model, but it takes more physical characteristics into consideration than the Microwave Propagation Model, which is why it is recommended for calculating interference. Assigning the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model to a microwave link is explained in in "Link Parameters" on page 159. The parameters of the propagation model, including some of its coefficients, can be modified using the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties dialogue. To define the parameters of the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Propagation Models folder.

3. Right-click the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 6.102).

Figure 6.100: Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties - Parameters tab Under Heights, you can set the following parameter: Clutter Taken into Account in Diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" to have Atoll take clutter height information into account when calculating diffraction. Otherwise, select "0 - No". If you choose to take clutter height into account, Atoll uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file if available. Otherwise, it uses average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes.

Under Reference attenuation not exceeded during the average year, you can set the following parameter: Required Time Percentage: Enter the percentage of time during which the global attenuation is not exceeded.

Under Rec. ITU-R P452 version, you can set the following parameter: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate the global attenuation (dB) between an interfering transmitter and an interfered (victim) receiver: ITU-R P.452-12 Simplified ITU-R P.452-8

6. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 6.101).

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

153

Atoll User Manual

Figure 6.101: Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties - Clutter tab Under Clutter Consideration, you can set the following parameters for each clutter class: Clearance per clutter class: Define a clearance (in metres) around each transmitter and each receiver site for each clutter class. The clearance information is used when clutter is taken into account in diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the transmitter and the receiver sites (i.e., the clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.

7. Click OK. For more information on the parameters of the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model, see the Technical Reference Guide.

6.2

Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives
In this section, the following are explained: • • "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154 "Defining Performance Objectives" on page 154.

6.2.1

Microwave Link Classes
Microwave link classes are used to differentiate microwave link types. Different link classes can use different performance objectives. By assigning microwave links to microwave link classes, you can assign the link classes targe parameters and usage limitations to the selected microwave links. To create or modify a microwave link class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Link Classes from the context menu. The Link Classes table appears. 4. Enter or modify the values in the table columns to create or modify a link class. Each link class has the following parameters: Name: The name of the link class Type: The type of link class (International or National) Sub-Class: The sub-class (Long Haul, Short Haul, Access, Intermediate country, etc.) Min and Max. L (M): The minimum and maximum length (in metres) for this link class.

The Atoll microwave module includes some pre-defined microwave links classes that are compliant with ITU G.821 and G.826 recommendations.

6.2.2

Defining Performance Objectives
The ITU G.821 recommendation defines microwave performance parameters as functions of microwave performance events. As outlined in the ITU recommendations, error events can occur in link paths or in connections; some error

154

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll performance events are applicable to both while others are specific to the path or connection. These microwave error performance parameters are fully modelled in Atoll and include: • • • ESR SESR BBER

These error performance parameters are based on measurements of microwave error performance events. Error performance events and error performance parameters are briefly described in the following sections: • • • "Microwave Error Performance Events" on page 155 "Microwave Error Performance Parameters" on page 155 "The Purpose of Microwave Error Performance Objectives" on page 155.

Microwave Error Performance Events
Microwave error performance parameters are based on the following events: • • • Errored Block (EB): The EB is a block of data with one or more erroneous bits. Errored Second (ES): The ES is a one-second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect. Severely Errored Second (SES): The SES is a one-second period with 30% errored blocks or at least one defect. SES is a subset of ES. Note: Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds can result in periods of unavailability, especially when there are no backup or standby procedures. Periods of consecutive Severely Errored Seconds persisting for T seconds, where 2 = T < 10 (sometimes referred to as "failures"), can have a severe impact on service, leading to the disconnection of switched services. The frequency of these events can be limited by limiting the SESR.

Background Block Error (BBE): The BBE is an errored block not occurring as part of an SES.

Microwave Error Performance Parameters
The total observation time (Stotal) is split into two parts, namely, the time for which the connection is deemed to be available (Savail) and the time when it is unavailable (Sunavail). Error performance should only be evaluated while the connection is in the available state. The parameters are: • • • Errored Second Ratio (ESR): The ESR is the ratio of ES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval. Severely Errored Second Ratio (SESR): The SESR is the ratio of SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval. Background Block Error Ratio (BBER): The BBER is the ratio of Background Block Errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.

In Atoll, you can define microwave link classes and performance objectives based on these error performance parameters. Atoll also includes default lists of microwave link classes and performance objectives based on the ITU G.821 and G.826 recommendations.

The Purpose of Microwave Error Performance Objectives
The performance objectives serve two main goals: • Performance objectives give the user of national and international digital networks an indication of the expected error performance under real operating conditions, thereby facilitating service planning and terminal equipment design. Performance objectives form the basis upon which performance standards are based for transmission equipment and systems in an ISDN connection.

Performance objectives represent a compromise between meeting service requirements and designing a practically feasible network, taking economic and technical constraints into consideration. The performance objectives, although expressed to suit the needs of different services, are intended to represent a single level of transmission quality.

6.2.2.1

Defining Quality Objectives
Using different parameters (BBER, ESR, and SESR), you can define one or more quality objectives for each link class in Atoll. Each quality objective is characterised by a performance objective equation that defines the limitation of the relevant quality objective parameter (BBER, ESR, SESR). The performance objective equations define the behaviour of the quality parameter as a function of the length (L) of the microwave link. The length of a microwave link is, in turn, limited by the minimum and maximum lengths defined in the microwave link class. Each quality objective is also characterised by its minimum and maximum bit rates. Atoll includes by default the quality objectives defined in the ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 recommendations. You can also define customised quality objectives. To modify the pre-defined ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 quality objectives or to create a new quality objective: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

155

Atoll User Manual 3. Select Performance Targets > Quality from the context menu. The Quality Objectives dialogue appears. You can either edit a default ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 quality objective or create a new quality objective. To edit a ITU G.821 or ITU G.826 quality objective: Select the appropriate tab (ITU G.821 or ITU G.826) and modify the properties of the quality objective. To create a new customised quality objective: Select the Customised tab and enter the parameters in the row marked with the New Row icon ( 4. Click OK. ).

6.2.2.2

Defining Availability Objectives
Using different parameters (BBER, ESR, and SESR), you can define one or more quality objectives for each link class inAtoll. Each availability objective is characterised by a performance objective equation that defines the limitation of the relevant availability objective parameter (BBER, ESR, SESR). The availability objective equations define the behaviour of the availability parameter as a function of the length (L) of the microwave link. The length of a microwave link is, in turn, limited by the minimum and maximum lengths defined in the microwave link class. Each availability objective is also characterised by its minimum and maximum bit rates. Note: The availability objectives are global objectives. They consist of three partial objectives as microwave link unavailability can be either due to rain, due to equipment failure, or random.

Atoll includes by default the availability objectives defined in the ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 recommendations. You can also define customised availability objectives. To modify pre-defined ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objectives or to create a new availability objective: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Performance Targets > Availability from the context menu. The Availability Objectives dialogue appears. You can either edit a default ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objective or create a new availability objective. To edit a ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objective: Select the appropriate tab (ITU G.821 or ITU G.826) and modify the properties of the availability objective. To create a new customised quality objective: Select the Customised tab and enter the parameters in the row marked with the New Row icon ( 4. Click OK. ).

6.3

Defining Calculation Parameters
In a microwave project, parameters that affect calculations can be divided into: • • Global parameters: Global parameters are defined for all microwave links and affect all links. For information on setting global parameters, see "Global Parameters" on page 156. Link parameters: Link parameters are defined per link and affect individual links. For information on setting link parameters, see "Link Parameters" on page 159.

As well, any parameters set for the propagation model affect calculations: • • Microwave Propagation Model: For information on setting Microwave Propagation Model parameters, see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 151. Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: For information on setting Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model parameters, see "Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model" on page 153.

6.3.1

Global Parameters
The global properties of a microwave links project are defined for all microwave links in the Properties of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The global parameters are those used for: • • • Quality and availability analysis Objective selection Interference calculation.

To define the global parameters for microwave links: for quality and availability analysis, objective selection, and interference calculation: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue appears.

156

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll 4. Therefore.e. you can define the following parameters: Min. Specific port engineering: If you select Specific port engineering. Worst channel engineering: If you select Worst channel engineering. This option is useful if you have links with 2+0 configuration (i. you can define the following options: Calculate BER1: Select Calculate BER1 if you want Atoll to perform link analysis for the BER1 value. the parameters you define will be used for quality and availability analysis. Atoll performs the link analysis and displays the result for the channel specified individually for Site A and Site B. select which channel should be displayed the results of a link analysis: All: If you select All. No Filter: There is no filter and all sites within the maximum distance are considered as interferers. - Note: - Interference via repeaters: Select how interference caused by repeaters should be taken into consideration.. Under Calculation Parameters. Atoll performs the link analysis using the values for BER1 and BER2 defined in the properties of each link. Values defined for each link: If you select Values defined for each link. or both. parallel links are referred to as links sharing the same link extremities (e. Interfered Bandwidth: Define which sites are to be considered as interferers.5 times the interfered bandwidth. you can define the following parameters: K factor: Select the K factor (the earth curvature factor) to be used in link analyses: Median value for each link: If you select this option. 5. you can enter the percentage of the interfered bandwidth that Atoll should consider when searching for interferers. No IRF graph is taken into account when the Co-channel Only option is selected.g. Under Interferer Filtering. on the uplink or downlink. Correlation Area: Enter the surface in km2 of the correlation area. - Under BER. Calculated Port: Under Calculated Port. always off or is to be calculated according to geometric correlation. Distance: Enter the maximum distance in metres that Atoll will search around each site to find potentially interfering sites. It also applies to parallel links. Calculation Details: Select the interference to be displayed in the results: none. the parameters you define are valid for all types of analyses: quality and availability analysis. Threshold Degradation: Enter the minimum degradation threshold. Calculate BER2: Select Calculate BER2 if you want Atoll to perform link analysis for the BER2 value. Same value for all links: If you select this option. Atoll performs the link analysis for each channel and displays the results for the worst channel in terms of margin (i. or on both the uplink and downlink. Click the Interference tab. Under Calculation Parameters. the parameters you define will be used for interference calculation. the value you enter will be used as the K factor for all links in link analyses. In this context. Click the Models tab.. Click the General tab. User-defined Percentage: If you select this option.. 6. links with two channels). you can define the following parameters: Max. Ignore decoupling reduction when cross polarisation is not defined at the receiver: Select this option if you want Atoll to ignore decoupling reduction when cross polarisation is not defined at the receiver. Under Result filtering. Atoll performs the link analysis and displays the results for all channels. On the General tab. if you keep the default value of 250%. Under Results. Ignore interference between channels of a same link: Select this option if you want Atoll to ignore interference generated by channels of the same link on each other. and interference calculation. you can define the following parameters: The link direction to be analysed: Select the link direction to be analysed: either A >> B. Results that do not meet the threshold will not be displayed. Atoll considers co-channel interference when the difference between the interfering and interfered frequencies does not exceed the interfered bandwidth. you can define a value for BER 1 and BER 2 that Atoll will use for all links. On the Interference tab. you can define the following parameters: Power Control: Define whether automatic transmission power control is to be considered always on.e. objective selection. two links between the same two sites). You can choose from the following options: Co-channel Only: Only co-channel sites are considered as interferer sites. a site will be considered as an interferer when the difference between the interfering and interfered frequencies does not exceed 2. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 157 . the channel with the lowest margin). Power control on the useful signal: Select the Power control on the useful signal check box if power control on the transmitted signal is to be considered. Same value for all links: If you select Same value for all links. a median value for the K factor will be used for each link in link analyses. B >> A. On the Models tab.

ITU-R P. you can define the ratio between the different objectives considered in the global availability objective. 20°C B: wet ground C: fresh water. The objectives can be selected according to the microwave link rate and the type of the objective (from ITU-T G. This tab lists all clutter categories defined in Rec. If you select a method based on one of the ITU-R P.Q. Soil type: Select the type of ground as defined in Rec. 530-10. 8. Microwave link unavailability can be due either to rain (with its impact on propagation). define the distance. Two attenuation models for rain (ITU recommendations. select the Ignore Signal Enhancements check box if you want to ignore signal enhancements and XPD reduction in multi-path propagation. Click the Objectives tab. you can set the following parameters: Frequency Exponent: Under K. 20°C G: ice (fresh water) - 9. Under Availability Objectives Apportionment. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. the parameters you define will select objectives. number of errors per burst for Bit Error Rate between 10-3 and BERSES and for Bit Error Rate between BERSES and RBER. Clicking the Browse button ( ) beside the Quality or Availability field opens a dialogue where you can define a priority for each selection criterion.530-12. Under Performance Objectives Selection. Selective Fadings: Under Selective Fadings you can define reference delay values for the secondary signal t (tau) for minimum and non minimum phase conditions.530-5.Q. ITU-R P. you can define the following parameters: Reflective: Select the Reflective check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutter classes with this clutter category as relection areas. Multipath Occurence: If you select recommendation ITU-R P.826 recommendations or a customised objective).821 or ITU-T G. Distance: Under K. you can define the following parameters: Method: Select the method to be used to calculate availability.530-8. Method: If you selected K. K. to equipment failure. Vegetation with leaves: Select the Vegetation with leaves check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutter classes with this clutter category as vegetation zones with foliage.530-10. On the Clutter Categories tab.530-11. - Under Quality. If you select Vigants-Barnett. the global availability objective consists of three partial objectives for which you can define a weight. 530-11 and 530-12) are available. Click the Clutter Categories tab.530-11. ITU-R P. Click OK. Reduction of XPD is taken into consideration when calculating unavailability due to multi-path and unavailability due to rain whereas signal enhancements have an impact on unavailability due to multi-path only.530-12. 838-1 and 838-3) are available. you can define the following parameters: Method: Select the method to be used to calculate quality: Vigants-Barnett. ITU-R P. The following are the available types of ground: A: sea water (average salinity).Atoll User Manual Under Availability.530 recommendations. Erroneous Blocks: Under Erroneous Blocks you can define athe network level consideration values for the Residual Bit Error Rate (RBER). you can define how quality and availability objectives are selected.Q.1058-2 and their characteristics. you can use either a simplified method or a method taking roughness into account to calculate the geoclimatic factor (K). 158 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . method based under Method. Method. On the Objectives tab. or ITU-R P. Method. K. you can either enter the geoclimatic factor (K) value or use a simplified method or use a method taking roughness into account to calculate the geoclimatic factor (K).530-10. you can set the following parameters: Multi-Path Propagation: Under Multi-Path Propagation. For each clutter category. ITU-R P. Therefore. 530-8. 7. the parameters you define will be used to analyse reflection and calculate vegetation losses. Six availability analysis methods (Crane and those based on different implemented ITU recommendations.530 recommendations under Method.Q factor. define the exponent of the frequency. The type of ground is used to determine permittivity and conductivity values taken into account in reflection analysis. 527-3. 530-5. or ITU-R P. you can set further parameters under ITU-R P. Vegetation without leaves: Select the Vegetation without leaves check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutter classes with this clutter category as vegetation zones without foliage.Q.530: If you selected a method based on one of the ITU-R P. ITU-R P. These weights are taken into consideration when calculating the performance objectives to be considered when analysing the microwave link unavailability due to rain and the unavailability due to equipment failures. or it can be random. 20°C D: medium dry ground E: very dry ground F: pure water. Rain Model: Select the model to be used to calculate rain attentuation.530.

) to expand the Links folder. Click the Expand button ( 3. Propagation parameters: A propagation can optionally be defined to calculate the useful signal and the interfering signal. Reliability parameters: The reliability parameters define the quality and availability of the microwave link. The microwave link Properties dialogue has several tabs: General.3. The context menu appears. Link class: Each link class can have different performance objectives. 6. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. this performance level is never achieved due to continuously changing propagation conditions and possible problems with the equipment. Propagation. For information on creating a link class. you assign the performance objectives to the link. effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. In practice. The Properties dialogue appears. The margin calculated by the propagation model defined for the useful signal is also used to calculate the quality and availability of the microwave link. rain intensity (exceeding 0. Radio. Radio. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives. Geoclimatic.01% of time). Select Properties from the context menu. see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154.1 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link You set the calculation parameters for a microwave link on three tabs of the link’s Properties dialogue: the Geoclimatic tab. 6.2 Link Parameters The link parameters which affect calculations are the following: • Geoclimatic parameters: The geoclimatic parameters define the environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating.102). Connections. Connections. Right-click the link for which you want to set the calculation parameters. temperature. 5. and Display. earth curvature factor (k).3. Defining calculation parameters is explained in the following sections: • • • "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 159 "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163 "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links" on page 165.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll 6. Reliability. see "Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management". • • • The link parameters which affect calculations can be defined for a single microwave link and then applied to all microwave links or to a group of microwave links that share the same characteristics. 2. 4. including climatic factor. water vapour density. Note: You can also access a link’s Properties dialogue by right-clicking the transmitter on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu.2. For an explanation of the options available on the General. Reliability. and Propagation tabs and are described here. If no propagation model is defined for the useful link. the target values for quality and availability as defined in the link class are used. and the Propagation tab. Under ideal circumstances a microwave link should be completely reliable 100% of the time. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 159 . PL percentage. the Reliability tab. and Display tabs. The link settings that affect calculations are on the Geoclimatic. To define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Click the Geoclimatic tab (see Figure 6.

Clicking the button ( ) beside the Temperature text box opens a dialogue where you can select the temperature 160 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .102: Microwave link Properties dialogue .Geoclimatic tab 7. you can define the conditions under which the microwave operates: Climatic Zone: Select the climatic zone that best describes the climate in which the microwave link operates. Temperate and Dry. you can choose between Warm and Humid. The climatic zones available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. you can select the following climatic zones: Climatic Zone Polar (Dry) Polar (Moderate) Cold (Dry) Temperate Continental (Dry) Subtropical Arid (Dry) Cold (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Wet) Temperate Maritime Subtropical Wet Tropical Moderate Tropical Type Crane Global Rain Zone A B Dry B1 D1 F B2 D2 D3 C E G H Continental Continental humid Humid When using Vigants-Barnett as quality calculation method. you can see the calculation methods used to analyse the microwave link quality and availability. To access all geoclimatic parameters independently of the methods you have selected. Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions: Under Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions. On the Geoclimatic tab. The geoclimatic parameters available depend on the selected quality and availability methods. you can define climate-related settings affecting the microwave link: Current Methods: Under Current Methods. The methods displayed are those set on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. When using Crane as the availability calculation method.Atoll User Manual Figure 6. Temperature: Set the average temperature of the zone in which the microwave link operates. click the Display All button under Current Methods.

If you are using ITU-R P.01% of the average year set in the geoclimatic file. you can choose between "Flat Terrain". ITU-R P. 530-5 or Rec. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface text box opens a dialogue where you can select the refractivity gradient based on Rec. -8 and Vigants-Barnett: Under ITU-R P. the propagation condition factor for the VigantsBarnett method. if you select Terrain-based Method. Rec. ITU-R P.530: Under ITU-R P.453-9.530-5. -8.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll based on Rec. "Mountain" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is higher than 700 m. or the temperature set in the geoclimatic file. The rain height is the height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. Atmospheric Pressure: Set the atmospheric pressure in grams per cubic metre. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Water Vapour Density text box opens a dialogue where you can select the water vapour density based on Rec. calculated using the set parameters. "Average Terrain" and "Montainous Terrain". -8: Under ITU-R P. PL is the percent of time the relative refractivity gradient is less than -100 N⁄Km. ITU-R P.530 to calculate the quality of the microwave link: Water Vapour Density: Set the water vapour density in grams per cubic metre. Method. The dialogue also displays the water vapour pressure in hectopascals (hPa) calculated using your data and based on Rec. you can define the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface in N-units per km.530: The parameters found under Rec. or the refractivity gradient set in the geoclimatic file.99% of the average year). or "Overwater" for microwave links over an extended expanse of water. Vigants-Barnett: Factor C: Parameters available under Vigants-Barnett depend on the option selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. Under Refractivity. you can choose between "Plain Zone" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is lower than 700 m. as well as the percentage of the year that N is not exceeded. - - - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 161 . ITU-R P. is displayed. you can define the PL factor. ITU-R P. 530-10 and above (and select the simplified method where you also define the refractivity gradient (< 65 m. If you select User-defined under Multipath Occurence. ITU-R P. you can select the Terrain Type. Atoll displays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone.Q. Rainfall exceeded 0.530-5.Q method. ITU-R P.01% of the average year text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rainfall exceeded 0. This parameter is taken into account when using ITU-R P. the rainfall observed 99. Rec. in other words. Method: Under K.835-3 (and select a season). ITU-R P.01% of the average year: Set the rainfall exceeded 0. or the rain height set in the geoclimatic file.836-3.530-5.836-3 (and select the percentage of the average year where the defined water vapour density is exceeded).835-3 (and select a season). ITU-R P. Atoll displays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone and lets you select whether you want to take the terrain roughness into account.530-5 or 530-8 methods.1510-0. ITU-R P. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Atmospheric Pressure text box opens a dialogue where you can select the atmospheric pressure based on Rec.530-5.) is less than -100 N-units⁄km for the worst average month) or based on Rec.Q. "Lake" for microwave links over an expanse of water. The terrain types available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. you can enter the Rain Height (0°C Isotherm) in metres. you can set the following parameters: ITU-R P. the k factor median value. or the atmospheric pressure set in the geoclimatic file. Finally. or based on Rec.) not exceeded during 1% of the average year or select the method with terrain roughness taken into account where you define the refractivity gradient and the terrain roughness). ITU-R P. you can define K. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate while Q is the factor for variables other than those dependent on distance and frequency. or the water vapour density set in the geoclimatic file. If you select Simplified Method. -8 and Vigants-Barnett.01% of the average year based on Rec. using a userdefined reference altitude.839-3 (and select a season). 530-8 (and select a terrain type and enter a value for C0 and for the percentage of time the refractivity gradient (< 100 m. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate. ITU-R P. or the refractivity gradient for less than 65 m. Clicking the button ( ) beside the K text box opens a dialogue where you can select the K factor based on Rec.530.01% of the average year (or. Under Geoclimatic Factor.835-3 (and select a season). K.530-5 and ITU-R P. The PL factor can be found on the ITU-R maps. ITU-R P. Geoclimatic Factor: The parameters under Geoclimatic Factor are used to calculate the quality of the microwave link and are broken down by calculation method. If you are using using the VigantsBarnett method. you can enter the C factor value.530-12. you can define the K factor.530 are those recommended by ITU-R P. ITU-R P. Relative Humidity: The Relative Humidity displayed is calculated using the defined water vapour density.. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rainfall exceeded 0. Refractivity: Under Refractivity.530-12: Under ITU-R P.837-4 or the rainfall exceeded 0.530-8 calculation methods. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rain Height text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rain height based on Rec. ITU-R P.Q. for the K.

see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154.Reliability tab 9. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives. Figure 6. Bit Error Rate: Under Bit Error Rate. 162 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .103: Microwave link Properties dialogue . you can select the link class. 10. you assign the performance objectives to the link. Click the Propagation tab (see Figure 6. Atoll will interpolate to determine the corresponding sensitivity. On the Reliability tab. Each link class can have different performance objectives.103). you can set the values for BER 1 and BER 2. The MTTR is taken into account when calculating unavailability due to failures if the microwave link is not equipped with a hot standby channel system. Clicking the Objectives button opens a dialogue where you can view and modify the performance objectives of the selected link class. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected link class. Availability: Under Availability. you can set the MTTR (mean time to repair).Atoll User Manual 8. For information on creating a link class. you can define reliability-related parameters: Link Class: Under Link Class.104). If the value for BER that you enter is not defined in the properties of the equipment. Atolldisplays the resulting sensitivity for each BER. Click the Reliability tab (see Figure 6.

Locate the row in the Links Table with the microwave link whose calculation parameters you just updated.104: Microwave link Properties dialogue. in a highly homogeneous network. The Links Table appears. Copy the defined calculation parameters to all microwave links. Click OK.Propagation tab 11. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. You can set the same calculation parameters for all microwave links at the same time by first defining the calculation parameters for a single microwave link and then copying the calculation parameters to all microwave links.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll Figure 6. 4.2 Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links Under certain circumstances. 3. Model used for the interfering signal: Under Model used for the interfering signal.3. the quality and availability of the link will be defined by the respective target values defined in the link class. you can define propagation-related parameters: Model used for the useful signal: Under Model used for the useful signal. - 12. 6. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate the path loss as well as the margin required for quality and availability for the microwave link. If no propagation model is selected. for example.2. To define the calculation parameters for all microwave links: 1. as described in "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 159. To copy the defined calculation parameters to all microwave links: 1. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate interference. 5. Right-click the Links folder. In the Links Table. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. you will want to set the same calculation parameters for all microwave links. the column names corresponding to the calculation parameters on the tabs of the microwave link’s Properties dialogue are: Geoclimatic tab: © Forsk 2010 Environment Type R001 (mm/h) Geoclimatic Factor (K) Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 163 . 2. Define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link. Select Open Table from the context menu. The context menu appears. On the Propagation tab.

b. Drag upwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified.Atoll User Manual PL (%) Water Vapour (g/m3) Temperature (°C) Factor K. copy the values into the cells below the modified cell: 164 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified. copy the values into all cells above the modified cell: a. Click the modified cell. c. The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. 7.Q Rain Height (m) Atmospheric Pressure (hPa) Refractivity Factor C Climatic Zone Class (EPO) Hot Standby BER 2nd BER MTTR (h) Propagation Model Interference Model Reliability tab: Propagation tab: 6. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells above the modified microwave link. 8. Select Edit > Fill > Up.

From the Group By submenu. To define the calculation parameters for a group of microwave links: 1. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.3 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links Under certain circumstances. The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. and then copying the calculation parameters to all microwave links in that group. Grouping Microwave Links To select the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters by grouping: 1. Copy the defined calculation parameters to the selected group of microwave links. Right-click the Links folder. Select the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters by: Grouping the microwave links (see "Grouping Microwave Links" on page 165) Sorting the microwave links (see "Sorting Microwave Links" on page 166) Filtering the microwave links (see "Filtering Microwave Links" on page 168) 3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.2.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll a. 4. Click the modified cell. in a network that spans a great distance. 3. You can set the same calculation parameters for defined groups of microwave links by first defining the calculation parameters for a single microwave link. Select Edit > Fill > Down. 6. 2. The context menu appears. b. 9. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 165 . c. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells below the modified microwave link. as described in "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 159. 2. The microwave links in the folder are grouped in separate folders by that property. you will want to set the same calculation parameters for defined groups of microwave links but not for all links. select the property by which you want to group the microwave links.3. for example. sorting the microwave links according to their common attributes. Ensure that you chose a property that all the microwave links you want to modify and the link with the modified calculation parameters have in common. Define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data.

3. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified. the column names corresponding to the calculation parameters on the tabs of the microwave link’s Properties dialogue are: Geoclimatic tab: Environment Type R001 (mm/h) Geoclimatic Factor (K) PL (%) Water Vapour (g/m3) Temperature (°C) Factor K. Select Open Table from the context menu. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Important: Ensure that you only select the cells of the microwave links you want to modify. b. Right-click the folder with the grouped microwave links. 5. Drag upwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. In the Links Table. The context menu appears. The context menu appears. For information on using the dialogue that appears. 5. Click the modified cell. Select either Sort Ascending or Sort Descending from the context menu. Once you have finished copying the calculation parameters. Copy the calculation parameters from the modified microwave link to the other microwave links in the group as explained in "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163.Atoll User Manual Note: If the range of properties available in the Group By submenu has been configured as explained in "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. 4. 7. Sorting Microwave Links To sort the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters: 1. Select Open Table from the context menu. The Links Table appears. 6. The context menu appears. Right-click the Links folder. Right-click the table column with the parameter you want to sort on. you can ungroup the links by right-clicking the Links folder and selecting Group By > None from the context menu. see "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57.Q Rain Height (m) Atmospheric Pressure (hPa) Refractivity Factor C Climatic Zone Class (EPO) Hot Standby BER 2nd BER MTTR (h) Propagation Model Interference Model Reliability tab: Propagation tab: 8. The Links Table appears. you can select additional properties by selecting More Fields from the Group By submenu. 166 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 6. 7. copy the values into all cells in the group above the modified cell: a. 2. Locate the row in the Links Table with the microwave link whose calculation parameters you just updated.

For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified. 10. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. Click the modified cell. copy the values into the cells in the group below the modified cell: a. d. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 167 . Select Edit > Fill > Down. Important: Ensure that you only select the cells of the microwave links you want to modify. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. 9.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll c. b. The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells in the group above the modified microwave link. c. Select Edit > Fill > Up.

105: Filtering by selection (Sub-Band A>> B: 18 GHz. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Figure 6. The context menu appears. To select more than one value.106 on page 169). or you can use a value these microwave links do not have. 4. The Links Table appears. 2. You can now modify these microwave links as you would normally do with the entire Links table (see Figure 6. 220 MHz) 168 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 3. press CTRL as you click the other values.Atoll User Manual The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. You can now filter on a value in the table. Filter Excluding Selection: All microwave links without the selected value or values are displayed. Right-click the cell and select one of the following from the context menu: Filter by Selection: All microwave links with the selected value or values are displayed. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Select Open Table from the context menu. 5. Filtering Microwave Links To filter the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters: 1. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire Links table(see Figure 6. Right-click the Links folder.105 on page 168). Select the value to filter on. You can either use a value that all microwave links to which you want to copy calculation parameters have in common with the microwave link you previously modified. 6.

Copy the calculation parameters from the modified microwave link to the other microwave links in the group as explained in "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 169 .Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll Figure 6.106: Filtering excluding selection (Sub-Band A>> B: 18 GHz. For more information on advanced filtering. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63. 220 MHz) Note: You can use advanced data filtering to combine several criteria in different fields to create complex filters. 7.

Atoll User Manual 170 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Chapter 7 Microwave Link Project Management .

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management

7

Microwave Link Project Management
The microwave links module enables you to plan, design, and analyse microwave link networks. Using Atoll's microwave links module, microwave link networks can be designed and analysed in separate Atoll projects as well as within 2G (GMS/GPRS/EGPRS) and 3G (CDMA2000/UMTS/WCDMA) mobile network projects. Using Atoll's microwave links module, you can define and model frequency bands and sub-bands, antennas, radio equipment, feeder equipment, passive repeaters, simple, multi-hop, and point-to-multipoint links. You can define and set target performance objectives in terms of link classes and performance objectives, defining the quality and availability targets. You can determine link budgets over a single link, over multiple connected links (multi-hop links), or over a hub with several links (point-to-multipoint links). You can also carry out end-to-end reliability analyses, interference analyses, and frequency planning. Atoll also enables you to design your microwave link networks while taking future growth and enhancements into consideration. Comprehensive analysis features in the Atoll microwave link module enable the study of simple, multi-hop, and point-tomultipoint microwave links in any network. Any microwave link is considered operational when it globally satisfies the required quality and availability criteria set by the operator. Any microwave link is assessed generally in terms of the link's robustness, i.e., the data transmission should undergo the least possible errors, the link should suffer the least number of failures (usually measured per year) and the duration of these failures should also be as short as possible. All these criteria are described in detail in the ITU standards and recommendations. Atoll follows these standards and enables the user to set in-depth quality and availability targets for the network being designed. Furthermore, it is fundamental to the correct performance of a microwave radio link that line-of-sight be available, i.e., that there be a clear transmission path between the two nodes of the link. The electromagnetic signal disperses as it moves away from source, and therefore the line-of-sight clearance must take this dispersion into account and attention should be paid to objects near the direct signal path to ensure the required signal levels reach the receiving antenna. This is referred to as "Fresnel Zone" clearance. Atoll's profile analysis feature permits allows you to view the line of sight, Fresnel zone clearance, and reflective surfaces along the link's profile. Real-life microwave links do not operate in ideal environments. As it is not always possible to have a direct line-of-sight connection between two extremities, repeaters are employed as a workaround in order to create a pseudo-direct link. Atoll fully models the design and use of microwave repeaters, and allows two repeaters to be inserted within a microwave link. Performance improvement techniques such as frequency and space diversity at reception are also modelled. Since several links can share their extremities (start or end), the description of a microwave links network in Atoll is divided into two folders on the Data tab of the Explorer window: • • The Sites folder, which contains the set of points that can be used as extremities for links. This folder can also contain sites for 2G and 3G mobile network projects in the case of incorporated mobile/microwave projects. The Microwave Radio Links folder, which contains the definitions of links, multi-hop links, point-to-multipoint links, the quality targets and performance objectives, etc. Each link refers to at least two separate sites in the Sites folder.

7.1

Designing a Microwave Link Network
Figure 7.107 depicts the process of creating and planning a microwave link network. The steps involved in planning a microwave link network are described below. The numbers refer to Figure 7.107. 1. Open an existing microwave link document or create a new one ( 1 ). You can open an existing Atoll document by selecting File > Open. You can create a new Atoll document as explained in "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project".

2. Configure the microwave link network by defining network parameters ( 2 ). You can define the equipment such as antennas, waveguides, and cables used in the network (see "Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment") You define and modify microwave frequency bands (see "Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Subbands").

3. Add sites and carry out basic evaluations of the candidate sites and locate more suitable locations for candidate sites ( 3 ). You can add sites or modify existing ones (see "Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 175). You can evaluate the location of existing sites (see "Site Survey Tools" on page 176) and search for new candidate sites (see "Search Tools for New Sites" on page 184).

4. Create microwave links between sites ( 4 ). You can create a microwave link (see "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link" on page 188) based on a link template. If necessary , you can modify the template on which new links are based (see "Managing Microwave Link Templates" on page 190). If necessary, you can create repeaters along microwave links between sites. You can create multi-hop microwave links ("Creating Multi-hops" on page 208).

-

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

173

Atoll User Manual 5. Analyse the microwave network. You can analyse the path profile (see "Analysing the Path Profile" on page 193), adding passive repeaters if necessary (see "Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater" on page 201) ( 5 ). You can analyse the quality and reliability of the network (see "Analysing Microwave Link Reliability" on page 203) ( 6 ). You can study reflection along the microwave link profile (see "Studying Reflection" on page 210) ( 7 ). You can interference along the microwave link profile (see "Analysing Interference" on page 221) ( 8 ).

6. Plan link channels ( 9 ) "Planning Microwave Link Channels" on page 216.

Optimisation and analysis are iterative steps. In some cases, the last four steps can be repeated in order to achieve the optimum solution for the network. 7. If necessary, modify network parameters to study the network with a different frequency plan ( 10 ). After modifying the network’s frequency plan, you must perform steps 7 and 8 again.

Figure 7.107: Planning a microwave link network - workflow

7.2

Planning and Optimising Microwave Sites
As described in "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project", you can start an Atoll document from a template, with no sites, or from a database with a set of sites. As you work on your Atoll document, you will still need to create sites and modify existing ones. In Atoll, a site is defined as a geographical point supporting one or more microwave links. Atoll enables you to verify the characteristics of each candidate in order to chose the best site. Additionally, Atoll has tools that allow you to search for new locations for sites. In this section, the following are explained: • • • "Creating Sites" on page 174 "Site Survey Tools" on page 176 "Search Tools for New Sites" on page 184.

7.2.1

Creating Sites
When you create a microwave site, you create only the geographical point. The created site can then support one or more microwave links. In this section, the following are described: • • "Site Description" on page 175 "Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 175.

174

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management

7.2.1.1

Site Description
The parameters of a site can be found in the site’s Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: • The General tab (see Figure 7.108):

Figure 7.108: New Site dialogue Name: Atoll enters a default name for each new site. You can modify the default name. If you want to change the default name that Atoll gives to new sites, see the Administrator Manual. Position: By default, Atoll places the new site at the centre of the map window. You can modify the location of the site. Altitude: The altitude, as defined by the DTM for the location specified under Position, is given here. You can specify the actual altitude under Real, if you want. If an altitude is specified here, Atoll will use this value for calculations. Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you want. Pylon Height: You can define the height of the structure on which you can install antennas. Atoll can use this height in several analyses (site analysis, antenna height optimisation, etc.). Support Type: You can describe the nature of site. This field is for information only.

-

The Pylon tab:

7.2.1.2

Creating or Modifying a Site
You can modify an existing site or you can create a new site. You can access the properties of a site, described in "Site Description" on page 175, through the site’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new site or modifying an existing site. To create or modify a site: 1. If you are creating a new site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Sites New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 7.108 on page 175). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Sites folder.

c. Right-click the site you want to modify. The context menu appears. d. Select Properties from the context menu. The site’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Site Description" on page 175. 4. Click OK.

Tip:

If you are creating several sites at the same time, or modifying several existing sites, you can do it quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Sites table. You can open the Sites table by right-clicking the Sites folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

175

Atoll User Manual

7.2.2

Site Survey Tools
Atoll provides several tools to enable you to evaluate the line of sight around a site or between candidate sites. In this section, the following are explained. • • • • • "Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site" on page 176 "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176 "Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites" on page 179 "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180 "Displaying a 360° View Around One Site" on page 181

7.2.2.1

Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site
Atoll allows you to display the line-of-sight area around a site in the map window. To display the line-of-sight area around a site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Line of Sight Area from the context menu. The Line of Sight Area dialogue appears. 3. Under Calculation Parameters, define the following parameters: Max Distance: Enter the maximum distance around the selected site that should be taken into consideration. Site Height: Enter the transmitter site height, taking into consideration, for example, building height. Receiver Height: Enter the receiver site height, taking into consideration, for example, building height. Factor k: Enter a value for the earth curvature factor.

4. Select one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid and define the following: Frequency: Enter the operating frequency you want to study. Clearance: Enter the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid.

5. Under View, define the display parameters of the line-of-sight area: To set the transparency of the displayed line-of-sight area, move the slider. To define a colour for the displayed line-of-sight area, click the Colour button and select a colour from the palette that appears.

6. Click OK. Atoll calculates and displays the line-of-sight area around the selected site. To delete the line-of-sight area around a site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Delete Line of Sight Area from the context menu.

7.2.2.2

Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites
In Atoll, you can analyse the line of sight (LOS) between candidate sites. The analysis can be done for one particular site if one extremity of the microwave link is already locked or for all sites. In the analysis, Atoll considers the selected site(s) and all sites located within the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. For information on the focus zone, see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for information on the computation zone, see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. To calculate a LOS report for one particular site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears (see Figure 7.109).

176

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management

Figure 7.109: Setting the calculation parameters for a line of sight report 3. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 4. Under Height - Transmitter Side and Height - Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site, Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height, Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box.

5. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line of sight analysis. 6. Under Earth Curvature Factors, define two k factor values. 7. Under Penetration Condition, define the following parameters: Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box.

8. Click the Clutter tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. For each clutter class, you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between existing sites. Clearance: If you want, you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.

9. Click the Table tab. On the Table tab you can define the content of the report. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. a. Click Add. The Field Selection dialogue appears. b. In the Field Selection dialogue, select the fields that you want to display in the report. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. To select a field to be included in the report, select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields, select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list, from top to bottom.

c. Click OK to return to the Table tab. 10. Click OK. Atoll displays the selected results in the Line of Sight Report table for each site in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. As well, Atoll displays a terrain section on the map between each pair of sites (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180).

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

177

Atoll User Manual The Line of Sight Report table contains the following default information for each pair of sites. Site1 is the studied site and Site2 a candidate site within the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. Site1: Site1 is the transmitting site of the pair of sites. Site2: Site2 is the receiving site of the pair of sites. Distance (m): The distance between the sites. Line of Sight (k1) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the first k factor value. The result can be between -100 and 100%. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (see Figure 7.110). Line of Sight (k2) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the second k factor value. Antenna 1 Height (m): The height of the transmitting antenna. Antenna 2 Height (m):The height of the receiving antenna. Frequency (MHz): The mean frequency used to calculate the line of sight between the transmitting site and the receiving site. Direction (°): The angle from Site1 to Site2 in the horizontal plane.

-

Figure 7.110: Line of sight clearance

Tip:

If you double-click one terrain section in the Line of Sight Report table, Atoll will automatically center it in the map and will display its profile in the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window.

You can remove the line-of-sight sections by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the site’s context menu. To calculate a LOS report for all sites: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. 4. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 5. Under Height - Transmitter Side and Height - Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link, respectively. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site, Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height, Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box.

6. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line-of-sight analysis. 7. Under Earth Curvature Factors, define two k factor values. 8. Under Penetration Condition, define the following parameters: Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box.

9. Click the Clutter tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. For each clutter class, you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between sites. Clearance: If you want, you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.

178

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

2. 7. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. Under Height . The routes can consist of several hops and have different lengths. Click OK. If you want. 11. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 6. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (see Figure 7.Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link.110). - You can remove the line-of-sight lines by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the context menu of the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. 3. b. Atoll considers the selected sites and all sites located within the focus zone.e. On the Table tab you can define the content of the report. The result can be between -100 and 100%. On the Routing Options tab. Antenna 2 Height: The height of the receiving antenna. Site1: Site1 is the transmitting site of the pair of sites. - 4. The Field Selection dialogue appears. Line of Sight (k2) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the second k factor value. For information on the focus zone. Select Routing from the context menu. if no focus zone is defined. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. In the analysis. Click OK to return to the Table tab. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. Minimise the total path length: Select this option if you want Atollto display the best solution in terms of distance.Transmitter Side and Height . or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. Click the Table tab. Minimise the number of hops to reach the target: Select this option if you want Atollto display the best solution in terms of number of hops. Line of Sight (k1) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the first k factor value. In the Field Selection dialogue. Click Add.3 Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites Atoll allows you to find all routes between two sites fulfilling line-of-sight criteria. Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Atoll will use the computation zone. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. Maximum Number of Hops: The maximum number of hops allowed between starting and target sites. a. Atolllists all sites in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone (for information on the focus zone. Site2: Site2 is the receiving site of the pair of sites. To select a field to be included in the report. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. As well. To change the order of the fields. The context menu appears.e. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for information on the computation zone. Atoll displays the results in the Line of Sight Report table for each site in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. 2. To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields. Under Earth Curvature Factors. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line-of-sight analysis. Antenna 1 Height: The height of the transmitting antenna. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears.2. c. Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box. i. Site1 is the studied site and Site2 a candidate site within the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. 7. from top to bottom. i. Frequency: The mean frequency used to calculate the line of sight between the transmitting site and the receiving site. the path containing the least of hops. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. Atoll displays a terrain section on the map between each pair of sites (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180). Right-click the target site either on the map. select the fields that you want to display in the report.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 10. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 179 . define the first k factor value. 5. The Line of Sight Report table contains the following default information for each pair of sites. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site. define the following parameters: Source Site: The starting site. Distance: The distance between the sites. the shortest path. see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for information on the computation zone. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30). To find the best route between two sites: 1. Atoll can display the route with the least of hops or the shortest route. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list.

In addition. Click OK. Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. Under Penetration Condition. Atoll displays terrain sections on the map between each site of routes (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180). b.Atoll User Manual 8. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. define the following parameters: a. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance). you can clear the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab. indicating it is selected. 3. To study the terrain profile between two microwave sites: 1. Move the pointer to another site on the map. When the frame appears around the site. 7. When the frame appears around the site. You can modify them as well as the studied frequency in the Terrain Section Properties dialogue. Move the pointer to the site on the map. 9. If you do not want to display the clutter along the profile. You can open the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue by clicking the arrow next to the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar and selecting Properties.4 Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites In Atoll. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. Select how pylon height will be defined on both sites of the microwave link by clicking the arrow next to the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar and selecting one of the following: - Antenna Height Defined by Site: If you select Antenna Height Defined by Site. The context menu appears. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between existing sites. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. Clearance: If you want. define the percentage of Clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid and select the Frequency band to be considered when calculating the line of sight (the average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box). 5. Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Note: You can set further options using the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. click to create the first analysis point. you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. Node#: The name of sites been through by the route and the name of the target site. Default Antenna Height: If you select Default Antenna Height. Atoll displays the results in the Routing to Site table. see "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176. Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. Atoll will use the pylon height defined on each site. The profile between both sites appears on the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. Antenna Height Defined per Clutter Class: If you select Antenna Height Defined per Clutter Class. You can remove the line of sight lines by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the context menu of the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The Routing to Site table contains the following information for each route. Distance: The length of the route. For a description of the options available in the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. 10. Click the Clutter tab. 2. you can check the terrain profile between two microwave sites.2. Select one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. The number of columns named "Node#" displayed in the Routing to Site table depends on the maximum number of hops defined in the Routing Options tab. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between both sites. 6. Node1: The name of the source site selected in the Routing Options tab. click to create the second analysis point. By default. Atoll considers the pylon heights defined for the selected sites to determine the profile. Right-click the Terrain Section tab.2. Click the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar. 180 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll will use the receiver height defined per clutter class on the Clutter tab of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. For each clutter class. indicating it is selected. 4. Then.

8. 7. Click the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar. select "Value Intervals. Choose the Create Link command in the context menu. 1. 2. click the terrain section you want to analyse. Then. 2.111): © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 181 . Atoll uses the site heights. In order to calculate the Fresnel ellipsoid. The Terrain Section Properties dialogue appears. you can use any terrain section to create a microwave link." Under Field. You can change the value intervals and their displayed colour. The 360° View tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7. Select the Display tab and define the following parameters: Under Display Type.5 Displaying a 360° View Around One Site You can display a 360° view around each site. To perform a 360° view at any site: 1. Frequency (MHz): The frequency to be considered. Click OK. 3. Select Properties.2. - 9. 2. the k factor value and the frequency used for the LOS report calculation. Pylon 2 Height (m): The pylon height on Site2 to be considered. right-click the terrain section you want to use for the microwave link design. Pylon 1 Height (m): The pylon height on Site1 to be considered. Atoll opens the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. Line of Sight (%): The percentage of clearance/penetration of the Fresnel zone. It displays a Fresnel ellipsoid between both sites. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. you have the following parameters: Id: The terrain section reference number. 3. In the Terrain Section Properties dialogue. 4. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Distance (m): The distance between Site1 and Site2. you can colour them according to the percentage of clearance/ penetration of the Fresnel zone. Atoll adds the new microwave link in the Links folder. Select 360° View from the context menu. If you have several terrain sections displayed on the map. 1. Site1: The Site1 name. On the map. On the map. The context menu appears. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. The value can vary between -100 and 100%. If you have previously calculated a LOS report on a site or a group of sites (see "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176). A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 7. Click OK to close the dialogue and apply the parameters. select "Visibility". proceed as follows: 1. its properties are based on the selected link template.2. Right-click the Terrain Sections folder and select Properties from the context menu. and terrain height and clutter along the profile. Site2: The Site2 name. 2. For information on changing display properties. Right-click the site either directly on the map or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. Displaying 360° view around a site helps you to determine if the site is a good candidate and if it is visible from the other sites. The Terrain Section Properties dialogue appears.

The altitude (in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the direction (in °) on the horizontal axis.e. The site is automatically selected and centered in the map window. - To display the terrain profile between the studied site and the receiver site: Right-click the site in the 360° View tab and select See Terrain Section from the context menu. Two purple markers on both sides of the 360° View tab show the pylon height (i. To return from the Terrain Section tab to the 360° View tab: Click the 360° View tab in the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. the maximum height not to be exceeded if you install an antenna on the site) defined for the studied site. The line lengths and the symbol position on the line depend on the receiver height defined in the 360° View Properties dialogue. Each neighbour site is indicated by a vertical red line and its symbol. This representation helps you select a receiver site among neighbours and determine at which height you should install an antenna on the receiver site. The pylon height (in m). Atoll displays a tool tip with the following information: The point coordinates (in the display coordinate system). The curvature of the Earth (in m). The line position on the vertical axis depends on the site altitude which includes the Earth curvature.111: 360° View Tool The 360° View tab shows the points of highest elevations in every direction around the selected site. the line is dotted. The direction (in °). If the site is entirely visible from the studied site. Atoll displays a tool tip with the following information: The site coordinates (in the display coordinate system). Neighbour sites around the studied one are displayed according to their directions. the visible part is represented by a solid line whereas the hidden part is indicated by a dotted line. To get information about a receiver site: Place the mouse cursor on the site in the 360° View tab. A special pointer ( ) pinpoints the location of the current point in the map window. If it is entirely hidden by an obstable. if a site is partly visible from the studied site.Atoll User Manual Figure 7. The 360° View tab provides you with the following options: To center the receiver site in the map window: Click the site in the 360° View tab. Note: The 360° View tab does not display any depth of field. - 182 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The distance from the studied site (in m). The Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens. Its distance from the studied site (in m). Finally. The height of the studied site is indicated by a blue dotted line. the line is solid. Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. The direction (in °). To view the exact location of a high elevation point in the map window: Click a point on the line indicating the highest elevation points in the 360° View tab. To get information about a high elevation point: Place the mouse cursor on a point on the line indicating the highest elevation points in the 360° View tab. The altitude (in m).

Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. If you enter a beamwidth of 90° and an azimuth of 0°. Atoll displays two markers on both sides of the window to represent the pylon height defined for the studied site. - - Changing the Calculation and Display Parameters 1. 2. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance).The clutter height at the point (in m). Azimuth: Enter the azimuth of the selected site. Under Earth Curvature Factors. Right-click the 360° view tab. For information on parameters which can be changed. Clearance: If you want. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. . Select 360° View Properties from the context menu. Under Height . On the Display tab. : Rotate the angle of view on the left. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. : Increase the angle of view on the right. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site.Transmitter Side and Height . Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site. Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 9. 4. Height of the Selected Site: When you select this option. you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. Atoll displays a horizontal line (a blue dotted line by default) to indicate the height of the selected site. Click the Clutter tab. 6. Atoll will display the view between -45° and 45°. you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. Click OK. . For each clutter class. define the first k factor value. : Decrease the angle of view on the right : Rotate the angle of view on the right. : Decrease the angle of view on the left. Atoll displays the position of other sites within the view. Position of the Other Sites: When you select this option. Each site is indicated by a vertical line (red by default). 8. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. define the percentage of Clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid and select the Frequency band to be considered when calculating the line of sight (the average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box). 7. 5. Beamwidth: Enter the angle of view to be considered. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. 3. The context menu appears.The altitude (in m). To change the angle of view and the azimuth of the studied site: Click the following buttons available on both sides of the 360° View tab. : Increase the angle of view on the left. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between existing sites. They are displayed in purple by default. Under Penetration Condition. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 183 . you can define the following parameters: Pylon Height: When you select this option. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. To configure the 360° view calculation parameters and display options: Right-click the 360° View tab and select 360° View Properties from the context menu. b. 10. Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Then. see “Changing the Calculation and Display Parameters” on page 183. respectively. define the following parameters: a.The curvature of the Earth (in m). Select one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management .

Right-click the Sites folder. Click the Clutter tab. define the first k factor value. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. Overlapping: Select Overlapping to display the line-of-sight areas with coverage from the defined number of sites: 184 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Clearance: If you want. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The intersection of lineof-sight areas will be calculated for sites in the computation zone (for information on the computation zone. you can define how the line-of-sight areas will be displayed on the map. Displaying the Mutually Visible Areas of Multiple Sites Atoll allows you to calculate the line-of-sight areas for several sites and display their intersection. 4. Atoll with display all line-of-sight areas in the same colour. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. selecting a colour from the palette. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. For each clutter class. you can select how receiver height will be defined at the far edge of the LOS area: Use heights defined per clutter class: If you select Use heights defined per clutter class.Transmitter Side. 8. To display the line-of-sight areas of several sites and display their intersection: 1. by moving the slider. Define the type of clearance that will be calculated by selecting one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. Under Height . On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line-of-sight area. 5. Atoll will use the receiver height defined per clutter class on the Clutter tab of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. On the Display tab. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height.Receiver Side. b. 3. Unique Colour: If you select Unique Colour. you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter side of each microwave link: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site. This is the value that will be taken into consideration if you selected Use heights defined per clutter class under Height . and the resulting display will show the cumulative line-of-sight areas. You can improve the location of a site. You can also let Atoll display the mutually visible areas of multiple sites so as to find good places to create new sites. Click the Display tab. c.2. Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box. you can set the following: Receiver Height: If you want. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line-of-sight analysis. in terms of reception and transmission. 2. as explained in "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19. Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. 9.Receiver Side on the Calculation Parameters tab. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid and enter the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. define the following parameters: a. You can select one of the following display options: One Area per Site: Select One Area per Site to display a line-of-sight area for each site and then define the colour the line-of-sight areas will be displayed in: Automatic Colour: If you select Automatic Colour. by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. The context menu appears. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Under Height . 7. - 11. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30). Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box. you can define a receiver height for each clutter class. 10. Under Earth Curvature Factors.3 Search Tools for New Sites Atoll provides different tools to find new microwave site locations. Atoll will automatically assign a different colour to each line-of-sight area. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. and you will be able to distinguish the line-of-sight areas for each site. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. Set the transparency of the displayed line-of-sight area.Atoll User Manual 7. 6. Atoll will use the receiver height you define in the Default Height box. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. Under Penetration Condition. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance).

Atoll displays results on the map. The baseband signal. Select the Add to Legend check box to add the options defined on the Display tab to the Legend. respectively. 7. "Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document" on page 192. you can modify its position under Antenna Position: Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna positions as offsets with respect to the site location. "Checking Data Consistency" on page 192. The Properties dialogue has seven tabs: • The General tab: Name: The name of the microwave link. Duplex operation means that each radio frequency channel consists of a pair of frequencies. etc.1 Definition of a Microwave Link The parameters of a microwave link can be found in the microwave link’s Properties dialogue. For information on the Legend window. Repeater P: The name of a passive repeater on the link. 2. respectively. containing the user data. transceiver equipment. In Atoll. Click OK. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates. respectively. the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. The context menu appears. and is transmitted over the air as an electromagnetic wavefront. occupies a limited bandwidth depending on the modulation scheme used. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates. If the extremity of the link is not located exactly on the site. "Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links" on page 192. If the extremity of the link is not located exactly on the site. X and Y. 12. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets. Length: The calculated length. installed at both. • Frequency band: The working frequency band of the microwave link. 13. Dx and Dy. Under Site A: you can set the name of the site defining one extremity of the link. "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link" on page 188. X and Y. "Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template" on page 190. A site can support one or more microwave links or passive repeaters. Activity: The microwave link activity status. In this section. Dx and Dy. Areas covered by all sites: Check the Areas covered by all sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by all sites in the colour selected from the palette. Atoll enables you to create new microwave links by basing them on templates or by setting all the parameters for each new link.3. Under Site B: you can set the name of the site defining the other extremity of the link. To delete the line-of-sight areas: 1. "Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map" on page 191. in Atoll.3 Creating Microwave Links A microwave radio link. A microwave link comprises two transmission/reception ends with antennas. "Managing Microwave Link Templates" on page 190. Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna position. is a point-to-point fixed radio frequency link operating in either simplex or in duplex mode. Atoll enables you to manage the microwave link parameters and their activity status globally or individually. Microwave radio links are designed to operate between 300 MHz and 60 GHz. This baseband signal is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier at the transmission end. 7. "A" is the site of departure and "B" is the site of arrival. Right-click the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna positions.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Areas covered by at least 2 sites: Check the Areas covered by at least 2 sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by at least 2 sites in the colour selected from the palette. Select Delete Line of Sight Areas from the context menu. respectively. "Defining Port Parameters" on page 189. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets.. one for transmission and one for reception. you can modify its position under Antenna Position: Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna position as offsets with respect to the site location. Repeater Q: The name of a second passive repeater on the link. The Radio tab: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 185 . Comments: Any comment about the microwave link. Only active microwave links are considered in reliability and interference analysis. Areas covered by at least 3 sites: Check the Areas covered by at least 3 sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by at least 3 sites in the colour selected from the palette. see "Displaying the Map Legend" on page 29.

see "Global Parameters" on page 156. Tilt. you can define equipment related parameters for the both sites of the link: - ( ). The number of ports you can define depends on the system configuration of the selected equipment and cannot exceed n+m (where "n" is the number of channels in normal use and "m" is the number of channels available as standby channels). Coordinated Power: The output power taken into account in calculations when power control is on.e. Maximum Power: The maximum power that the equipment can transmit. Sub-Band: The frequency sub-band. Atoll lists equipment that operates in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. Atoll lists waveguides that operate in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. If you want. In this case.. When the filter is active. By default. or for both transmission and reception directions and select the waveguide model. For other configurations. Atoll lists all frequency sub-bands available for the microwave link frequency band. values for transmission and reception attenuation. Atoll provides in the list the sub-band. When the filter is active./Direct Ray: The azimuth with respect to the direct ray between the both extremities. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the antenna model field. Atoll proposes in the list antennas compatible with the selected equipment as defined in the Antenna/ Equipment Compatibility table. For information on taking power control into consideration. Frequency: The frequency on which the signal is transmitted. Polarisation: The polarisation of the antenna to be used. This value is used when no sub-band is defined./Direct Ray: The tilt with respect to the direct ray between the both extremities. you can define the following parameters: - - • The Connections tab: Under Waveguides and Cables. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( model field. Nominal power: The output power after tuning. Channel(s) can be selected only after choosing a frequency sub-band. This parameter can be defined for biderectional links only. For further information on port settings. Select both options to make the microwave link bidirectional (i. By default. to allow communication in both ways). Atoll proposes 186 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Note: Ports have to be configured if you use dual polarized antennas. Under Antennas. XPIC System: Select this option if the microwave link uses XPIC (Cross Polarisation Interference Canceller). transmission and reception port numbers. Atoll proposes in the list equipment compatible with the selected antenna as defined in the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table. In this case. or frequency diversity. Half-band: Define which half-band (either the upper or the lower half-band) is assigned to the site. Az. The Ports Definition dialogue appears. see "Defining Port Parameters" on page 189. If you want. Separation: The distance between the main and the diversity antennas when space diversity is used on the site.Atoll User Manual A>>B and B>>A: The direction of the microwave link (A>>B: transmission from Site A to Site B. the appearance of the button changes Under Equipment. radio equipment with 1+1 configuration and hot standby. you can define if it is used either for transmission or reception only. Tuning: Define a value different from 0 dB if you do not want to transmit at maximum power. This parameter helps Atoll determine which antenna pattern diagrams to use for calculations. By default. Channels: The channel(s) allocated to the site. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the frequency sub-band field. By default. the appearance of the button changes ( ). the appearance of the button changes ( ). - Under Frequencies. you can select up to two waveguides. Model: You can select a piece of equipment. whose frequency spacing corresponds to the standardised channel bandwidth calculated for the installed equipment. B>>A: transmission from Site B to Site A). If you want. When the filter is active. you can define antennas and characteristics for the both sites of the link Model: The antenna model. ATPC: The power reserve used to increase the transmitted signal when it rains. ATPC value is considered in reliability and interference analysis only if power control is on. In this case. you can define either the frequency or the sub-band and channels. You can configure the channels. Atoll lists antennas that operate in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. When the filter is active. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the - - antenna model field. The value cannot exceed the Max ATPC value defined for the equipment. the polarisation and the channel port status. By default. Port Settings: Click the Port Settings button to configure channel(s) in detail. In this case. port settings is not mandatory. For each of them. it equals the central frequency of the frequency band. the appearance of the button changes ( ) beside the antenna ). This parameter is taken from the equipment properties. If you want. Diversity Ant: You can define if a diversity antenna is used at either site to improve reception. Height/Ground: The antenna height with respect to the ground (in metres).

ITU-R P. For more information.01% of the average year: Set the rainfall exceeded 0. The dialogue also displays the water vapour pressure in hectopascals (hPa) calculated using your data and based on Rec. you can define the conditions under which the microwave operates: Climatic Zone: Select the climatic zone that best describes the climate in which the microwave link operates.530-12. - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 187 . ITU-R P. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. or based on Rec.530 are those recommended by ITU-R P. Under Connection Losses.836-3. or on both transmission and reception. The climatic zones available depend on the calculation methods selected in the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue.836-3 (and select the percentage of the average year where the defined water vapour density is exceeded). see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. Atmospheric Pressure: Set the atmospheric pressure in grams per cubic metre. The different geoclimatic parameters are described below: Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions: Under Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions. you can define additional losses to be taken into account on transmission. the rainfall observed 99.01% of the average year set in the geoclimatic file. Rainfall exceeded 0.1510-0. For more information on the geoclimatic file. ITU-R P. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. you can see the calculation methods used to analyse the microwave link quality and availability. The methods displayed are those set on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. ITU-R P. ITU-R P.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management in the list. When using Crane as the availability calculation method. The rain height is the height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm.835-3 (and select a season). To access all geoclimatic parameters whatever the methods you have selected. For more information on the geoclimatic file.530 to calculate the quality of the microwave link: Water Vapour Density: Set the water vapour density in grams per cubic metre. or the atmospheric pressure set in the geoclimatic file. reception. You can also add a Shielding Factor. Relative Humidity: The Relative Humidity displayed is calculated using the defined water vapour density.835-3 (and select a season). Current Methods: Under Current Methods.835-3 (and select a season).530-12: Under ITU-R P.01% of the average year (or. waveguides compatible with the selected antenna and equipment as defined in the Antenna/ Waveguide Compatibility and Antenna/Equipment Compatibility tables. ITU-R P. Temperate and Dry.837-4 or the rainfall exceeded 0. you can select the following climatic zones: • The Geoclimatic tab: - Climatic Zone Polar (Dry) Polar (Moderate) Cold (Dry) Temperate Continental (Dry) Subtropical Arid (Dry) Cold (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Wet) Temperate Maritime Subtropical Wet Tropical Moderate Tropical Type Crane Global Rain Zone A B Dry B1 D1 F B2 D2 D3 C E G H Continental Continental humid Humid When using Vigants-Barnett as the quality calculation method. click the Display All button available under Current Methods. For more information on the geoclimatic file. Rec. Rec. ITU-R P. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rainfall exceeded 0. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Atmospheric Pressure text box opens a dialogue where you can select the atmospheric pressure based on Rec. in other words. ITU-R P.01% of the average year text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rainfall exceeded 0. Temperature: Set the average temperature of the zone in which the microwave link operates. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. you can enter the Rain Height (0°C Isotherm) in metres. or the temperature set in the geoclimatic file. For more information on the geoclimatic file. Atoll displays the attenuation. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Temperature text box opens a dialogue where you can select the temperature based on Rec. The geoclimatic parameters available depend on the selected quality and availability methods.530: The parameters found under Rec. you can choose between Warm and Humid. You can also enter the length of each waveguide. or the water vapour density set in the geoclimatic file. ITU-R P. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108.01% of the average year based on Rec. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Water Vapour Density text box opens a dialogue where you can select the water vapour density based on Rec. ITU-R P.99% of the average year).

Clicking the button ( ) beside the K text box opens a dialogue where you can select the K factor based on Rec. For more information on the geoclimatic file. you assign the performance objectives to the link. • Bit Error Rate: Under Bit Error Rate.Q. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate.530-5. you can define the K factor. -8: Under ITU-R P. The PL factor can be found on the ITU-R maps. PL is the percent of time the relative refractivity gradient is less than -100 N⁄Km. Under Geoclimatic Factor. • 7. ITU-R P. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives. you can define propagation-related parameters: .) is less than -100 N-units⁄km for the worst average month) or based on Rec.Q method. ITU-R P. Method. Method: Under K.Q. the propagation condition factor for Vigants-Barnett method. see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154. ITU-R P. Each link class can have different performance objectives. calculated using the set parameters. "Average Terrain" and "Montainous Terrain". you can define the PL factor. the quality and availability of the link will be defined by the respective target values defined in the link class. -8.839-3 (and select a season). or the refractivity gradient set in the geoclimatic file. 530-8 (and select a terrain type and enter a value for C0 and for the percentage of time the refractivity gradient (< 100 m. or the refractivity gradient for less than 65 m.Q. If you select the Terrain-based Method option. If you select the Simplified Method option. The Propagation tab. Refractivity: Under Refractivity.530-5. If you are using using the VigantsBarnett method. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. . you can define the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface in N-units per km. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate while Q is the factor for variables other than those dependent on distance and frequency. the k factor median value.2 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link You can modify an existing microwave link or you can create a new microwave link. -8 and Vigants-Barnett. You can access the properties of a microwave link. you can select the link class. "Mountain" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is higher than 700 m. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected link class.Model used for the useful signal: Under Model used for the useful signal.530.. described in "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. If no propagation model is selected. The terrain types available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. you can set the values for BER 1 and BER 2. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface text box opens a dialogue where you can select the refractivity gradient based on Rec. you can define K. ITU-R P. - - • The Reliability tab: Link Class: Under Link Class. Atoll displays the resulting sensitivity for each BER. For information on creating a link class.3. If you select the User-defined option under Multipath Occurence.530-5. -8 and Vigants-Barnett: Under ITU-R P. Clicking the Objectives button opens a dialogue where you can view and modify the performance objectives of the selected link class. through the microwave link’s Properties 188 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . using a userdefined reference altitude. ITU-R P. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate interference. For more information on the geoclimatic file. Vigants-Barnett: Parameters available under Vigants-Barnett depend on the option selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. you can select the Terrain Type. for the K. "Lake" for microwave links over an expanse of water and "Overwater" for microwave links over an extended expanse of water. Geoclimatic Factor: The parameters under Geoclimatic Factor are used to calculate the quality of the microwave link and are broken down by calculation method. or the rain height set in the geoclimatic file. Under Refractivity. ITU-R P. Atolldisplays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. you can define the appearance of the microwave link and its extremities. 530-10 and above (and select the simplified method where you also define the refractivity gradient (< 65 m.530: Under ITU-R P. Atoll displays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone and lets you define whether you want to take the terrain roughness into account. ITU-R P. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate the path loss as well as the margin required for quality and availability for the microwave link. is displayed. 530-5 or Rec. If you are using ITU-R P.530-5 or 530-8 methods. The Display tab.) not exceeded during 1% of the average year or select the method with terrain roughness taken into account where you define the refractivity gradient and the terrain roughness). you can choose between "Open Areas" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is lower than 700 m.Atoll User Manual Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rain Height text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rain height based on Rec.530-5.453-9. as well as the percentage of the year that N is not exceeded. you can enter the C factor value. you can set the following parameters: ITU-R P.Model used for the interfering signal: Under Model used for the interfering signal. K. you can choose between "Flat Terrain".

c.3 Defining Port Parameters In Atoll. Click the Expand button ( c. For other configurations.3. 4. To define port parameters for a single microwave link: 1. ports are used to configure channel(s) in detail. 7. Status: Either select "Main" if the channel is active (channel "n"). 2. Click OK. or frequency diversity. Right-click the Links folder. 7. The table opens. b. Select the Radio tab. Click the Expand button ( 3. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. you can define either a frequency or the channels used. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. The Ports Definition dialogue closes. 3. ) to expand the Links folder. 13. ) to expand the Links folder. Select New from the context menu. two channels with diversity status are required. b. 4. 6. Defined the Half-band used on SiteA. The number of ports you can define depends on the system configuration of the selected equipment and cannot exceed n+m. The context menu appears. Click Apply. 2. Define the following parameters: Link: the name of the microwave link. In case of frequency diversity. 3. Additional parameters appear. "Diversity" if it is used for frequency diversity. d. Right-click the microwave link whose port parameters you want to define. Click the Port Parameter Settings button. The Properties dialogue appears. Transmission Attenuation: The transmission attenuation in dB. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The number must be from 1 to 10. To create or modify a microwave link: 1. To define port parameters for all microwave links: 1. Click OK. Right-click the Links folder. you can define the opposite direction by clicking the Initialise Symmetrically button. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Rx port: The port number for the receiving equipment. The Links New Element Properties dialogue appears. e. 10. Under Frequencies. The number must be from 1 to 10. The context menu appears. You can configure port parameters for an individual microwave link or for all microwave links. Modify the parameters described in "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. The microwave link’s Properties dialogue appears. select a Sub-Band for the SiteA of the microwave link. radio equipment with 1+1 configuration and hot standby. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. They have to be defined if you use dual polarized antennas. 2. "Standby" for a standby channel (channel "m"). 8. Polarisation: The signal polarisation. d. The context menu appears. The context menu appears. Define the following parameters for each channel transmitted in one direction: Channel: The channel number. Right-click the microwave link you want to modify. Click OK. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management dialogue. Reception Attenuation: The reception attenuation in dB. port settings is not mandatory. 5. If you are creating a new microwave link: a. 9. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The Ports Definition dialogue appears. Tx port: The port number for the transmitting equipment. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new microwave link or modifying an existing microwave link. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Select Ports > Open table. After defining the configuration for one direction. Select Properties from the context menu. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 11. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 189 . Select Properties from the context menu. 12.

In case of frequency diversity. The pointer changes ( The sites that define the extremities of a microwave link can be already existing sites or Atoll will create new sites automatically at the location you clicked on the map. ). Click once on the map to indicate the location of the first end of the link. The Link Creation dialogue appears. where SiteX is the name of the start site (existing or newly created) and SiteY is the name of the end site (existing or newly created). In the Link Creation dialogue. you can create new microwave links based on link templates. and passive repeaters. The number must be from 1 to 10. On two existing sites using a link template. Move the pointer to the site that you would like to use as the other extremity of the microwave link and click it. Click the arrow next to New Link button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar.3. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. "Diversity" if it is used for frequency diversity. The site is now one extremity of the microwave link. Tx port: the port number for the transmitting equipment. 5. By default. 4. two channels with diversity status are required.Atoll User Manual Way: the link direction (AB or BA). "Standby" for a standby channel (channel "m"). If you are placing a new microwave link on two existing sites: a. but you can also create and modify microwave link templates.3. Transmission Attenuation: the transmission attenuation in dB.5 Managing Microwave Link Templates Atoll comes with microwave link templates. define the following parameters: Model: the link template you want to use in order to create the microwave link. If you are placing a new microwave link on two new sites: a. 2. You can create a microwave link in the following ways: • • Directly on the map between new or existing sites using a link template. 3. Select Using The Mouse On The Map from the menu. Figure 7. Channel: the channel number. To place a microwave link directly on the map using a link template: 1. To create a microwave link on two existing sites using a link template: 1. click the site that you would like to use as one extremity of the microwave link. Atoll names the newly created microwave links in the following manner: SiteX – SiteY. Click OK. 3. Reception Attenuation: the reception losses attenuation in dB. Polarisation: the signal polarisation. Rx port: the port number for the receiving equipment. 7.4 Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template With Atoll. In the map window. Select Between Sites from the menu. In the Microwave toolbar. Status: Either select "Main" if the channel is active (channel "n"). This allows you to build your network quickly with consistent parameters. In the Microwave toolbar.112: The Microwave toolbar In this section. Click again on the map to indicate the location of the other end of the link. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links. select a link template from the list. 2. b. The tools for working with microwave link templates can be found on the Microwave toolbar (see Figure 7. select a link template from the list. The pointer now changes ( b. 7. 4. Site A: the name of the site defining one extremity of the link. the following are explained: • • "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template" on page 191 "Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template" on page 191 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 190 . The number must be from 1 to 10. ). Click the arrow next to New Link button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar. The pointer now changes ( ). Site B: the name of the site defining the other extremity of the link.112). transmitters. The microwave link is now created between the two sites. 5.

3 Deleting a Microwave Link Template To delete a link template: 1. 2.3. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 191 . In the Microwave toolbar. click the arrow to the right of the list. in a complex radio-planning project. 5. It is available in the list of the Microwave toolbar. You can also change the position of the site by dragging it. As well. click the Add button to add a field. Select Manage Templates from the list.3. The link template is deleted. In the Radio toolbar. select the link template whose properties you want to modify and click Properties. Right-click the microwave link you want to use as template in the Map window. or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. The new link template has the same parameters as the one it is based on.3. or the Delete button to delete a user-defined field.2 Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template To add. In the Radio toolbar.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management • "Deleting a Microwave Link Template" on page 191 7.3. Therefore. Click the Fields button. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears. 3. by selecting the existing link template that most closely resembles the link template you want to create. To create a link template based on an existing link template or modify a link template: 1. Select Manage Templates from the list. Under Available Templates. You can also create a link template based on a link template selected in the Link Template Properties dialogue. click the arrow to the right of the list. you can create a new template by only modifying the parameters that differ. For information on the fields available in the open window. Click OK. The Properties dialogue appears. you can modify the properties of any link template. although it might be visible in the map window. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears. The new link template has the same parameters as the microwave link it is based on. 3. click the arrow to the right of the list. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears.6 Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map In Atoll. 2. To modify an existing link template: Under Available Templates.1 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template You can create a link template based on an existing microwave link. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. The new link template will be available in the template menu. Click OK. 7. 7. 5. 4. You can now create a new link template or modify an existing one: To create a new link template: Under Available Templates. The context menu appears. To create a link template based on an existing microwave link 1. modify or delete a field in the link templates: 1. the Properties button to modify properties. see "Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map" on page 191. Click OK. Note: If you add a field to the link templates. 4. you must add an equivalent field to the Sites table or the field will not be taken into account. If there is more than one link between the same sites or if there are two sites in close proximity. Select Manage Templates from the list. 7.5.5. it can be difficult to find the data object on the Data tab. you can access the Properties dialogue of a site or link using the context menu on the Data tab of the Explorer window. Select Save As A Template from the context menu. However. select the template you want to delete. Click the Delete button. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and links directly from the map. 2.5. clicking them in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select one link or site. In the dialogue that appears. 2. select the link template that most closely resembles the link template you want to create and click Add. 5. 4.

Select Tools > Data Audit > Microwave Data Check from the context menu.) - Undefined Records: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify if there are undefined multi-hops (i. Pattern attenuations are considered the same if they differ less than 1 dB. so you should choose information that you would want to always be visible. might be responsible for the planning for only one city. define the parameters of the audit: Frequency Consistency: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify: Frequency band definition: The minimum frequency must be lower than the maximum frequency. doing engineering and interference studies that calculate the entire network would not only take a lot of time. Other (XPIC. The Microwave Data Check dialogue appears. Antenna separation is a non-zero value when space diversity is used on a link.3.7 Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links Atoll allows to you to display information about microwave links in a number of different ways. see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24. it is not necessary. Tooltips: You can display information about each object.3. a complex microwave link planning project may cover an entire region or even an entire country. in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. 7. Consequently.e. The audit allows you to verify the consistency and validity of some data. see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22.Atoll User Manual Modifying sites and links directly on the map is explained in detail in "Chapter 1: The Working Environment": • • • • • • • "Displaying the Properties of an Object" on page 18 "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 19 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19 "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 19 "Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse" on page 20 "Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse" on page 20. You. excluded channels must belong to the list of channels and at least one channel must be available. or to distinguish inactive from active microwave links. etc. For example. multi-hops with no link).e. For information on defining the microwave link colour. the channels must belong to the selected frequency sub-band. undefined point-to-multipoints (i.): Select this check box if you want the audit to verify that: XPIFvalue of the equipment is a non-zero value when XPIC system is used on a link. You can choose to display more information than in the label. you can select "Discrete Values" to distinguish microwave links by frequency bands. For example. waveguides and frequency sub-band must be the same as the link frequency band and. you can restrict 192 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . • • 7. point-to-multipoints with no link). This enables you not only to display selected information. too much information will lead to a cluttered display. such as each site or microwave link. or unused repeaters. the antenna vertical and horizontal patterns must be correctly aligned at the extremities (Antenna patterns are correctly aligned when the horizontal pattern attenuation at 0° is the same as the vertical pattern attenuation at the pattern electrical tilt angle. 7. The following tools can be used to display information about microwave links: • Label: You can display information about each object. For information on defining the label. Microwave link colour: You can set the microwave link colour to display information about the microwave link. in the form of a tooltip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object.. 3. and when the horizontal pattern attenuation at 180° is the same as the vertical pattern attenuation at the 180° less the pattern electrical tilt angle. such as each site or microwave link. Frequency sub-band definition: The frequency band must be defined. the frequency defined must be within the frequency band limits. Click OK to perform the audit. including from fields that you add. 2. The label is always displayed. the frequency band of antennas. equipment. because the information is only displayed when you move the pointer over the object. however.. To perform an audit of the microwave link network: 1. - - List All Verifications: Select this check box if you want to display all verifications performed in addition to detected inconsistencies.8 Checking Data Consistency You can perform an audit of the microwave link network. Link definition: at least one direction must be selected.9 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document When you load project data from a database. For information on defining the tooltips.3. see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. including from fields that you add. Antenna Separation. but also to distinguish microwave links at a glance. the number of channels must not exceed the number of channels allowed by the equipment. Atoll displays the results of the audit in the Events Viewer. you will probably only modify the data in the region for which you are responsible. In the Microwave Data Check dialogue. In such a situation. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table.

A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between the transmitter and the receiver sites. You can filter sites and microwave links according to one or more fields. The diffraction attenuation is displayed above the peak. The context menu appears. "Studying Microwave Link Clearance" on page 194. For information on computation zones. Before studying a microwave link. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. At the top of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. You can combine a computation zone and a filter. with a green line indicating the line of sight (LOS). there are two ways of restricting the number of sites and microwave links studied. see "Filtering Data" on page 62. For information on filtering. you must configure its antennas. the following are explained: • • • • • • • "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. each with its own advantages: • Filtering the desired sites and microwave links You can simplify the selection of sites and microwave links to be studied by using a filter. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. Along the profile. In addition. or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteria in several fields. When a repeater is inserted on the link. The altitude (in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the distance on the horizontal axis. this causes attenuation with diffraction displayed by a black vertical line (if the propagation model used takes diffraction into account). For information on graphic filters.1.1 Viewing a Microwave Link Profile In Atoll. "Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values" on page 197 7.1 Displaying the Path Profile In this section. "Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options" on page 194. its frequency band. it is possible to set a focus zone in order to filter the results displayed in reports (link budgets. 2. "Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights" on page 200. limits the number of sites and microwave links to be calculated. You can make a microwave link profile analysis using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. and the propagation model you want to use. equipment. In Atoll. Select Engineering > Profile Analysis from the context menu. see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31. ) in The Profile tab provides an interactive real-time display of the microwave link profile from site A to site B or vice versa. 7. "Zooming In on the Profile" on page 194.4. you can select which part of the profile you want to display: • • • Site A ==> Site P Site P ==> Site B Site B ==> Site P © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 193 . 7. see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 71. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. interference). if the signal meets an obstacle. If you do not want to display the clutter along the profile. you can make a profile analysis of a microwave link. You can create a graphic filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vector polygon.4 Analysing the Path Profile Microwave links can be analysed in terms of the terrain and clutter profile between the two extremities in Atoll. The main peak is the one that intersects the Fresnel ellipsoid the most. it is displayed in the profile tab by a vertical line in the profile. It includes any passive repeaters composing the link. For information on focus zones. To open the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window: 1. "Printing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 195. This enables you to keep only the sites and microwave links with the characteristics you want to study. in order to create a very precise selection of the sites and microwave links to be studied. the following are explained: • • • "Displaying the Path Profile" on page 193. • Setting a computation zone Drawing a computation zone to encompass the sites and microwave links to be studied. You can also open Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window using the Profile Analysis button ( the toolbar. you can clear the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab. Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. "Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile" on page 195. "Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater" on page 201.4. In this section. which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management engineering and interference studies to the sites and microwave links that you are interested in and generate only the results you need.

The context menu appears. 7.4 Zooming In on the Profile Atoll enables you to zoom in on the profile. When displaying the clearance.4. Select Display Options from the context menu. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. On the Display tab. You can also display another Fresnel ellipsoid when a secondary antenna is installed at the receiver. 8. it indicates the tilts/direct ray.4. and whether you want to display the antenna beamwidths for transmitter and receiver sites. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. while the second related to the second k value is shown in red. The Profile Display Options dialogue appears. 7.1. To hide or display the Fresnel zones: 1. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. 2. the clearance is referred to as F. These values can be set through the advanced options available by clicking the button ( ) opposite the Link list. the azimuths. and the loss from this obstacle is displayed on the top of this perpendicular. F’1 for the first k factor value and F’2 for the second one. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. When the percentage of the Fresnel ellipsoid is different from 100%. 3. Click OK. Select the microwave link to analyse. a green coloured line is drawn from the transmitter to the first obstacle’s highest point. A perpendicular from the horizontal axis is also drawn to mark the obstacle that introduces the highest loss in the link. you can define the percentages of the first and second Fresnel ellipsoids to be shown. 194 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can manage the horizontal and vertical axes graduations and the manner in which the curvature of the Earth is displayed. F1 for the first k factor value and F2 for the second one. On the Reflection tab. Here. Atoll displays the clearance (%) and the penetration of the Fresnel zone for each value of k.1. 7. 6. Select the microwave link to analyse. To manage the display of Fresnel ellipsoids. To open the microwave link profile display options window: 1. The context menu appears. the clearance is referred to as F’. 2. 4. If there are obstructions in the path of the microwave link that introduce losses.Atoll User Manual • • • Site P ==> Site A Site A ==> Site B (profile "broken" at Site P) Site B ==> Site A (profile "broken" at Site P) When a second repeater (Q) is inserted on the link. this feature is described in detail in the Optimising microwave link antenna heights section. 7. 5.3 Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options The Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool enables you to manage parameters that affect the display of the profile. either the unobstructed reflection paths only or both obstructed and unobstructed ones. You can left-click the Link button in the Profile tab and choose from the context menu: • Properties to open the microwave link property dialogue.1.4. Select Display Fresnel ellipsoids from the context menu. both first and second. The first Fresnel ellipsoid corresponding to the first k value is shown in blue. A common mode of operation would be to display the first Fresnel zone at 100% and the second at 60% so as to depict the minimum clearance requirement directly on the profile. you can hide or display the Fresnel zones between the two extremities of the microwave link. On the Ellipsoid and Antenna Beamwidth tab. Note: When 100% of the Fresnel ellipsoid is displayed. the profile display options include Site Q as well.2 Studying Microwave Link Clearance The Profile tab allows you to display the clearance along the entire link profile. you have to access the Display options dialogue for the profile and modify these parameters. You can view the microwave link profile with two different values of the earth curvature factor (k factor). you can define whether the reflections should be displayed or not. 4. and the angles of incidence for both antennas. and reflection paths you want to display. 3. In addition. it is also possible to modify the antenna heights at both extremities manually and automatically.

the following are described: • • "Using the Profile Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 195 "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196 7. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. The window displays the following information for each selected point along the profile: Distance: The distance from the transmitting site. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. 4. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed to open its context menu. To display the details on a point of a microwave link profile: 1. Total Height: The altitude of the ground level more the clutter height. The context menu appears. Click OK to print. Drag to the opposite corner. Select the microwave link to analyse. 4. 3. Click in the profile on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. This value is relative to the line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point. 3. 7. 3. To restore the initial profile: 1.1. Select Zoom In from the context menu.4. The context menu appears.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management To zoom in on the Profile: 1. 5. Select the microwave link to analyse. A separate window opens displaying details of the selected point.5 Printing a Microwave Link Profile You can print a microwave link profile.6 Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile You can display the clearance values of a microwave link using either the Profile tab or the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool. Pointer Altitude (z): The altitude of the pointer. 3. 5. The context menu appears. 5.113). Select the microwave link to analyse. Atoll zooms in on the selected area. When you release the mouse button.4.1. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. To print the content of the Profile tab: 1. Fresnel Ellipsoid Radius: The radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. 6. 4. In this section. Select Display the current point information from the context menu. Open the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. 2. 4. - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 195 . Select the microwave link to analyse.1.1 Using the Profile Tab to Display Data of Each Point You can use the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to display details on each point along the microwave link profile.4. (see Figure 7. Select Print from the context menu. 7. 2. Move the pointer along the profile. 2. Atoll displays the details in a separate window. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. Distance up to Optical Path: The clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. 2. Select Actual Size (1:1) from the context menu.6.

When you place the pointer on this special cursor.2 Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point You can use the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to view all the profile analysis data for each selected point along the microwave link profile. To display the profile data using the Values tab: 1. The Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window displays the following values for each point along the profile: Distance (m): the distance from the transmitting site. Atoll displays the details in a separate window. Clutter: the clutter class. Distance: The distance from the transmitting site.4. You can also access the Values tab by opening the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window and clicking the Values tab. Total Height: The altitude of the ground level more the clutter height. the pointer changes ( ) to indicate the location of the current point along the profile in the map window. This value is relative to the bottom of the Fresnel ellipsoid and is given for the first k factor value. 2. Ellipsoid Penetration (%): the penetration of the current point in the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (percentage of the ellipsoid radius penetrated by the current point). the following information appears in a tool tip: Coordinates: The cursor coordinates given in the display coordinate system. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. Pointer Altitude (z): The altitude of the pointer 7. 196 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Fresnel Ellipsoid Radius: The radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. This value is relative to the line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point. Clutter Height (m): the clutter height from clutter height files if available or from clutter class file. Select Engineering > Values from the context menu.6.1. Clearance: The clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. Fresnel Radius (m): the radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value Clearance (m): the clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value.113: Microwave Link Analysis window – Profile tab As as you drag the pointer along the profile in the Microwave Link Analysis window. Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to display details on each point along the microwave link profile. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. Height (m): the altitude of the ground level (from DTM files). This value is relative to the line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point. Category: the clutter category assigned to each clutter class when configuring the propagation model.Atoll User Manual Figure 7. The context menu appears.

4.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Figure 7. In this section. Figure 7.115). 3. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196.1.1 Editing Profile Values Some values (e. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. Right-click the profile view. You can edit the following columns: Altitude: The altitude (DTM) Clutter: The clutter class Clutter Height: The clutter height Category: The clutter category. where X is the highest resolution of clutter class and DTM maps. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 197 .7. 2. the altitude. Edit the content of the table by entering the value directly in the field.. Click the Edit button.4. 2.7 Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values The geographic details provided on the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool are stored in a table.115: The Values tab when editing.114: Penetration and clearance values on the Values tab 7. To edit the profile values in the table: 1. the following are explained: • • • • • • • "Editing Profile Values" on page 197 "Displaying Reflection and Vegetation Zones" on page 198 "Copying and Pasting Profile Values" on page 199 "Exporting Profile Values" on page 199 "Importing Profile Values" on page 199 "Saving the Edited Profile Values" on page 199 "Refreshing the Profile Values" on page 199 7. 3. the clutter height and the clutter category) can be edited in the table or using the mouse. To edit profile values using the mouse: 1.1. You can modify some profile values at any point along the profile and immediately check the impact of these modifications in the Profile tab. The resolution of the information given depends on the resolution of the geographic data: information is given every X metres.g. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. the clutter class. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished updating the table.

The pointer changes ( ). Drag the point to its new clutter height. Select Zoom In from the context menu. Clutter Height: Select Clutter Height if you want to edit clutter heights (see Figure 7.118). i.118: Clutter classes in edit mode. Clutter: Select Clutter if you want to edit clutter classes (see Figure 7. Drag to the opposite corner and release the mouse button. Click the point you want to edit. i. Atoll zooms in on the selected area. 7. The pointer changes ( ). Drag the line to change the area with the corresponding clutter category. Drag the point to its new altitude. Category: Select Category if you want to edit clutter categories (see Figure 7. 7. ii. you can view reflection areas and vegetation zones. ii. Figure 7.117: Clutter heights in edit mode. Drag the line or point to change the area with the corresponding clutter class. Figure 7. Click the point you want to edit. In the profile. 5.119). You can see lines separating the clutter categories. i.1. 198 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . i. click one of the four corners of the area you want to select.119: Clutter categories in edit mode.116). ii. Figure 7. 6. Click the line or point.117).4. The pointer changes ( ).Atoll User Manual 4. The clutter classes are displayed with lines separating the clutter classes if clutter heights are defined or with points if clutter heights are not defined. Select one of the following columns in the table: Altitude: Select Altitude if you want to edit ground altitudes (see Figure 7.2 Displaying Reflection and Vegetation Zones When you are editing the profile as explained in "Editing Profile Values" on page 197.116: Ground in edit mode. The pointer changes ( ).7. ii. Click the line. Figure 7.

4. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. Define export settings as explained in "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49.1. To copy and paste profile values in the table: 1.3 Copying and Pasting Profile Values You can copy and paste some profile values such as altitude. clutter classes. Click the Edit button. Reflection areas are displayed with a pattern ( ). Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. Copy into the selected cells: To copy the contents of the clipboard into the selected cells. 7.1. Only editable values (i. If you want. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. 2. 2. Display Slopes: Select Display Slopes to view the slope of the selected reflection area.1. The Import dialogue appears.7.1. press CTRL+U.4. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7.115).115). Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. 2. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. clutter heights. and clutter categories in the table.6 Saving the Edited Profile Values When you edit the data in the profile table. 7. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. Define import settings as explained in "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50. the changes are not automatically saved and will be lost if you select another link or if you close the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. Click the cell with the data you want to copy and drag to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. 3.5 Exporting Profile Values You can export the entire table or selected columns to ASCII text files (in TXT or CSV formats) and MS Excel files.1. you can save them in the link properties. and clutter categories) can be imported.e. 7.115).4.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management To display reflection areas and vegetation zones: 1. To export profile values: 1. Click the Edit button. Click the Edit button. Click the Actions button and select Export. click the Actions button and select Paste. 2. 2. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. 4.4. 4.7. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 199 . 3. Click the Edit button.7 Refreshing the Profile Values You can restore the original link profile values from the geographic data diles and replace the edited values. 3. To restore the original link profile values: 1.115).. clutter heights. press CTRL+D. To import data into the table: 1. 3. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. 2. 7. Click the Actions button and select Import.115). Display Vegetation Zones with Foliage: Select Display Vegetation Zones with Foliage to view zones with foliage that Atolltakes into account when calculating vegetation losses. The Export dialogue appears. To copy the contents of the bottom cell of the selection into the other cells. Click the Edit button. Click the Actions button and select Commit Values to Link.7. Hide Zones: Select Hide Zones to hide reflection areas and vegetation zones. To save the edited profile values: 1. Vegetation zones without foliage are displayed with with a pattern ( ). Zones with foliage are displayed with with a pattern ( ). - - 7.7. You must already have selected Display Reflection Areas if you want to Display Slopes. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. altitude. Right-click the profile view and select one of the following options from the context menu: Display Reflection Areas: Select Display Reflection Areas to view reflection areas taken into account in the reflection analysis and reflecting paths.115). Display Vegetation Zones without Foliage: Select Display Vegetation Zones without Foliage to view vegetation zones without foliage that Atolltakes into account when calculating vegetation losses. clutter classes. 3. 4.4 Importing Profile Values You can import data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into the table of the Values tab. To copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells. Click the Edit button.7.4.

from the context menu. Atoll allows you to calculate and adjust the microwave link antenna heights at the two extremities to their optimum values. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ). Select Save Hx and Tilt. This parameter can be defined on the Other Properties tab of the Properties dialogue for each site. where "x" is either "a" or "b" depending on the site. When defined. You can enter one or two values of the k factor and define for each of them a target clearance. ). Select Save Hx and Tilt. Open the Profile tab as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. 200 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded. you can modify or optimise microwave links antenna heights. To modify the antenna height: 1. Atoll will determine antenna heights in order to fulfil the highest constraint. 2. The context menu appears. 3.4. you can modify antenna heights using the mouse or enter new values and see the clearance and penetration parameters displayed. ) (the pointer changes ) and drag it up or down to modify the antenna 3.Atoll User Manual 3. Click the button beside the microwave links list ( 3.4.4. Open the Profile tab as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193.2 Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights When designing a microwave link network. 2.4. these height limits are displayed on the Profile tab. When defined. In this section. Using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. The context menu appears. from the context menu. 2. 7.1 Adjusting Microwave Antenna Heights Using the Mouse You can use the mouse to modify the antenna height of the extremity of a microwave link on the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. In Atoll. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ).3 Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights Atoll enables you to automatically calculate antenna heights in order to avoid reflections and profile obstructions. Select Optimisation Method from the context menu. 7.2. 7.2. This parameter can be defined on the Other Properties tab of the Properties dialogue for each site. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ) and enter the exact antenna height. Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded. you should define the antenna height to avoid any obstruction of the line-ofsight signal and reflections. Select the optimisation method: Clearance Condition Method: The Clearance Condition Method is based on the clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. Atoll saves the current antenna height and tilt in the microwave link. Atoll saves the current antenna height and tilt in the microwave link. The context menu appears. 4.2. To modify antenna heights using the mouse: 1. where "x" is either "a" or "b" depending on the site. 4.2 Defining Microwave Antenna Heights You can enter a new height for the antenna of the extremity of a microwave link on the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. 7. To perform an automatic optimisation for an antenna: 1. Click the Actions button and select Refresh Geo Data. 4. The Height Optimisation dialogue appears. these height limits are displayed on the Profile tab. Open the Profile tab as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Click the antenna height pointer ( height. the following are explained: • • • "Defining Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200 "Defining Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200 "Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200.

The context 8.Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna position. you can always restore the last antenna height value by selecting Restore from the same menu.. Hb and Tilts from the context menu to save the current antenna heights and tilts in the microwave link.1 Description of a Passive Repeater The parameters of a passive repeater can be found in the passive repeater’s Properties dialogue. you can estimate the growth of vegetation (Projected tree or foliage growth). Choose Optimise to calculate the optimum antenna heights for both extremities. a "repeater" is always a "passive repeater. This parameter can be defined in each site properties dialogue (Other Properties tab). 5. 6. Right-click the the antenna height pointer ( menu appears. Click OK.Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna position as offsets with respect to the site location. Select Save Ha.e. 10. 7.. Furthermore. If defined. if you wish. Site Site B or Repeater P Site B). . These advantages mean that passive repeaters can be placed in relatively inaccessible areas.3 Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater Passive repeaters are normally used to redirect the microwave signal around an obstruction. In Atoll. Select the Take into account the reflection areas check box and define the range of k factor values (kmin and kmax) to be used during the antenna height optimisation if you want to take reflection into consideration. There are two main types of passive repeaters. Passive repeaters divide the radio path into two branches.3. Passive repeaters have the following advantages over active sites: • • • • • No power is required No regular road access is required No equipment housing is needed They are environmentally friendly Little or no maintenance is required. 7. The following sections explain how Atoll models passive repeaters. . respectively. X and Y.4.4. normally having different lengths and different inclinations. these are called back-to-back antenna passive repeaters. the following are explained: • • • "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. It enables you to calculate optimum antenna heights for two-site microwave link profiles (e.." In this section. 7. Atoll can model both types of passive repeaters and provide you with access to all the relevant parameters. The context menu appears.e. Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded. Due to this property of passive repeaters they are also referred to as "beam benders". respectively. Antenna Position: You can modify the Antenna Position. i. these height limits are represented on the Profile tab. it is not accessible for microwave link profiles involving one or more repeaters. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets. 9. each traversing different type terrain. distortions and rain etc. "Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 202. This implies different propagation conditions for these two branches concerning fading. This feature is only available for unbroken microwave link profiles. "Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater" on page 202. This enables you to prevent the antenna height from being modified during the optimisation process. You can also use the context menu to lock the antenna height.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management If you have out-of-date clutter class maps. Only the height of the other antenna (assuming it is not loced as well) will be calculated to optimise the link. these are often called passive reflectors or plane reflectors. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: • The General tab Name: The passive repeater name. Site: The site where the repeater is located (from the Sites table). Minimum Diffraction Loss Method: Atoll determines antenna heights to minimise diffraction losses due to the main obstacle (i. The first type is where two antennas are placed back to back connected by a short feeder cable.g. Atoll takes this value into account for clutter categories from 6 to 14 and adds it to the clutter height. Dx and Dy. it calculates antenna heights to get a clearance of 60% of the first Fresnel zone). Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 201 . The second type is a plane reflector type passive repeater where a flat metal reflector is used to redirect the signal. ) for the site whose antenna height you want to optimise.

Height: The reflector height. The passive repeater’s Properties dialogue appears. the appear- ance of the button changes ( ). Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The Passive Repeaters table appears. the azimuth and tilt angles towards the site of transmission. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.3. define these parameters: Surface: The surface area for the repeater. The context menu appears. Right-click the Links folder. If you are creating a new passive repeater: a. You can open the Passive Repeaters table by rightclicking the Links folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Passive Repeaters > Open Table from the context menu. ) next You can access the Properties of the selected site and frequency band by clicking the Browse button ( to the corresponding item. see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47. Atoll lists waveguides that operate in the frequency band defined for the repeater.4.3 Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse In Atoll. the azimuth and tilt angles towards the site of reception. Select Passive Repeaters > New from the context menu.Atoll User Manual Frequency Band: The operating frequency band of the passive repeater and its position relative to the site. 3. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new passive repeater or modifying an existing passive repeater. Modify the parameters described in "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. Select Passive Repeaters > Open Table from the context menu. or modifying several existing passive repeaters. 7. Under Antenna2. By default. • The Type tab Type: Define whether the passive repeater is a reflector type or back-to-back antenna type repeater. Tilt: The tilt angle towards the site of transmission. e. you can create a passive microwave repeater and place it using the mouse. 2. you can add it to an existing site. 4. define the antenna height. For a reflector type repeater. you can choose the waveguide and define the length. you can choose the antenna. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the model field. Right-click the passive repeater in the Passive Repeaters table. You can access the properties of a passive repeater. through the passive repeater’s Properties dialogue. 202 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . define the antenna height. When the filter is active. The context menu appears. and specify whether the antennas have a crossed polarisation. Select Record Properties from the context menu. Under Waveguide. For information on copying and pasting data. f. b. Right-click the Links folder. The Passive Repeaters New Element Properties dialogue appears. you can choose the antenna. Tip: If you are creating several passive repeaters at the same time. When you create a passive microwave repeater.3. You can click the Calculate button ( - For a back-to-back antenna type repeater. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.2 Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater You can modify an existing passive repeater or you can create a new passive repeater. Azimuth: The azimuth towards the site of transmission. b. If you want. d. You can click the Calculate button ( ) to automatically calculate azimuth and tilt angles. c. define the following parameters: Under Antenna1. you can do it quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Passive Repeaters table.4. In this case. described in "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. The context menu appears. 7. Atoll proposes in the list waveguides compatible with the selected antennas as defined in the Antenna/Guides Compatibility table. d. or have Atoll automatically create a new site. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. To create or modify a passive repeater: 1. c. Click OK. ) to automatically calculate azimuth and tilt angles.

© Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 203 . Ideally. Click the arrow next to New Repeater button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar. Note: You can also insert a repeater in a microwave link by selecting Insert Repeater from the microwave link’s context menu and then clicking on the microwave link where you want to insert the repeater. Microwave link classes are used to differentiate microwave link types and give target performance objectives to microwave links. a microwave link should be completely reliable 100% of the time. Select Panel Reflector or Back-to-back Antennas from the menu according to the type of passive repeater you want to create. A microwave link reliability analysis determines whether a designed system will operate successfully. Before analysing the microwave link reliability. Click the map to place the repeater. "Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis" on page 208. terrain roughness calculations. Defining global parameters is explained in "Global Parameters" on page 156. 4. 7. Atoll automatically creates a new repeater in the Passive Repeaters table and a new site in the Sites table that is assigned to the newly created repeater. Site A Site B Bi-directional link without repeater: 2 sections. this performance level is never achieved over any microwave link due the continuously changing propagation conditions and possible problems in the equipment. to a group of microwave links. You can select it from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. see "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. You can assign a link class to all microwave links at once." A section can be: One of the directions of a bi-directional link. One of the trajectories towards a repeater (if any). diffraction loss. or to a single microwave link.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Atoll permits a maximum of 2 passive repeaters in a single microwave link. Site B Site Q. define the microwave link class and related performance objectives and set the calculation parameters. you must assign a propagation model. You can assign a propagation model to all microwave links at once. Site A Site P. Assigning a propagation model is explained in "Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects" on page 151. Assigning a link class is explained in "Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives" on page 154. In practice. Site Q Site P. Setting link parameters is explained in "Link Parameters" on page 159. the following are explained: • • • "Analysing a Single Microwave Link" on page 203. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and computes losses along the microwave link path.5 Analysing Microwave Link Reliability Reliability is the general term used to refer to the quality and availability of a microwave link obtained through assessing its performance according to the criteria defined in the relevant performance objectives. Site P Site A. or to a single microwave link. The following terms are used in Atoll for passive repeaters and related parameters: • • Passive repeaters (maximum 2) along a microwave link are named repeater P and repeater Q respectively. you can study it to test the effectiveness of the set parameters. antenna parameters. 7. The repeater is placed on the map. To create a passive microwave repeater and place it using the mouse: 1. The operating frequency band of the repeater is the frequency band assigned to the microwave link and azimuth(s) for the repeater antenna(s) are calculated according to the directions of the two sections of the microwave link. Site Q Site B. to a group of microwave links. Calculation parameters include global parameters applied to all microwave links and link parameters such as geoclimatic and reliability parameters defined per link. Reliability analysis takes into consideration the parameters of fade margin. For information on defining the properties of the new microwave passive repeater. "Analysing Microwave Links" on page 206. 2. A part of the link is called a "Section. or directly on the map. In this section.5. average annual temperature.1 Analysing a Single Microwave Link When you create a microwave link. transmission and reception parameters and other miscellaneous losses. 3. radio parameters. This allows you to predict the received signal level and to calculate the thermal fade margin. Select the microwave link. The objective of carrying out reliability analyses is to estimate the non-availability or outage of a microwave link on annual basis and to determine the quality of connection over worst case or average monthly scenarios. represented by the site symbol ( ). Site A Site B and Site B Site A Bi-directional link with 2 repeaters: 6 sections. For example: Unidirectional link without repeater: 1 section. Site P Site Q.

microwave transceiver equipment installed at both sites with details such as the models. gains and diameters. This tool generates a comprehensive report for each studied microwave link as detailed below.1 Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins Atoll allows you to determine the margins required by the microwave link to meet the performance objectives defined in the link class. the worst month quality (in % of time) and the average annual availability (in % of time). the equipment installed at each site (name. The microwave link required margins are listed on the EPO tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. Rx Level: The reception level information at the receiver including the Bit Error Rate and the receiver sensitivity. capacities and configurations. • • 204 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . the results provided in this report are calculated in real-time. Therefore.1. a global estimation of the cut off duration over an average year taking into account both link quality and availability. passive repeater gains (if any). locations. You can also open the Report tab by opening the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window and clicking the Report tab. capacity. calculated and required thermal fade margins and calculated and required composite fade margins) and the required total margin. This will open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window with the EPO tab displayed by default. The Report tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window contains the link budget for the link being studied. data rates. site names. the link length. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. antennas used at both sites with their respective models.2 Calculating a Microwave Link Budget Atoll provides you with a detailed microwave link budget tool.1. ESR. modulation used. the thermal fade margin. total losses comprising filter losses. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. digital hierarchy employed. diameters and near fields. Microwave link budget results on the Report tab include the following information: • Summary: Under Summary. Link specifications: Information relating to the microwave link design. gains. tilts. you can read whether quality and availability objectives have been reached for both directions of the link and the specified BER values. location. the following are explained: • • • • • "Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins" on page 204 "Calculating a Microwave Link Budget" on page 204. rate. To generate a microwave link budget for a single microwave link: 1. Select Engineering > Report from the context menu.5. Quality (Clear-Air): The data related to the margin calculations and results (acquired margin against dispersive fading. BBER). minimal channel bandwidth and the configuration).5. The context menu appears. a snapshot from the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window in order to facilitate direct visualisation and printing of the link profile with the link budget report and an extract of the map window showing the studied link and the surrounding area. Choose Engineering > Required Margin from the context menu. Transmission parameters: Transmission related parameters for both extremities of the microwave link including the EIRP. a basic budget including the operating frequency band. and immediately display the impact of the modifications in the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window (both Profile and Report tabs). it is possible to modify the properties of the microwave link.Atoll User Manual In this section. azimuths. 2. ESR.e. the operating frequency band of the microwave link. or the calculation parameters. whether discrimination reduction and enhancements are taken into account). • • • • • 7. heights. i. margin against discrimination reduction. how much you have to decrease or increase the maximum power and the required antenna diameter. Performance Objectives taken into account: The performance objectives considered in the margin calculations. 2. azimuths. models for availability and quality calculations. quality objectives (SESR. transmitter powers. This is a comprehensive report and can be configured as described in the Configuring the performance objectives report display section. margin against enhancements. BBER) and availability objectives (SESR. its length and calculation parameters (propagation model. Microwave link required margin results on the EPO tab include the following information: • Link Specifications: Including the information about the sites at the two extremities of the link (name. This tab contains the report generated after the calculation of required margins. and altitudes for both extremities. tilts. diversity antennas and repeater back-to-back antenna details such as the models. minimal channel bandwidths. compatible digital hierarchy. altitude and coordinate system). heights. modulation used. ATPC effects.. Moreover. Requirements: the required output power you can compare to the current output power displayed in brackets. their relevant required error performance objective probabilities and required margins) and the total required margin. repeaters (if any). "Configuring the Link Budget Report Display" on page 206. To calculate the microwave link required margins: 1. The context menu appears. "Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters" on page 205. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. Availability (Rain): The data related to the margin calculations and results (the error performance parameters. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. "Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report" on page 206 7. any modifications made to the profile of the microwave link using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window or any modifications in the geography of the microwave link profile made through the Values tab are taken into account in the link budget on the Report tab. Furthermore.

shielding losses. if enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored. the channel. select the Take Space Diversity into Account check box and define the following: Distance between antennas: Define the distance between main and diversity antennas. selective fading.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management connection losses. ESR. When you have finished modifying analysis parameters. availability model. These results include availability of hot standby. if it is a main channel or a standby channel or a channel for frequency diversity. polarisation at both sites. 3. connection losses. effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. Reception parameters: Reception related parameters for both ends of the microwave link including the bit error ratios and sensitivities at the receivers. click the Actions button. and the port and the channel for which the calculations have been performed (maybe the central frequency of the microwave link’s operating frequency band). click one of the following: Save in the Link: Click Save in the Link to save these changes in the microwave link properties and click OK to close the dialogue. temperature. ESR (required). Take Frequency Diversity Into Account: If you want to take frequency diversity into account. rain attenuation. The context menu appears. and waveguides and cable losses. OK: Click OK without clicking Save in the Link to check the impact of the selected options on the report without modifying the microwave link properties. space diversity and frequency diversity). port connection losses. losses due to dry air. diffraction losses. 3. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab).. the outage probability. fading due to discrimination reduction. epsilon and the type of path (LOS or NLOS). thermal noise. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. earth curvature factor (k). or change calculation models. click the Actions button. BBER (required)). Port Configuration: Port configuration related parameters for both directions. outage probability due to faults for the average year and the outage period for the average year and the performance objective. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). Select Analysis Parameters for the Hop. Select Calculation Parameters. 2. select the Take Frequency Diversity into Account check box and define the number of separation channels.5. PL percentage. Gain difference between antennas: Define the difference of gain between both antennas. The Hop Analysis Parameters dialogue appears. Unavailability due to rain: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to rain in both direction. port connection losses. the required C/I and total losses at reception comprising filter losses. Propagation: the nominal received signal level. free space loss. climatic factor. quality model. propagation results for both directions of the microwave link including total attenuation. details for the worst month (dispersive fading. antenna losses and tropospheric scattering. BBER (required)). shared losses. These results include the outage probability. the nonoutage probability and the outage period for the average year. BBER). Inverse Polarisation: Select the Inverse Polarisation check box if you want to take inverse polarisation into account. You can define the studied port. details for the average year (rain fading. and waveguides and cable losses. 7. losses due to water vapour. BER values. BBER). shared losses. Unavailability due to faults: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to equipment failure. The context menu appears. vegetation attenuation (displayed for information only because it is taken into consideration in total attenuation). etc. You can set the following options: Take Space Diversity Into Account: If you want to take space diversity into account. The Microwave Radio Link Properties dialogue appears. the polarisation. ESR. To modify calculation parameters for analysis: 1. 2.3 Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters You can study the influence of some parameters on the microwave link engineering by changing some calculation options. enhancement forecast). the transmission and reception port numbers. the outage probability. Non-quality due to multi-path (Clear-Air): Results depicting the quality of the microwave link in both directions. Calculation parameters: Parameters according to which the calculations for the link budget have been performed such as the calculation methods used (propagation model. • • • • • • • • This is a comprehensive report and can be configured as described in "Configuring the Link Budget Report Display" on page 206. for specified BER values and when interference is not taken into account.1.01% of time). overflow thresholds. rain intensity (exceeding 0. 4. and availability objectives (SESR. Click OK to check the impact of the selected options on the report. shielding losses. the corresponding frequency. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 205 . performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). For further information. ESR (required). fading due to discrimination reduction). for specified BER values and when interference is not taken into account. the nonoutage probability and the outage period for the average year. To modify analysis parameters for a link: 1. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). the port circulator and attenuator losses. Geoclimatic parameters: Information about the type of environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating. quality objectives (SESR. water vapour density. These results include the outage probability. interference.

When you create a computation zone. Before calculating one or more link budgets.1 Setting a Microwave Link as Active Once microwave links are set up within a network. Atoll makes its calculations on all microwave links in the subfolder that are active and filtered and for the entire extent of the geographical data available. you can print them or export them. In other words. If there is no computation zone defined. Select Print in order to print the link budget report.2. To restore the selected results as initially or to refresh the list of results available. d. 3. d. select its check box. Choose how to align the paragraph. by frequency band).1. click the Actions button and select Configure Report. select the Reset button.5. you can click Open in the Report Configuration dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. Atoll carries out the calculation for all microwave links in the subfolder that are active. To configure the report display: 1. click the Actions button in the window to open its context menu. To print or export the report: 1. you can decide whether or not to activate them. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30.2 Analysing Microwave Links Atoll enables you to calculate multiple microwave link budgets for a group of microwave links simultaneously. c. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). that are selected by the current filter parameters).5. b. select the AaBbYyZz button. b. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. The computation zone is used to define the area where Atoll carries out calculations. Microwave links in Atoll can be grouped in subfolders according to different property parameters (e. Click one style. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Report Configuration dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. When working with a large network. clear its check box. you can create a computation zone. To display a result. Click OK.g. The results are displayed in the form of a report. 7. Click the Contents tab. a.1. To hide a result. Centred and Align Right.4 Configuring the Link Budget Report Display You can configure the display parameters of the report generated under the Report and EPO tabs to display some or all of the parameters used in the calculations and results of the calculations with different styles.5 Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report After you have configured the reports displayed in the Report and EPO tabs.. The next time you configure a reflection analysis report.. b. availability and interference analyses and associated reports and statistics only take into account active microwave links (and not filtered 206 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click the Expand button ( ) to expand a result category. Select Export in order to export the link budget report in RTF format. 2. You can launch simultaneous link budget calculations for the microwave links grouped in a subfolder. To change the font. To restore the initial style. the following are explained: • • • • "Setting a Microwave Link as Active" on page 206 "Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report" on page 207 "Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets" on page 207 "Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity" on page 208 7. select the Reset button. Atoll reduces both the time and computer resources necessary for calculations. and intersect the computation zone. a. a. You can choose beween Align Left. Quality.e. Click the Style tab. the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network you are currently working on. By allowing you to reduce the number of microwave links studied.5. 4. For information on the computation zone. if you have drawn a computation zone. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. You will have to delete the computation zone if you no longer want to define an area for calculations. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). filtered (i.Atoll User Manual 7. The Report Configuration dialogue appears. c. In this section.5. 7.

see "Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll". click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder and rightclick the group of microwave links you want to set as active. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. For each microwave link that you want to set as active. Click Add. 2. For information on choosing and configuring a propagation model and calculation parameters. 3. The next time you configure a report. 7. from top to bottom. select the fields that you want to display in the report. To select a field to be included in the report. active microwave links are displayed in red ( links are displayed in grey ( ). select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. To set an individual microwave link as active: 1. Right-click the Links folder. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 207 . select the check box in the Activate column. To set more than one microwave link as active using the Links context menu: 1. The context menu appears. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. Select Active Link from the context menu. The Field Selection dialogue appears. you can set the propagation model and other calculation parameters. 2. Select the microwave links you want to set as active: To set all microwave links as active. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the microwave link you want to activate. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management microwave links). c. ) in the Links folder.2. To define the content of the link budget report: 1. The context menu appears. 4. ) to expand the Links folder. The transmitter is now active.2. 3. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. To set more than one microwave link as active using the Links table: 1. inactive You can set an individual microwave link as active from its context menu or you can set more than one microwave link as active by activating them from the Links context menu. 7. b. 4. 5. Once you have ensured that all microwave links are active. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.2 Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report Before calculating the link budget. Define the content of the report: a. The context menu appears. To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. To set a group of microwave links as active. The selected microwave links are set as active. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. Right-click the Links folder. you can define the content of the link budget report. 5. Select Link Budgets > Properties from the context menu. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. In the Field Selection dialogue. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Field Selection dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. Click OK to return to the Properties dialogue. Select Activate Links from the context menu. 3. In the Explorer window. Select Open Table.3 Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets You can calculate a link budget for all microwave links or for a group of microwave links. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. The Links table appears with each microwave link’s parameters in a second row. 4. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( 3. 2.5. The Properties dialogue appears. you can click Open in the Properties dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. right-click the Links folder. The context menu appears. The context menu appears.5. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. To change the order of the fields. Click OK to validate the selection of fields to be displayed in the report.

3. 7.5. 7. Atoll automatically detects invalidity of the calculation when starting calculations and makes the recalculation. a multi-hop is managed as a group of microwave links. Select Link Budgets > Force Calculations from the context menu. to construct a microwave connection over areas that do not provide line-of-sight and to transfer signals through microwave links over large distances. The context menu appears.4 Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity Link budget calculations performed for a group of microwave links (i. "Setting all Microwave Links of a Multi-Hop Link as Active" on page 210. In this section. 3. unavailability due to rain. "Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link Using the Mouse" on page 209. 208 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . In the last case (e.. Atoll removes existing calculations. To recalculate the link budget for a subfolder of links under the Links folder: a. and geo-climatic parameters. you can quickly perform a link budget for a group of links. This report lists the results for all studied microwave links in the selected directions (site A site B/site B site A) and for the defined BER values. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewer window. Right-click the Links folder.g. So. Atoll enables you to perform end-to-end reliability analysis over multi-hops. etc. microwave multi-hop links are used for two purposes. A microwave link can be common to more than one multihop as well. In this section. you must force Atoll to recalculate.3 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis AtollMulti-hop microwave links. It also details the propagation calculation (total attenuation) and the calculations related to link engineering (quality (Clear-Air).5. etc. Right-click the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to calculate link budgets. and recalculates the link budget. All the results are provided in both the directions of the microwave link being studied.). the following are explained: • • • • • "Creating a Multi-hop" on page 209. the fade margin. Atoll only recalculates non-existent and invalid microwave links.. To force Atoll to recalculate the link budget: 1. In general practice. 2. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. antennas and equipment installed). Atoll indicates the characteristics of the link (sites. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.). Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. various losses. 2. the signal level received. and its quality and availability. The context menu appears. Select Link Budgets > Calculate from the context menu. Notes • • You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the toolbar.2.Atoll User Manual To perform link budget calculations on a group of microwave links: 1.e. including valid ones. Calculations can become invalid for different reasons: • • • If a calculation method or option has been changed. reception parameters (sensitivity. It displays the transmission parameters (EIRP. Atoll displays the link budget report. are sets of two or more microwave links that are interconnected to get to a destination. The context menu appears. For the first two reasons. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder. "Mapping Multiple Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links Globally" on page 210.5. If microwave link properties have been modified. 3. unavailability due to faults). the following are explained: • • "Creating Multi-hops" on page 208 "Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis" on page 210 7. various losses. outage probabilities) are saved in the Atoll document. calculation options. "Creating a Multi-hop on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 209. or multi-hops.1 Creating Multi-hops In Atoll. if you added a new clutter class map). b. You can access each microwave link’s properties by double clicking the corresponding record in the report. To recalculate the link budget for the entire Links folder: Right-click the Links folder. If geographic data maps have been updated. once calculations have been performed for all the links. intermediate results such as propagation.

7.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 7. Select the Links tab. 4.1. 11. 2. you can view and modify the class properties by clicking the Browse button ( Comments: Enter any comments for this new multi-hop. - 6. The Properties dialogue appears. The Multi-hops folder opens. 3. Multi-Hops Class: Select the multi-hops class from the list. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 209 . Select the Data tab of the Explorer window.3. Right-click on the Multi-hops folder.3. The Microwave Radio Links folder ) to expand the Multi-hops folder.1. Click on the map to create the first site of the multi-hop link. Once you have selected a multi-hops class. Select Add a Link from the context menu. Enter a number in the Order column to set the position of this link in the multi-hop. On the map. b. Click the button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. c. 10. ). The end site of the preceding link is considered to be the start site for the next link within a multi-hop link. The pointer changes ( ). 2. Click on the map in each place you want to end a link and start a new link. 3.5. 9. in the map window. Select a link from the Link column. The context menu appears. Open the context menu of the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link: Either a. 5. b. b. Or a.5. Atoll uses this information with the multi-hop length to calculate the performance objectives required for the multi-hop.1 Creating a Multi-hop To create a new multi-hop link using the Multi-hops folder: 1. click the line of the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link. Right-click on the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link.3 Creating a Multi-hop on the Map Using the Mouse To create a new multi-hop link using the mouse: 1. By default. 7. where "X" increments with each instance of a multi-hop link. The next microwave link in the multi-hop links series is initialised based on the parameters of the preceding one (by inversing the site parities). The pointer shape changes to 3. Select New… from the context menu. Enter or modify the following fields on the General tab: Name: The Name field is filled automatically by Atoll. Assign links to the multi-hop: a. Double-click at the location you want to define as the end of the multi-hop link. d.2 Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link Using the Mouse To add a microwave link to a multi-hop link using the mouse: 1. Click OK. The context menu appears. Click the Expand button ( opens. Atoll names the newly created multi-hop link in the following manner: "Multi-hopsX". Click OK. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens. 2. The Multi-Hops New Element Properties dialogue appears. Right-click on the multi-hop link.1. The context menu appears. Right-click the new multi-hop link and select Properties from the context menu. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Multi-hops folder opens. Note: The Other Properties tab will appear if you have defined additional fields in the Multihops table. Atoll creates an empty multi-hop link in the Multi-hops folder. The microwave link is added to the list of links forming the multi-hop link and assigned an order automatically. In the map. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Multi-hops folder. 7. 8. 4. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. Click the Multi-hop button ( ) on the toolbar. click the microwave link you want to add to the multi-hop link. but can be modified.3.5.

The interference can generate a fading (called reflective fading) that can lower down the received signal. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.3. A reflected signal that can reach the receiver with enough strength and with a certain delay as compared to the direct signal can generate interference. Reception characteristics: reception thresholds. 2. you can modify. Right-click the multi-hop that you want to analyse. BBER) compared to the required performance objectives and unavailability due to faults comprising annual outages due to faults and annual outage period. 5. and change the order of the links that make up a multi-hop link. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links. 7. Quality and availability analyses only take into account active microwave links and not inactive or filtered microwave links). are also supported in the calculation.6 Studying Reflection Studying reflection is essential to designing any microwave link network. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. To perform an end-to-end reliability analysis over a multi-hop link: 1. such as optic fibre links.2 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis Atoll enables you to perform end-to-end reliability analyses over multi-hop links. The Multi-Hop Links table appears. and polarisation of each transmitting site. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. active microwave links are displayed in red ( ) in the Multi-Hops folder. total length of the multi-hop link. This calculation is based on the ITU-R 530-5/8/10 recommendations. and passive repeaters. Note: Links within a network that are part of multi-hop links but are based on other technologies. containing all the multi-hop links and their corresponding microwave links. inactive links are displayed in grey ( ). channels. 3.Atoll User Manual The sites that define the extremities of a multi-hop link can be already existing sites. Select Deactivate Links to make all microwave links of the multi-hop link inactive. In Atoll. monthly and annual outage periods. delete.1. Atoll will create new sites automatically at the location you click. sub-band. 210 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 7.3. 7. In the Explorer window. Multi-hop link budget (both directions): Clear-air quality and unavailability due to rain including total outage ratio. 4. quality indicators (probabilities of SESR. 4. margins. To change the activity status of all microwave links of a multi-hop: 1. transmitters. The End-to-End Analysis dialogue appears.5. Summary: Atoll indicates if quality and availability objectives have been reached for both directions of the link. 2. Select Mapping Between Multi-hops and Links from the context menu. Right-click the multi-hop link whose activity status you want to set. 7. To map multiple links to multi-hop links: 1.1. In this table. Atollcalculates the reflection point using 2-Ray model. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. ) to expand the Multi-Hops folder. 4. Select Analysis from the context menu. Expand the Multi-Hops folder by clicking the button 3.3. It contains the following information: Multi-hop link characteristics: the microwave links forming the multi-hop link. The context menu appears. Do one of the following: Select Activate Links to make all microwave links of the multi-hop link active.5.5. The context menu appears. Transmission site characteristics: the frequency band. 2. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the Multi-Hops folder. quality (percentage over a month). add.5 Setting all Microwave Links of a Multi-Hop Link as Active You can activate or deactivate all microwave links belonging to a multi-hop link. ESR.4 Mapping Multiple Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links Globally Atoll allows you to map multiple microwave links to the multi-hop links . If no site exists. availability (percentage over average year) and failures (percentage over year). The context menu appears. you can display reflection areas along the link profile and analyse the location of the reflection point and its impact on the received signal level. Click the Expand button ( 3.

see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 151 Reflection point can have different locations as the k factor vary during the day. For information on assigning clutter categorries to clutter classes in the propagation model properties. 4. Atollcolours the pattern and highlights the corresponding unobstructed reflected path if there is one. The context menu appears. the reflected signal is not obstructed). Obstructed reflected signals are represented with orange dashed lines. Right-click the Profile tab. it is not based on the defined clutter categories. select the Reflection tab. To display reflection areas: 1. if there is a reflection point within the reflection area. select the Display tide levels check box in order to display the height variation due to tides above the sea water clutter category. you have to check if this zone is a reflection area and in this case. Therefore. For information on defining the range of k factor values. The reflection can create destructive interference. 3.e. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 211 . Display the critical reflection zone when k factor varies: Select the Display the critical reflection zone when k factor varies check box if you want to display the reflection zone regardless of clutter categories. Display the microwave link profile as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193.1 Displaying Reflection Atoll displays reflection areas along the profile and provides information about the interference generated by the reflected signal. Select Display Options from the context menu. The reflection does not create destructive interference. Right-click the Profile tab. Click one reflection area. Display all the paths: Select the Display all the paths check box if you want to display all possible reflected signals within the reflection area. Under For the selected area. 3. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. Atolldisplays reflection areas and unobstructed reflected signals calculated for the first k factor value defined in the Profile tab. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. the following are explained: • • • "Displaying Reflection" on page 211.6. you can select the following options: Display the reflections for the k factor range: Select the Display the reflections for the k factor range check box if you want to display unobstructed and obstructed reflected paths calculated for the defined range of k factor values. 2. - 6. 7. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. Display the reflection plan: Select the Display the reflection plan check box in order to display the reflection slope. The context menu appears. You can display additional information regarding reflected paths.e. The option is automatically selected after you have displayed reflections as explained in the paragraph above. This one is used to determine the reflection point. 4. In this section. Select Display Reflections from the context menu. Red: The reflection point is within the reflection area and the reflected signal is received at the receiver side (i. Then. "Solutions Against Reflections" on page 215. To display additional information: 1. you can select the following options: Display the specular reflection point: Select the Display the specular reflection point check box if you want to display reflection areas along the link profile and unobstructed reflected paths. For information on defining the range of k factor values. it is not obstructed). 2. Display the obstructed reflections: Select the Display the obstructed reflections check box if you want to display obstructed reflected signals. Under Display tide levels. 5. The reflection zone is determined from antenna heights and ground altitude at the transmitter and receiver sites. "Analysing Reflections" on page 212.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Clutter categories are taken into account in the reflection study and must be assigned to clutter classes in the microwave propagation model properties before analysing reflections along the profile. - 7. Under For All Reflection Zones. The colour indicates if the reflection can generate destructive interference. For information on defining the height variation. The Profile Display Options dialogue appears. The reflection does not create destructive interference. or the reflection point is out of the reflection area. Interference can be destructive when the reflection point is located within the reflection area and the reflected signal is received at the receiver side (i. Green: Either there is no reflection point. Display the microwave link profile as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Reflection areas are represented with a hashed pattern and unobstructed reflected signals by orange lines. In the Profile Display Options dialogue. the reflection analysis has to be performed for different k factor values. Orange: The reflection point is within the reflection area but the reflected signal is obstructed.

Latitude: The site position on the y-axis. Coordinate System: The display coordinate system set in the . 7.99% of the average year in millimetre per hour. The Report tab contains the following sections: Summary: The Summary part provides information on the impact of the reflection on the direct signal. fresh and sea water clutter categories.6. "Slightly wet or moderatly dry" is used for rural open. Right-click the reflection area.Atoll User Manual Note: Reflection paths and reflective surfaces can only be visualised and analysed over unbroken microwave link profiles. The Study of reflections and diversity window appears. Geoclimatic Parameters: You will find geoclimatic parameters defined for the studied microwave link: Ground Characteristics: The Ground Characteristics part contains the following information: - - - Reflection area geometry: The Reflection area geometry part contains the following information: 212 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . i.e. the following are explained: • • • "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. "Very dry" is considered for built-up area and dry ground clutter categories. Total Reflection Area Length: The length of the selected reflection zone and the total length including all reflection zones into brackets.atl document. Right-click the Profile tab. It consists of two tabs: the Report tab displayed by default and the Attenuation Graphs tab. Select the Report tab. It depends on the roughness. Earth Curvature Factor (k): The k factor defined in the Profile tab. For more information on how the ground type is determined.01% of the average year): The rainfall observed 99.2 Analysing Reflections In this section. "Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 214. Link Specifications: You will find data on the studied microwave link: Longitude: The site position on the x-axis. Critical specular reflection point: This indicates if there is a reflection point for the selected reflection zone. 6. Rainfall Rate (exceeded during 0. tree covered and cryosphere clutter categories. Atoll recommends some solutions to minimise the reflection effects such as changing the receiver antenna tilt or implementing diversity techniques. Select Display Reflections from the context menu. Display the microwave link profile as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Click a reflection area. see the Technical Reference Guide. 2. 7. Terrain Roughness Factor: The terrain roughness factor. "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. The context menu appears.. Length: The microwave link length. Frequency Band: The operating frequency band selected in the microwave link properties. Select Reflection and Diversity Analysis from the context menu. Ground Type: It can be either scattering. Relative Humidity: The relative humidity in %. Humidity Type: The humidity type depends on the clutter category. 7.1 Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report Atoll provides detailed analysis of reflection areas and their impact on microwave links. Geoclimatic factor (K): The K factor which models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate.2. Height: The site altitude. The context menu appears. If required. Water Vapour Density: The water vapour density in grams per cubic metre. Effective Coefficient Reflection: The reflection coefficient of the reflection area. or reflecting. it displays optimal antenna and frequency separations to be used with diversity techniques for the k factor defined in the Profile tab. the profile should not include repeaters. the length of the link and the transmitter antenna height above the reflection area.6. In addition. Grazing angle of reflected ray: The grazing angle and the incidence angle of the reflected path on the reflection slope plane are complementary angles. 4. Temparature: The average temperature (in °C) of the zone in which the microwave link operates. 3. 5. "Water or very wet" is considered for wet terrains. or intermediate. Angle at A between direct and reflected ray: The angle between the direct and the reflected paths at Site A. To display a detailed analysis of reflection areas: 1.

Diversity Frequency: The second channel frequency when diversity frequency is used. Attenuations: The Attenuations part contains the following results calculated for the k factor value defined in the Profile tab: Reflected Signal Attenuation: The attenuation of the reflected signal at the receiver side. Environment Type: The terrain type as defined in the link properties. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. Specular Reflection Factor: The specular reflection factor. if the reflected signal is obstructed. ESR. kavg and kmax). The signal is attenuated by the receiver antenna (Attenuation due to antenna discrimination) and because it is reflected by the ground (Attenuation due to ground reflection). Atmospheric Pressure: The atmospheric pressure (hPa) as defined in the link properties. - - Additional results appear if. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. <Custom Fields>: The custom fields available in Links table. For information on configuring the channel to be studied. Conductivity: The terrain conductivity in S/m.9%): the k factor value observed 99. kavg and kmax). The value is calculated according to refractivity conditions defined for the link. Terrain Irregularity: The terrain irregularity. The value is defined in the link properties. you can select the following information: - - Geoclimatic Parameters: Under Geoclimatic Parameters. Direct Signal Attenuation: The attenuation of the direct signal at the receiver side. The signal attenuation is due to the receiver antenna (Attenuation due to antenna discrimination) and refractivity (Attenuation due to refractivity). Polarisation: The antenna polarisation. The value is read in the Geoclimatic Parameters file. Effective Earth Curvature Factor (ke at 99. space diversity and frequency diversity). Total Attenuation: The total attenuation of the reflected signal at the receiver side.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Angle at B between direct and reflected ray: The angle between the direct and the reflected paths at Site B. you select the corresponding check boxes: Summary: Under Summary. Availability Objectives: The availability objectives (SESR. Rain Height (0°C isotherm): The height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm. Equipment: The equipment parameters for both link extremities (SiteA and SiteB). - Link Specifications: Under Link Specifications. Fog: the fog intensity in %. Median Value of the k factor: the k factor value observed 50% of time. ESR. Terrain Profile: The terrain profile. This is the sum of the attenuation due to antenna discrimination and the attenuation due to ground reflection. if enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored. calculation on the diversity antenna. when configuring the report as explained in "Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 214. Quality Objectives: The quality objectives (SESR. Climatic Factor: The geoclimatic factor as defined in the link properties. availability model. you can select the following information: Detailed Study: You can read if the specular reflection point is within the reflection area. diversity and back antenna properties for both link extremities (SiteA and SiteB) and repeaters (SiteP and SiteQ). Sites: Sites related parameters such as the pylon height. quality model. Antennas: Main. the support type and custom fields. you can select the following information: - - Transmission: Under Transmission. Surface Reflection Coefficient: The surface reflection factor. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. you can select the following information: - - Calculation Parameters: Under Calculation Parameters. Percentage of time when the refractivity gradient (<100m) is <-100N-units/km: The percentage of the average year where the refractivity gradient value of -100N-units/km is not exceeded. Calculated Channel: The calculated channel. Climatic Zone: The climatic zone as defined in the link properties. Maximum Possible Attenuation: The strongest attenuation experienced by the direct signal at the receiver side.9% of time. Calculation Methods: The calculation methods used (propagation model. Refractivity Gradient: The refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface (in N-units/km) as defined in the link properties. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. you can select the following information: - Ground Characteristics: The Ground Characteristics part contains the following information: - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 213 . BBER) to be considered for the link. BBER) to be considered for the link. <Field Selection>: The results listed after can be calculated for three k factor values (kmin. <Field Selection>: Atoll recommends optimal antenna and frequency separations to be used with diversity techniques for three k factor values (kmin. and if the reflected and direct signals arrive in phase. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. Permitivity: The terrain permitivity.

<Field Selection>: Select the <Field Selection> check box in order for Atoll to display the results listed after for three k factor values (kmin. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Report Configuration dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. 3. To restore the initial style. Click a style. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. 3. Reflected path delay: The delay of the reflected path in ns.6. clear its check box.6. Antenna heights above the reflection plan: The antenna heights at SiteA and SiteB above the reflection plan. To configure the reflection analysis report: 1. Path difference (direct/reflected) (m): The difference in path length between direct and reflected signals.3 Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters You can study the influence of some parameters on the reflection analysis. The Report Configuration dialogue appears. To hide a result. c. d. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. Centred. Reflection area geometry: Under Reflection area geometry. Click the AaBbYyZz button to change the font. Tau(kmax)-Tau(kmin): The difference between Tau calculated for kmax and Tau calculated for kmin. b. If the difference exceeds or equals 1. you can select the following information: 7. Click the Style tab. Under Analysis Mode. 2. or Align Right. you can access and modify the global calculation parameters and the microwave link parameters. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand a result category.2 Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report You can configure the display parameters of the reflection analysis report to display some or all of the parameters used in the calculations and results of the calculations with different styles. 7. select the reflection area to be considered in the reflection analysis: 214 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select the paragraph alignment by selecting Align Left. If the difference is lower than 1.2. you can select the following information: - - Attenuations: Under Attenuations. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. Click the Actions button and select Configure Report. Zone Location: The distances from Site A at which the reflection area starts and ends. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. Click the Actions button and select Analysis Parameters for the Hop. c. 2. a. b. 4. you can click Open in the Report Configuration dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. Tau corresponds to the difference in path length between direct and reflected signals expressed in wavelength. select the Reset button. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. Location of the specular reflection point: The distance of the specular reflection point from Site A. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. d. click the Reset button. Click OK.2. 5. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. a. then there is at least one minimum that is experienced with the critical k factor range and diversity may be implemented depending on how well the signal is reflected and whether there is significant discrimination against surface reflections from one or both of the antennas.Atoll User Manual Divergence Factor: The divergence factor. To display a result. The next time you configure a reflection analysis report. Click the Contents tab. To restore the selected results as initially or to refresh the list of results available. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. then there is no minimum (destructive interference at the receiver side due to the reflected signal) that is experienced with the critical k factor range and diversity can be avoided. kavg and kmax). kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. kavg and kmax). In addition. <Field Selection>: Select the <Field Selection> check box in order for Atoll to display the results listed after for three k factor values (kmin. select its check box. To define reflection analysis parameters: 1. The Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue appears.

4. see the Technical Reference Guide. Click the Actions button and select Link Properties. Atoll provides you with a tool you can use to check whether the recommended antenna height and frequency separations are valid over a range of k factor values. 5. In this case. Under Effect due to tide level above sea water. Atoll displays the difference of signal strength between the direct path and the reflected path (i. To access the global calculation parameters: 1. select the Take into account height variations of check box and define the corresponding height. The Study of reflections and diversity window appears. or by using diversity techniques with the antenna/frequency separations recommended in the Summary part of the reflection analysis report. The transmission frequency. 9. You can choose between the Simplified Method and the Method with linear regression on the area. 7. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. see the Technical Reference Guide. To access the microwave link parameters: 1. Atoll takes into account all reflection areas along the profile in the reflection analysis. for different k factor values (kmin. select the method to be used to calculate antenna heights above the reflection plan. By default. You can also use it to optimise the height and frequency separations. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 215 . For more information on these calculation methods. for different receiver antenna heights and transmission frequencies. effects of reflections can be minimized by carefully positioning the antenna heights as explained in "Studying Reflection" on page 210. 6. by using the antenna discrimination capabilities and tilting the receiver antenna as indicated in the Summary part of the reflection analysis report. 8. select the method to be used to calculate the indirect signal amplitude. For more information on these calculation methods. Click the Actions button and select Display Options. 2. Under Amplitude calculation of the indirect ray. Under Terrain Height Irregularity. 3. 2. Select Reflection and Diversity Analysis from the context menu. Select the Attenuation Graphs tab. Under Refractivity. Click the Actions button and select Calculation Parameters. you can identify whether ground reflection is a problem for the link. kmax Factor: the highest k factor value to be considered in the reflection analysis. Atoll makes the reflection analysis on the selected reflection area. select the range of k factor values: kmin Factor: the lowest k factor value to be considered in the reflection analysis. 5. You can choose between the Simplified Method and the Method with equivalent reflection coefficient. You can also display the difference of signal strength between the direct path and the reflected path as a function of: The k factor. 7. To check the recommended antenna height and frequency separations: 1. Under Antenna heights above the reflection plan.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Calculation on the selected reflection area: If you select this option. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. For more information on these calculation methods. the Standard Deviation method and the Interdecile Range method. Right-click the Profile tab. Click a reflection area. the attenuation of the reflected path compared to the direct path) as a function of the antenna height. The Graph Parameters dialogue appears.3 Solutions Against Reflections At the end of the reflection analysis. for different k factor values (kmin.6. kmax and the kavg) and receiver antenna heights. It consists of two tabs: the Report tab displayed by default and the Attenuation Graphs tab. Click OK. 2. kmax and the kavg) and transmission frequencies. Global Calculation on all reflection areas: If you select this option. select the method to be used to calculate terrain height irregularity.e. The context menu appears. Display the reflection areas as explained in "Displaying Reflection" on page 211. 4. 6. see the Technical Reference Guide. You can choose between the Root Mean Square method.

Atoll 7. 11. 9. select the graphs to be displayed and how you want to colour them. 3. to be considered for the analysis. Under Vertical Axis. Click a reflection area.e. the k factor and the transmission frequency. 216 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . define the antenna height values. Atoll displays the keff factor at 99% (i. define the k factor values. 8.120: Study of Reflection and Diversity – Attenuation Graph 7. 7. 9.Atoll User Manual Figure 7. 6. Max Bound: The upper value on the horizontal axis. The Study of reflections and diversity window appears. 10. Under k Factor Selection. You can redo the analysis by considering other separations. There are various ways to accomplish this particular objective. Main Antenna and Other Height. The optimal separations calculated for the different k factor values are displayed. To optimise the antenna height and frequency separations: 1. You can redo the analysis by considering other separations.separation) and the other height (main antenna height + separation) values. For each new link created in any environment. each containing a fixed number of specific frequencies. Thus. 2. then divide each plan into a high segment and a low segment. The context menu appears. Click OK. Select the Variable Definition tab. 5. the median k factor value). It is common experience that such modifications in existing network designs introduce a number of interference problems that could have been avoided during the initial design of the same network. there is a list of interference conflicts created due to this newly introduced link. 11. Right-click the Profile tab. Min Bound: The lower value on the horizontal axis. 8.e. 10. Diversity Frequency. to be considered for the analysis. A logical approach is to define a number of specific frequency plans. The value calculated for the kavg factor is used to initialise the diversity antenna height (main antenna height . The process of frequency selection in microwave systems is accomplished with interference minimisation being the most important objective. Under Graph Selection. frequency planning in microwave networks is of extreme importance not only for interference reduction at the initial stage of the network but also to envisage for future modifications in the network. to be considered for the analysis.7 Planning Microwave Link Channels Planning microwave link networks involves a number of areas of analysis. 4. Click OK. Diversity Antenna. You can redo the analysis with these values. Under Receiver Antenna Height Selection. It consists of two tabs: the Report tab displayed by default and the Attenuation Graphs tab. For information. Under Horizontal Axis. Display the reflection areas as explained in "Displaying Reflection" on page 211. You can choose between the receiver antenna height. Click the Actions button and select Display Options. The optimal separations for the different k factor values are displayed. either select the Automatic Bound Calculation check box in order to let Atoll automatically determine the upper and lower values of the vertical axis. The Graph Parameters dialogue appears. Select the Attenuation Graphs tab. kavg and kmax. They are automatically calculated by Atoll. Select Reflection and Diversity Analysis from the context menu. the k factor value not exceeded 99% of the average year) and the keff factor at 50% (i. you can select the following: Ordinate: Select what you want to display on the horizontal axis. Under Transmission Frequency Selection. Main Frequency and Other Frequency. or keep clear the Automatic Bound Calculation check box and define these values manually (Max Attenuation and Min Attenuation). Select the Display tab. kmin. define the transmission frequency values. The value calculated for the kavg factor is used to initialise the diversity frequency (main frequency + separation) and the other frequency values (main frequency + 2*separation).

Select the operating frequency bands for which you want to check the parities of the microwave link extremities. 3. Click OK. with each pair having minimum separations. Choose an icon for the different cases. 5. 2.1. ) ) 3.7. the transmitter and receiver get assignments in opposite segments. Lower: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower half-band. Click the Expand ( ) button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Atoll checks the site parities of all the microwave links working at the selected frequency bands. and which intersect the computation zone. Channels Distribution per Site and Generate Report from the context menu. 7. 6. "Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search" on page 218. "Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products" on page 220 7. Atoll takes into consideration the sites of microwave links which are active. The Channel Distribution dialogue appears.7. you can hide them by clicking the Channel Arrangement ( button again. Right-click the Links folder. the following are explained: • • "Checking Site Parities on the Map" on page 217 "Creating a Report on Site Parities" on page 217. Click the Expand ( ) button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. To perform a site parity check and display the results on the map: 1.1 Checking Site Parities on the Map Atoll enables you to view the site parities on the map and thereby detect any possible parity conflicts. If the transmitter frequency is in the high block. To create a report displaying site parities: 1. 6.2 Creating a Report on Site Parities Atoll enables you to create a report displaying site parities. 2. You can also hide the site parities using the context menu. filtered (i. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. 5. You can also open the Channel Distribution dialogue using the toolbar by clicking the Channel Arrangement ( button. To hide the site parities using the context menu: 1. that are selected by the current filter parameters). 3. The context menu appears. Multiple: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower and upper half-bands. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. 4. Upper: The site is assigned frequencies from the upper half-band.1 Checking Microwave Link Site Parities You can verify the parity of sites either on the map or in a report. The context menu appears. results are displayed in the Channel Distribution table. When an assignment is made. The context menu appears. 8. In this section. the following are explained: • • • • • "Checking Microwave Link Site Parities" on page 217. Select Interference > Channels Distribution per Site > Display on the Map from the context menu. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 217 ..1. 4. The Channel Distribution table contains the following information. 7. In this section. Unspecified: No frequency is assigned to the site. The Channel Distribution dialogue appears. Once Atoll has finished checking site parities. the receiver frequency will be in the low block and vice versa.e. Right-click the Links folder. Select the operating frequency band for which you want to check the parities of microwave link extremities. Right-click the Links folder. "Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse" on page 218. Select the Add to Legend check box in order to add the displayed icons to a legend. Click the Expand ( ) button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 2. 4. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. Once the site parities are displayed on the map.7. Select Interference and Hide Channel Distribution from the context menu. "Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser" on page 219.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management The idea is to basically allow frequency assignments to be made in pairs. 9. Select Interference. Enter the position of icons relative to the site (in dpi). Click OK to start the calculations. 7.

links using an adjacent channel to the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in blue and all others are displayed in grey. you can use the Search Tool to search for channels. To perform a semi-automatic channel search for a microwave link: 1. Site B .e. Links using an adjacent channel to the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in blue. For more information. Links using a channel which is completely covered by the selected channel are displayed in purple. To find a channel using the Search Tool: 1. If you selected the Same Sub-band Only check box.7.. Site: The name of the site. Select Planning > Semi-automatic Search from the context menu. Select a Sub-band. Upper: The site is assigned frequencies from the upper half-band. If you only want the links with the selected frequency Sub-band to be considered.e. The Semi-Automatic Channel Search dialogue appears. 2. Parity: The parity of the site. 5. 4. Latitude: The latitude of the site. 2. Links using a channel which overlaps the selected channel (i. Select a Channel. 7. 9. 6. Cause: Information provided for multiple parity only. see "Sorting Data in Tables" on page 60 and "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62. Select the MW Channel tab. Links using a channel which completely covers the selected channel are displayed in orange. links using a channel which completely covers the selected channel are displayed in orange. To display all channel arrangements available for the selected frequency band: Click the Frequency Plans button and resize the Search Tool window by dragging the lower border of the window. You can sort and filter data in the Channel Distribution table. Unspecified: No frequency is assigned to the site. 3. Click the Conditions tab and define the following: Link Directions to Calculate: Select the check box of the directions of the link to be calculated (Site A Site B. 3. 7. links using the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in red.3 Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search The semi-automatic channel search tool in Atoll ranks channels according to a definable cost function enabling you to find the best channel or channels to allocate to a microwave link. or both). Select a Frequency Band. or in the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab..7. The Search Tool window provides you with the following options: To restore the initial microwave link colours: Click the Reset Display button in the window. The context menu appears. select the Same Sub-band Only check box. links using the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in red.2 Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse In Atoll. Atoll gives the name of microwave links whose the site has a multiple parity. 8. select the Co-channel Only check box. The Search Tool allows you to view channel reuse on the map.Site A. partially covers the selected channel) are displayed in green and all other links are displayed in grey. Lower: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower half-band. If you selected the Co-channel Only check box. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. Links using the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in red. Click View > Search Tool. partially covers the selected channel) are displayed in green. Multiple: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower and upper half-bands. links using a channel which overlaps the selected channel (i. 7. All other links are displayed in grey.Atoll User Manual Frequency Band: The operating frequency band. links using a channel which is completely covered by the selected channel are displayed in purple. Click Search. This channel search is performed according to the interference received or transmitted per channel. Define in which half-band (Lower or Upper) you want to search for the channel. The Search Tool window appears. 218 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Longitude: The longitude of the site. If you only want the selected Channel to be displayed.

© Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 219 .7. Site A Half-Band: Select the frequency half-band to calculate (lower or upper) for the transmission site (the opposite half-band is assigned to the reception site). Click Calculate to launch the calculations. Whether automatic transmission power control on interfering signals is to be considered always on. Through this graph. For example. The interfered useful bandwidth (%): The parameter enables Atoll to filter the interferers.121): Figure 7. set the parameter to 3000%. The channels to be analysed: Select Use all the channels of the sub-band if all the channels can be allocated. You can enter or paste a list of channels. Under Channel Weightings. The minimum threshold degradation. by entering the first and last channel of the range separated by a hyphen. To open the spectrum analyser: 1. or horizontal and vertical). this is the percentage of the bandwidth to be considered when searching for interferers. - 5. This tool calculates and draws a graph representing the channels used along with the interference levels received on each channel of a half band.Received Interference Levels Option Atoll calculates the interference levels on each channel of the frequency half-band (lower or upper) of the microwave link and represents them as vertical lines on the graph. Atoll calculates a cost for each channel and each defined polarisation (either horizontal. If only some channels of the frequency sub-band can be allocated. 4. The red line shows the total noise level received on the interfered channel and each blue line represents the signal level transmitted on each interfering channel. always off or taken into consideration according to geometric correlation. in terms of the related costs.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Under Channels to Study: Frequency Sub-Band: Select the frequency sub-band from the list of available frequency sub-bands from to the frequency band of the microwave link being studied.121: The I Level on the Band tab . select Restrict the list of potential channels and define the channels available.4 Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser Atoll can display a channel usage histogram within any microwave link’s operating frequency band enabling you to allocate unused or less used channels where required. The results window displays the list of channels sorted in increasing order with respect to their corresponding costs. Click the Parameters tab and define: The earth curvature factor (k factor). In order to take into account all the potential interferers. you can find the channels with least interference levels in order to allocate them to microwave links. 2. Whether automatic transmission power control is to be considered on the useful signal. only the peak value is displayed on the graph. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. use the slider to define the weight given to the interferer and victim channels. - The link polarisation to be considered in the calculation. You can also enter a range of channels available. Select Planning and Frequency Spectrum from the context menu. or in the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. You can locate the channels on which there is the least or no interference and allocate these "free" channels where required. entering 20-22 corresponds to entering 20 21and 22. or a semi-colon. The I Levels on the Band tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7. Note: Each vertical line representing the interference level received at any channel depicts the peak signal value. or vertical. This implies that the best available channels. The maximum distance around the studied site to find potential interfering sites. If there are more than one interfering signals. are the ones listed on top of the list. or a space. It is then possible through this results window to allocate the best channels to the link by selecting the channels to assign and clicking the Commit button. the values must be separated with either a comma. 7. The context menu appears.

in general. You can change the following options at the top of the I Levels on the Band tab: Hop: Select the hop to be studied.The third-order intermodulation products belonging to the studied frequency band. Only frequenies within the frequency band of the studied microwave link are represented. The context menu appears... etc.). Actions > Calculation Parameters: Click Actions and then select Calculation Parameters from the menu in order to define global calculation parameters. Site A Site B or vice versa. at harmonic frequencies of either. To calculate third-order intermodulation products: 1.122): Figure 7.e. - - 220 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . For information on global parameters. The report contains the following information: .Site A. 5f1. 2.The transmission frequencies used by the site... - - 7.7. Select Planning and Intermodulation Products from the context menu. Site A Site B or vice versa. For information on global parameters. For information on displaying the received interference levels. and can therefore interfere with the desired behaviour.e. i. Atoll displays a tool tip when you place the mouse cursor on each vertical line.The studied site. . The I Levels on the Band tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7. then the output is a signal which includes a number of integer multiples of the input frequency (i. i. . Site A if you selected Site A . Actions > Properties: Click Actions and then select Properties from the menu in order to open the Properties dialogue of the studied microwave link. Actions > Properties: Click Actions and then select Properties from the menu in order to open the Properties dialogue of the studied microwave link.. 3f1.e. i. Actions > Calculation Parameters: Click Actions and then select Calculation Parameters from the menu in order to define global calculation parameters. Intermodulations: Select the Intermodulations option in order to display third-order intermodulation products. 2f1.e. They are important because they fall within the vicinity of the original frequency components.The reception frequencies used by the site. Actions > Report: Click Actions and then select Report from the menu in order to display a detailed report on the calculated intermodulation products. Actions > Print: Click Actions and then select Print from the menu in order to print the content of the I Levels on the Band tab. Received interference levels: Select the Received interference levels option in order to display channels used along with the interference levels received on each channel of a half band.122: The I Level on the Band tab . Frequencies are represented by vertical lines and reported on the horizontal axis. f1).Site B or Site B if you selected Site B . Atoll can calculate third-order intermodulation products. Non-linear systems generate harmonics. .Intermodulations Option Atoll shows the transmission and reception frequencies used by the studied site (i.5 Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products Intermodulation is caused by non-linear behaviour of the signal processing being used. . see “Global Parameters” on page 156. Intermodulation occurs when the input to a non-linear system is composed of two or more frequencies. green lines show the frequencies used for reception and red lines represent the third-order intermodulation products.Site A) and calculates the third-order intermodulation products for each transmission channel of the frequency half-band of the microwave link.Site B or Site B if you selected Site B . Site A if you selected Site A . meaning that if the input of a non-linear system is a signal of a single frequency (e. These new frequencies are called intermodulation products (IMPs). or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. see “Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products” on page 220.The studied microwave link and the selected hop. The signals of different frequencies are mixed together. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map..g. For information on displaying the third-order intermodulation products. .Atoll User Manual You can change the following options at the top of the I Levels on the Band tab: Hop: Select the hop to be studied. forming additional signals at frequencies that are not. The blue lines indicate the frequencies used for transmission. 4f1. see “Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser” on page 219.A snapshot of the I Levels on the Band tab. see “Global Parameters” on page 156.e.

Co-channel and adjacent channel interference. 7.e. Interference calculation between links and over the network can be performed for a single link as well as for any user-defined group of links. the interference in Atoll are calculated according to the ITU-R 452-11 recommendations. In this section. among all microwave links in the network. Otherwise. filtered (i. or the theoretical graphs if not. "Using IRF in Interference Calculations" on page 224.1 Defining IRF Graphs Manually You can define IRF graphs using the IRF table. you can change the interference computation method and base it on any of the propagation models available on the Modules tab. 7..1 Interference Reduction Factor As the name indicates. Atoll also considers the adjacency of frequency bands. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. and intersect the computation zone. microwave links with equipment operating frequency bands that overlap the operating frequency band of the microwave link being studied. By default. When studying the interference between transmission equipment and reception equipment. 2. "Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link" on page 224. If so. However. If the equipment manufacturer. see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136). Atoll uses T⁄I graphs to determine the IRF graph. Right-click on the Links folder. Polarisation and equipment signatures. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. These IRF graphs will be used to reduce the interference between victim and interferer microwave equipment when calculating interference. When calculating interference levels received for any microwave link.8. "Managing Interference Calculation Validity" on page 226. and receiver mask graphs defined at the equipment level or theoretical graphs.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Actions > Print: Click Actions and then select Print from the menu in order to print the content of the I Levels on the Band tab. Atoll determines the IRF graph during the process of calculating interference. If so. Atoll calculates all the microwave links in the group that are active. 7. IRFs defined on the IRF table if available T/I curve. The following sections describe the modelling of IRF in Atoll. are the active and filtered microwave links whose transmitter – receiver trajectory intersects or passes through the computation zone and whose interfering transmitter – interfered receiver distance is less than a given value. the following are explained: • • "Defining IRF Graphs Manually" on page 221 "Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant" on page 222. Atoll first verifies whether an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment-reception equipment pair in the IRF table. The context menu appears. "Displaying Interference on the Map" on page 226. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.e. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 221. Atoll verifies that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 221 . capacity and modulation.8.8 Analysing Interference Atoll includes comprehensive interference analysis features based on the ITU 452-11 recommendations. Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to determine the IRF graph. that are selected by the current filter parameters). received interferer signal threshold and geo-climatic correlation factor between links. Atoll searches for potential interferers in the network operating in the same frequency band. To create or modify an IRF graph: 1. For information on the computation zone. transmitter mask. i. the interference reduction factor (IRF) is a method of reducing interference on the received signal. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. or the theoretical "T⁄I" graphs if not (for more information on the theoretical graphs. You can set a number of interference calculation parameters including the calculation radius. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. Potential interferers.1. The IRF is a function of the difference between the central frequencies of the interfered signal and the interfering signal. always off or based on a calculated geometric correlation. Atoll uses it. In this section. You can define a protection level for each victim–interferer microwave transceiver equipment pair by defining the protection levels (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). capacity. Atoll proceeds as follows: 1. The following parameters are taken into account when calculating interference: • • • • • Interferer ATPC can be user-defined as always on. "Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links" on page 225. The IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the calculation of interference. 2.. or modulation are not the same.

Figure 7.Atoll User Manual 4. 222 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . To use the assistant to define IRFs: 1. 9. 2.2 Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define IRFs between transmission and reception transceiver equipment. When you select a frequency band and the equipment manufacturers with equipment that operate in the same frequency band. Figure 7. 4. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). use the row marked with the New Row icon ( ) 7.123: IRF table 5. Select Equipment > IRF > Open Table from the context menu. Select the name of the Victim equipment from the list. 6. The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the Properties dialogue. Under Protection values in the Properties dialogue. 7.123). Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The IRF Setting dialogue appears (see Figure 7. Select the name of the Interferer equipment from the list. The context menu appears.123). Select Equipment > IRF > Edit Grid from the context menu. Atoll presents the entries where the transmission and reception equipment present the possibility of interference. Click OK.8.124). Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. Note: If you are creating a new IRF graph. The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 7.124: IRF record Properties dialogue 8. Double-click in the left margin of the record to open its Properties dialogue (see Figure 7.1. Right-click on the Links folder.

Only equipment operating in the selected frequency band is displayed in the grid. Select the RX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. Select the Frequency Band from the menu. 6. Select Add Record from the context menu. d. To create an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: a. c. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Figure 7. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 223 . Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. b. 7. b. You can now define an IRF graph. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The IRF Calculation dialogue appears. Under Enter graph values. or create an IRF graph using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: To define an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. Select Calculate from Masks from the context menu.125: IRF Setting dialogue 5. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. Select the TX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. The context menu appears. Select Delete from the context menu. To delete an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. The context menu appears. The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the dialogue. 8. Click OK. The context menu appears. A dialogue appears. delete an IRF graph. b.

PL percentage. It uses either the graphs defined for equipment if available. . the corresponding frequency. It proceeds as follows: 1. shielding losses. transmitter powers.8. quality model. Under Transmitter Filter. When studying interference between a transmission equipment and a reception equipment. data rates. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. length. visualise the results in the form of reports and tables. .3 Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link Atoll enables you to carry out interference studies on any microwave link of the network. heights. capacity or modulation are not the same.Reception parameters: Reception related parameters for both ends of the microwave link including the bit error ratios and sensitivities at the receivers. . the transmission and reception port numbers. Atoll first checks if an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment . the channel. or the theoretical "T/I" graphs if not. azimuths. Define the calculation step stated in frequency spacing (MHz). rain intensity (exceeding 0. thermal fade margin.Geoclimatic parameters: Information about the type of environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating. average annual availability and whether quality and availability objectives are reached for both directions of the link and the specified BER values. connection losses. overflow thresholds. 2.Transmission parameters: Transmission related parameters for both extremities of the microwave link including the EIRP. water vapour density. or select a theoretical "transmission spectrum" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the transmission equipment. A dialogue containing details of the interference analysis appears. or the theoretical graphs if not. its operating frequency band. 224 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . modulation used. d. and altitudes for both extremities. diameters and near fields. microwave transceiver equipment installed at both sites with details such as the models. total losses comprising filter losses. You can easily define the parameters for studying each microwave link. e. If the equipment manufacturer. the IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the interference calculation. If defined. worst month quality. port connection losses and waveguides and cable losses. gains. site names. . The results are displayed in the following tabs: Qualitative summary: This tab contains a qualitative report generated after the study of interference over any given microwave link.Atoll User Manual c. . connection losses. Atoll uses T/I curves in order to calculate the IRF graph. tilts. antennas used at both sites with their respective models. It checks that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer. To perform an interference analysis on a microwave link: 1. the polarisation. azimuths. Select Planning >Interference Details from the context menu. Else. capacity and modulation. port connection losses.01% of time). 9. 7. heights.Summary: A summary of the link being studied. shared losses.Calculation parameters: Parameters according to which the calculations for the link budget have been performed such as the calculation methods used (propagation model. ATPC effects. a global link estimation taking into account both link quality and availability is provided over an average year. polarisation at both sites. availability model. The context menu appears. the required C/I and total losses at reception comprising of filter losses. digital hierarchy employed. Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to calculate the IRF graph. repeaters (if any). it uses it.reception equipment pair in the IRF table. 2. locations. Click OK to close the IRF Setting dialogue. temperature. select either "As Equipment" to use the receiver selectivity graph defined for the equipment. and the port and the channel for which the calculations have been performed (maybe the central frequency of the microwave link’s operating frequency band). Finally.Link specifications: Information relating to the microwave link design. and waveguides and cable losses. climatic factor.2 Using IRF in Interference Calculations As explained in "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 221. earth curvature factor (k). the port circulator and attenuator losses. thermal noise thresholds. gains and diameters. whether it is a main channel or a standby channel or a channel for frequency diversity. tilts. Click Run to calculate the IRF graph. . and view the interference connections between the microwave link extremities being studied and their interferers and victims respectively. it determines the IRF graph during the interference calculation. select either "As Equipment" to use the transmission spectrum graph defined for the equipment. 7.8. shielding losses. In this case. passive repeater gains (if any). g. Click OK. diversity antennas and repeater back-to-back antennas details such as the models. f. effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. shared losses. or in the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. or select a theoretical "receiver selectivity" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the reception equipment. minimal channel bandwidths. Under Reception Filter. It uses either the graphs defined for equipment if available. The report includes the following information: .Port Configuration: Port configuration related parameters for both directions. capacities and configurations.

losses due to water vapour. Right-click the Links folder. b. ESR. Interferer tabs: List the microwave links that are interfered by the given extremity of the microwave link being studied along with relevant details of the interference study. The Field Selection dialogue appears. antenna losses and tropospheric scattering. Unavailability due to failures: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to equipment failure. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. Interference results are displayed in the form of a report whose the content you can define. fadings due to discrimination reduction. you can define the content of the interference report. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. Interference Details: List the microwave links that interfere the given extremity of the microwave link being studied and the microwave links interfered by the given extremity of the microwave link being studied. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). threshold degradation for rain. select the fields that you want to display in the report. correlation area. interfered useful bandwidth) and results of interference calculations over the microwave link (threshold degradation. 7. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the average year. The context menu appears. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. fading due to discrimination reduction).4 Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links Atoll enables you to calculate interference for a group of microwave links simultaneously or over the entire network of microwave links. The Properties dialogue appears. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. Unavailability due to rain: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to rain in both directions.4. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). the outage probability. To select a field to be included in the report. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. Click Add. space diversity and frequency diversity). select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. epsilon and the type of path (LOS or NLOS). To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields. if space and frequency diversities are used. vegetation attenuation (displayed for information only because it is not considered in the total attenuation). details for the average year (rain fading. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 225 . 2. details for the worst month (dispersive fading. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. These results include the outage probability. ESR. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. rain attenuation. total interference in rain and C/I). 4. BBER). quality objectives (SESR. BBER (required)). Non-quality due to multi-path (Clear-Air): Results depicting the quality of the microwave link in both directions. maximum distance. - - - - - - - Victim tabs: List the microwave links that interfere the given extremity of the microwave link being studied along with relevant details of the interference study. nominal received carrier power level. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. the following are explained: • • "Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report" on page 207. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the average year.1 Defining the Content of the Interference Report Before calculating interference on multiple microwave links. 7. Propagation: The nominal received signal level. Select Interference > Properties from the context menu. losses due to dry air. diffraction losses. for the specified BER values and whether interference is taken into account. the outage period for the average year and the performance objective. These results include the outage probability. To define the content of the interference report: 1. the outage probability. Interference: Calculation parameters taken into consideration for the interference study (power control. To change the order of the fields.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management interference. Define the content of the report: a. selective fading.8. minimum threshold degradation. BBER (required)). "Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets" on page 207. outage probability due to failures for the average year. and availability objectives (SESR.8. whether enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored. enhancement forecast). total interference in clear-air. In the Field Selection dialogue. These results include availability of hot standby. for the specified BER values and whether interference is taken into account. free space loss. from top to bottom. ESR (required). 3. BBER). In this section. propagation results for both directions of the microwave link including total attenuation. ESR (required).

The details are displayed in a detailed interference results window including five tabs as described in "Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link" on page 224. To recalculate interference for a subfolder of links under the Links folder: a. by double-clicking the record in the report. you can click Open in the Properties dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. are saved in the Atoll document. Select Interference > Force Calculations from the context menu. The context menu appears. In the last case (e. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewer window. You can access each microwave link’s properties by double-clicking the corresponding record in the Victim/Interferer tabs. Click the microwave link on the map. 5. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Atoll automatically detects the calculation invalidity when starting calculations and makes the recalculation. You can also reset existing calculations and not recalculate interference afterwards by selecting the Interference > Reinitialise. To recalculate interference for the entire Links folder: Right-click the Links folder. you can display the result on the map. The next time you configure an interference report. including valid ones. Click OK to return to the Properties dialogue. b. If geographic data maps have been updated.2 Calculating Interference on Multiple Microwave Links You can Atoll to calculate interference levels for a group of microwave links. You can view details of each microwave link. 3. 7. Click OK. you must force Atoll to recalculate. You can also perform interference analysis over the entire network of microwave links.g. The context menu appears.6 Displaying Interference on the Map After calculating interference on a microwave link. if you added a new clutter class map). 2. If microwave link properties have been modified. To display interference connections on the map 1. The context menu appears. For the first two reasons. © Forsk 2010 226 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited .Atoll User Manual c. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Field Selection dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. Atoll displays the interference report. 7. So. 2. Notes: • • You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the toolbar. and recalculates interference.5 Managing Interference Calculation Validity Interference calculations. 1. Calculations can become invalid for different reasons: • • • If a calculation method or option has been changed.8.. Atoll removes existing calculations. 7. performed on a group of microwave links. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder.4. you can quickly perform interference studies for a particular link or a group of links. Atoll only recalculates non-existent and invalid microwave links. Right-click the Links folder. Right-click the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to recalculate interference. 3. Atoll removes existing calculations.8.8. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Click the Victims and Interferers Links button ( ) in the toolbar. Select Interference > Calculate from the context menu. once calculations have been performed for all the links. This report lists the results for all studied microwave links in the selected directions (site A site B/site B site A) and for the defined BER values. including valid ones. To force Atoll to recalculate interference: 1. 2.

You can define the ways in which interferer and interfered link extremities will be displayed on the map. 3. Double-click when adding the last link to complete the point-to-multipoint link. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder.1. 3. transmitters. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Right-click on the Links folder. "Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 230. "Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 230. The context menu appears. but can be modified. "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230. you can use the tool tip to show further information about each interference connection by placing the cursor on it. The pointer changes to ( ). using the point-to-multipoint link folder. A point-to-multipoint link is used when microwave links must be made between one site and a fixed number of other sites. To create a new point-to-multipoint link using the Point-to-Multipoint folder: 1. Atoll creates a new site where you click. 7. 3. To create a new point-to-multipoint link by using the mouse: 1. 2.1 Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link In Atoll. you can view and modify its properties by clicking the browse button ( ). "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 229. "Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally" on page 229. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. You can create a point-to-multipoint link in several different ways: • • • using the mouse. Select Interference and Display Options from the context menu. 5. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links. 2. Enter or modify the following fields on the General tab: Name: The Name field is filled automatically by Atoll. 4. "Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties" on page 228. Frequency Band: You must select a frequency band when you create a point-to-multipoint link. the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • • "Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 227. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 1.9. created automatically at the location you clicked on the map. Select New from the context menu. In this section. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 227 . Once you have selected a frequency band. This feature helps you in easily locating the microwave transmitters that are neither interfering with the link nor being interfered by it. The sites that define the hub or sites of a point-to-multipoint link can be already existing sites or new sites. The Point to Multipoint New Element Properties dialogue appears.1 Advanced Configuration Point-to-Multipoint Links A point-to-multipoint link is a set of microwave links connected to a hub. You can hide them by clicking the Victims and Interferers Links button ( ) again. The Interference dialogue opens. "Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub" on page 230. Click on the map to create the hub of the point-to-multipoint link. Atoll displays these interferers and victims for both extremities of the studied microwave link by inwards and outwards pointing arrows respectively. The context menu appears. When the interference connections are displayed on the map. "Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse" on page 231 7. 2. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window.9 7. 4. or editing the point-to-multipoint links table.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management The interferer and victim connections between the studied microwave link and its interferers and victims are displayed on the map. "Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active" on page 229. Click the New PMP button ( ) on the toolbar. a point-to-multipoint link can be managed as a group of single-hop microwave links (which can contain repeaters) connected to a hub. 4.9. If you do not click an existing site. and passive repeaters. Click the map at each place you want to insert a new link. You can choose different types of lines and colours to depict the interference connections on the map and select if you want to make them visible.

enter the details of the new point-to-multipoint link. Comments: Enter any comments for this new point-to-multipoint link. The context menu appears. The following fields must be filled: Name. of the point-to-multipoint table. and filter tools. The context menu appears. 2. 228 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Enter or modify the data on the following tabs of the Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue: General: The General tab lets you organise folders and assign or save a configuration. To add microwave links to the created point-to-multipoint link. Atoll names the newly point-to-multipoint link "PMP HubX". 6.2. Display: The Display tab allows you to manage the display of point-to-multipoint links depending on their attributes. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. you can view and modify its properties by clicking the browse button ( Type: Select the type: TDMA or FDMA. The Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue appears.1. and the contents of tool tips using the tip tool 6. sort. see "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-toMultipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230.1. 6.2 Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties You can modify point-to-multipoint link properties either individually or globally. the following are explained: • • "Modifying Global Properties" on page 228 "Modifying Individual Properties" on page 228. b. To add microwave links to the created point-to-multipoint link. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. A global setting is applied to all the filtered point-to-multipoint links. 5. 5.9. Click the c. The Point-to-Multipoint folder opens. You can also organise point-to-multipoint links by using Atoll’s group. 7. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. Click OK. 3. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens.Atoll User Manual Nodal Site: You must select the site that will be the hub of the point-to-multipoint link. button of the Point-to-Multipoint folder. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. d. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint link whose properties you want to edit. The context menu appears.2.1 Modifying Global Properties To manage the point-to-multipoint link properties globally: 1.1.2 Modifying Individual Properties To edit the properties of a point-to-multipoint link: 1. In the row marked with the new row icon ( ).9. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. Click OK.9. labels on the map. including user-defined fields. and Site. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Point to Multipoint table appears. 2. 7. 4. Atoll creates an empty point-to-multipoint link item in the Point-to-Multipoint folder. Antenna: Select the antenna and its parameters. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. In this section. 4. to manage the legend. By default. ). Click the button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. Table: The Table tab helps you to manage contents. Frequency Band. Select Properties from the context menu. 3. where "X" increments with the creation of each new point-to-multipoint link. . see "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-toMultipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230 To create a new point-to-multipoint link using the Point-to-Multipoint table: 1. Once you have selected the hub site. Open the context menu of the point-to-multipoint link: On the Data tab of the Explorer window: a. Select Open Table from the context menu. 7.

To add a microwave link to a point-to-multipoint link: 1. The context menu appears. The point-tomultipoint icon changes ( Note: ). The PMP/Link Mapping table opens. 2. Select PMP/Link Mapping from the context menu. b. Click the Expand button ( 3. In this table. 2. 5. Click the Expand button ( 3. delete.1.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management On the map: a.4 Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally To map microwave links to point-to-multipoint links globally: 1. 4. and add the links that make up a point-to-multipoint link. In the Explorer window. 7. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint icon. 2. 3. 4.9. and filter tools. Display: The Display tab lets you to select and customize the icon symbolising the point-to-multipoint link on the map. An Other Properties tab is available if you have added fields to the Point-to-Multipoint table. Right-click the Point-to-Multipoint folder. 2. The Properties dialogue appears. 7. Be sure to select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint link hub. you can modify. Right-click the PMP hub whose activity status you want to set. 7. Deactivate Links: Select Deactivate Links to make all microwave links of the point-to-multipoint link inactive. Select the Links tab. The context menu appears.5 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Before you can define a microwave link as part of the point-to-multipoint link. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 229 . edit. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. the microwave link must first exist between the site of the hub of the point-to-multipoint link and another site. In the row with the new row icon ( ). select a link. For information on creating links. 5. and delete microwave links. sort. Select Properties from the context menu. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder.3 Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active You can activate or deactivate all microwave links belonging to a point-to-multipoint link. Do not select the site icon ( ). Links: The Links tab lets you add. Select one of the following: Activate Links: Select Activate Links to make all microwave links of the point-to-multipoint link active. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. Enter or modify the data on the following tabs of the Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue: General: The General tab lets you organise folders and assign or save a configuration. 4. The context menu appears. Select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint link hub whose properties you wish to change. Click OK.9. containing all the pointto-multipoint links and the corresponding microwave links. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. You can also organise multi-hops by using Atoll’s group. 3. 6. The Properties dialogue appears.1. see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. ) to expand the Point to Multipoint folder. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. active microwave links are displayed in red ( ) in the Multi-Hops folder. Right-click the new point-to-multipoint link and select Properties from the context menu. The microwave link is added to the point-to-multipoint link. 7.1. inactive links are displayed in grey ( ). To change the activity status of all microwave links of a point-to-multipoint link: 1.9.

Consequently. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link to which you want to add a microwave link.1. On the map. Select Delete from the context menu. The microwave link is added to the list of links forming the point-to-multipoint link. 230 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click the Expand button ( 3. On the map. The context menu appears. Or a. the height.9. Deleting a point-to-multipoint link from the table does not delete the corresponding sites even if there are no other links or transmitters relating to that site. 7. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. the antenna on each site is aligned with the other antenna. select the line of the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete. 2. after the point-to-multipoint has been created. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Note: Deleting a microwave link in this manner does not delete the corresponding sites even if there are no other links or transmitters related to that site. be careful to select the line representing the point-to-multipoint link. The microwave link is deleted. For information on creating links. the microwave link must first exist between the site of the hub of the point-to-multipoint link and another site. You can also delete a point-to-multipoint link by deleting the row associated with it in the Point-to-Multipoint table.6 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse Before you can define a microwave link as part of the point-to-multipoint link.7 Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link To delete a microwave link from a point-to-multipoint link: 1. and tilt of the antenna are calculated as a average of that needed for all link antennas. click the microwave link you want to add to the point-to-multipoint link. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. Do not select the site icon ( ). other factors such as the addition of new microwave links may mean that the settings of the hub antenna need to be readjusted. To add a microwave link to a point-to-multipoint link using the mouse: 1. see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185.1. The point-to-multipoint link is deleted. When selecting a point-to-multipoint link.9. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Click the Expand button ( c. b. In a pointto-multipoint link.9.1. However. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link of which you want to recalculate the hub antenna settings. The context menu appears. Open the context menu of the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete: Either a. azimuth. The context menu appears. The context menu appears.8 Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link To delete a point-to-multipoint link: 1. 2. d. 6. Select Add a Link from the context menu. 7.Atoll User Manual 7. The context menu appears. select the microwave link you want to delete. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window.9 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub When a microwave link consists of only two sites. 2. Right-click the microwave link you want to delete from the point-to-multipoint link. 5. Select Delete from the context menu. Atoll can recalculate the settings for the point-tomultipoint hub antenna. The pointer shape changes ( ). Click the Expand button ( 3. 2. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint link. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. Atoll calculates these settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna when the point-to-multipoint link is created. 4. 4. To make Atoll recalculate the settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna: 1.9. it is impossible for the antenna on the hub to be directly aligned with the antenna on each link. On the map. 3. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. b. 7. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete.1.

6. 7.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 5. ) and you can © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 231 . Click OK to update the values for the point-to-multipoint antennas.1. Select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint hub. azimuth. When the values for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna are recalculated. the point-to-multipoint link antennas may need to be adjusted accordingly. 2. 9. In the "Antenna" subsection. 8. A dialogue appears with the recalculated height. select the Transfer the misalignments to links check box. and tilt values for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna.9. Click the antenna icon (the point changes: ) and rotate it to its new azimuth. 7. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue.10 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse To use the mouse to adjust the azimuth of the point-to-multipoint hub antenna: 1. The Properties dialogue appears. If you want Atoll calculate the effect of the recalculated values for the hub antenna on the link antennas. The point-to-multipoint icon changes ( now rotate it manually. Select Properties from the context menu. click the Calculate button ( ) to the right of the Tilt field.

Atoll User Manual 232 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

displaying using hot spot zone 31 coverage predictions restricting sites studied (MW) 192 cursors 40 CW Measurement Analysis Tool printing data 56 D Data tab 15 data tables adding a field 42 changing column width 45 changing row height 45 copying data 47 deleting a field 43 displaying columns 46 editing 43 exporting data 49 filtering 60 filtering by selection 62 filtering by several criteria 63 filtering. 140 heights. semi-automatic (MW) 218 clearance. examples 64 formatting column headers 45 formatting table columns 45 freezing columns 46 hiding columns 46 importing data 50 moving columns 46 opening 41 opening record properties from table 44 pasting data 47 printing 52 restoring after filtering 64 sorting 60 B backup 90 configuring 90 recovering a backup 91 BER graphs creating (MW) 136 budget configuring report (MW) 206 multiple microwave links. calculating for 204 C cables creating (MW) 137 microwave 137 channel search. printing (MW) 126 antennas. adjusting automatically (MW) 200 heights. creating 123 point-to-multipoint link. defining 33 report. displaying for microwave links 194 column headers formatting 45 columns changing width 45 displaying 46 freezing 46 hiding 46 moving 46 © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 233 . 132 changing relative position on the map 20 compatibility with equipment (MW) 138. displaying using focus zone 31 report. importing (MW) 125. defining 156 unfreezing 46 computation zone drawing 30 editing 34 Fit to Map Window 30 importing 30 polygon. creating from 30 Connection Properties 85 context menu 17 renaming objects 17 coordinate system 81 setting 82 coordinates. 225 single microwave link. calculating for 206. adjusting 230 point-to-multipoint link. adjusting with the mouse 231 single antenna patterns. adjusting (MW) 200 heights. 139 compatibility with equipment. searching by 73 coverage prediction exporting results 37 geogrphic export zone.Index Index A antenna antenna patterns. assistant (MW) 139. optimising (MW) 200 microwave 123 microwave antenna properties 125 microwave. copying (MW) 126 antenna patterns. editing (MW) 125 archiving all modifications to the database 87 only site data to the database 87 automatic backup 90 configuring 90 recovering a backup 91 availability objectives microwave links.

71 with subfolders 71 filtering zone deleting 33 drawing 29 Fit to Map Window 30 importing 30 polygon. see "templates" DTM maps representing different areas 111 data tables by several criteria 63 examples 64 restoring after filtering 64 using a polygon 29.Atoll User Manual sorting by one column 61 sorting by several columns 61 unfreezing columns 46 viewing properties 42 XML files. importing from 52 database archiving all modifications 87 archiving only site data 87 connecting to 84 Connection Properties 85 creating a document from 84 refreshing document 86 resolving data conflicts 88 working with 83 digital hierarchy 132 display changing properties 21 defining display type 22 display type. using for 69 filtering data tables by selection 62 H hot spot zone creating 31 editing 34 explanation 31 Fit to Map Window 31 importing 31 using to display coverage prediction report 31 234 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . unique 22 display type. properties of (MW) 131 Explorer window 15 Data tab 15 Geo tab 15 layers 16 Modules tab 15 using tabs 15 G Geo tab 15 geographic export zone creating 33 Fit to Map Window 34 importing 34 polygon. using for 69 transmitter list. creating from 31 using to display coverage prediction report 31 folder configuration 69 applying a saved configuration 70 creating 70 deleting 71 exporting 70 importing 70 reapplying current configuration 70 frequency bands long-haul (MW) 145 medium-haul (MW) 146 microwave 146 short-haul (MW) 146 frequency planning (MW) 216 frequency sub-bands microwave 147 E equipment compatibility with antennas (MW) 138. 139 compatibility with antennas. discrete values 22 display type. 140 importing (MW) 132 transceiver. assistant (MW) 139. 57 by several properties 58 examples 59 with subfolders 71 F field adding to a table 42 deleting from a table 43 filter site list. creating from 34 grouping 56 by a property 56. exporting to 51 XML files. creating from 30 Find toolbar 72 focus zone creating 31 editing 34 explanation 31 Fit to Map Window 31 importing 31 polygon. value intervals 22 display coordinate system 81 Distance Measurement tool 28 document creating from database 79. 84 creating from template 79. 80 geographic data 79 information needed to create 79 microwave data 79 microwave equipment 79 refreshing from the database 86 setting basic parameters 81 document templates.

defining 156 budget. creating a report on 217 site parity. printing 126 © Forsk 2010 antenna properties 125 antenna/equipment compatibility 138. calculating for single link 204 budget. copying 126 antenna patterns. 178. modifying 154 clearance. 214 classes.452 model 153 microwave propagation model 151 multi-hop links. 139. studying 176. 221 using assistant (MW) 135. importing 132 error performance events 155 error performance objectives 155 error performance parameters 155 finding by site 58 frequency bands 146 frequency planning 216 frequency sub-bands 147 global properties. 132 availability objectives. 221 IRF. intersection 184 LOS between sites. inserting (MW) 203 performance objectives 154 point-to-multipoint link 227 point-to-multipoint links. mapping simple links to 210 multi-hop. point-to-multipoint. mapping links to 229 profile analysis 193 quality objectives.Index I interference analysis several links (MW) 226 single link (MW) 224 interference analysis (MW) 221 interference reduction factor table (MW) 134. modifying 205. calculating 204 restricting sites studied 192 semi-automatic channel search 218 simple link. creating 154 classes. defining 156 grouping by site 58 interference analysis 221 interference on a single link. see point-to-multipoint links Location Finder searching by coordinates 73 searching by text property 73 long-haul frequency bands (MW) 145 M manufacturers (MW) 123 map centring on a selected object 28 exporting as image 40 measuring distances 28 moving 27 printing 52 refreshing display 72 saving as image 39 Map toolbar 74 measurement units. see "interference reduction factor" L label 23 Lambert Conformal-Conic projection 81 layers 16 legend adding object type 24 displaying 24 displaying Legend window 29 printing Legend window 56 line of sight area intersection of areas (MW) 184 studying (MW) 176. 178. adjusting automatically 200 antenna heights. analysing 224 interference on several links. analysing 226 interference reduction factor 133. 140 interference reduction factor (MW) 133. importing 125. defining 155 reliability analysis 203 required margins. creating 137 calculation parameters 156 calculation parameters. optimising 200 antenna patterns. 225 budget. 179 microwave ITU-R P. creating 190 simple link. displaying on the map 217 sorting by site 58 spectrum analyser 219 studying LOS between sites 176 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 235 . 179 line of sight area (MW) 176 lines editing 34 link. creating 208 passive repeater 201 passive repeater. 140 antennas 123 antennas. calculating for multiple links 206. 221 LOS between sites. adjusting 200 antenna heights. displaying 194 equipment. 139 antenna/equipment compatibility assistant 139. editing 125 site parity 217 site parity. setting 82 measuring distances on the map 28 medium-haul frequency bands (MW) 146 microwave error performance events 155 microwave error performance objectives 155 microwave error performance parameters 155 Microwave Link Analysis printing 56 Microwave Link toolbar 75 microwave links 173 antenna heights. setting as active 206 simple links 185 single antenna patterns. creating 123 antennas. configuring report 206 cables 137 cables.

230 creating 227 mapping links 229 properties 228 point-to-multipoint links 227 adding links 229 antenna. deleting 191 transceiver equipment. 57 switching between property dialogues 18 236 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 153 properties changing display 21 grouping objects by 56. creating from 54 profile analysis microwave 193 options (MW) 194 printing (MW) 195 reflections. adjusting with the mouse 231 creating 227 deleting 230 deleting a link from 230 global properties 228 links. 57 grouping by several properties 58 grouping. 71 using as filtering zone 30 printing antenna patterns (MW) 126 CW Measurement Analysis Tool 56 data tables and reports 52 defining print layout 54 docking windows 56 Legend window 56 map 52 Microwave Link Analysis 56 Point Analysis window 56 print preview 55 profile analysis (MW) 195 recommendations 53 Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool 56 printing zone drawing 53 Fit to Map Window 54 importing 54 polygon. using as 54 using as computation zone 30 using as filter 29. creating 132 waveguides 137 waveguides. studying (MW) 210 Values tab (MW) 196 viewing (MW) 193 profile values exporting data 199 importing data 199 projection coordinate system 81 Lambert Conformal-Conic projection 81 Universal Transverse Mercator projection 81 propagation model microwave ITU-R P. properties of 131 trunk types.452 model 153 microwave propagation model 151 Microwave Propagation Model. defining parameters 151. examples 59 hiding 16 label 23 tip text 24 visibility scale 23 P Page Setup. modifying 191 template. using as 31 geographic export zone. mapping to 210 reliability analysis 210 multipoint link. deleting 191 template field. adding 191 template field. creating 137 workflow 173 Microwave Propagation Model defining parameters 151. adjusting 230 antenna. using as 34 printing zone. 153 microwave radio links template 79 Modules tab 15 multi-hop links 208 adding links to 209 creating 208 links. see "printing" Panoramic window 14. 27 passive microwave repeaters creating 202 performance objectives microwave links 154 Point Analysis window printing 56 points editing 34 point-to-multipoint link adding a link 229. see point-to-multipoint link multi-user environment 83 O objects changing transparency 23 deleting 17 displaying 16 displaying properties 18 grouping 56 grouping by a property 56. adding on the map 230 links. mapping to 229 properties 228 polygon deleting polygon filter 33 drawing a polygon filter 29 editing 34 focus zone.Atoll User Manual template field.

adding (MW) 191 field. 73 short-haul frequency bands (MW) 146 site moving on the map 19 moving to a higher location 19 properties. accessing from the map 18 site list 67 adding 68 adding site 68 creating 68 editing 69 filter. changing 23 trunk types. defining 155 T table columns formatting 45 tables. deleting (MW) 191 field. microwave creating 132 R redo 72 reflection analysis report display (MW) 214 reflections studying (MW) 210 refresh 72 from the database 86 reliability analysis (MW) 203 renaming 17 default object names 17 repeaters passive repeater (MW) 201 passive repeater.Index Q quality objectives microwave links. microwave creating 137 waveguides. microwave link 217 creating a report 217 displaying on the map 217 sorting sorting tables by one column 61 sorting tables by several columns 61 with subfolders 71 spectrum analyser (MW) 219 Standard toolbar 74 station template creating (MW) 191 modifying (MW) 191 subfolders creating 71 U undo 72 Universal Transverse Mercator projection 81 user configuration 66 creating 67 exporting 67 importing 67 V Vector Edition toolbar 75 visibility scale 23 W waveguides creating (MW) 137 waveguides and cables. choosing 27 Search toolbar 75 searching for map objects 72. microwave 137 windows cascading 14 docking 14 floating 14 X XML © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 237 . see "data tables" templates 79 deleting (MW) 191 field. calculating (MW) 204 row height changing 45 rulers displaying 28 S scale level. modifying (MW) 191 microwave radio links 79 Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool printing 56 tip text 24 tool tips. using as 69 site parity. accessing from the Explorer window 18 properties. inserting (MW) 203 reports printing 52 required margins. see "tip text" toolbar icons 74 Map 74 Microwave Link 75 Search 75 Standard 74 Vector Edition 75 transceiver equipment properties of (MW) 131 transmitter list 67 adding 68 adding transmitter 68 creating 68 editing 69 editing filter 69 transparency.

Atoll User Manual exporting data tables to 51 importing data tables from 52 Z zooming choosing a scale 27 in on a specific area 27 238 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

© Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 239 .

rue des Briquetiers 31700 Blagnac . P.User Manual Microwave Links version 2.com . 66 Jianzhong Road.3 AT283_UMM_E2 December 2010  Head Office 7. Guangzhou. 3/F. 510665. No.USA Tel: +1 312 674 4846 Fax: +1 312 674 4847  China Office Suite 302. Jiadu Commercial Building. West Tower. of China Tel: +86 20 8553 8938 Fax: +86 20 8553 8285 www.France Tel: +33 562 747 210 Fax: +33 562 747 211  US Office 200 South Wacker Drive .Suite 3100 Chicago. Tianhe Hi-Tech Industrial Zone.8. R.forsk. IL 60606 .

You're Reading a Free Preview

Download
scribd
/*********** DO NOT ALTER ANYTHING BELOW THIS LINE ! ************/ var s_code=s.t();if(s_code)document.write(s_code)//-->